Hexagon Documentation Site Export

CAESAR II Users Guide
Hexagon Documentation
Generated 12/17/2023
Main Window
After starting CAESAR II, the software opens the main window consisting of:
1. Quick access toolbar
2. Ribbon tabs
3. Ribbon groups and commands on each tab
4. News channel, containing release, event, and training information
5. Status bar
You can keep this window as small as possible to conserve screen space.
File Tab
Provides commands to create, save, and manage piping and structural jobs.
New
Main window ribbon: Home > New

Main window ribbon: File > New
Starts a new piping or structural job.
New Job Name Specification Dialog Box
Open
Main window ribbon: Home > Open
Main window ribbon: File > Open
Opens an existing piping or structural job. Use the Open dialog box to browse to and select
the job file to open. Click System to jump to the CAESAR II system folder. Click Example to
jump to the CAESAR II delivered example jobs folder.
You can also roll-back to a previous revision of a piping input job using the Open dialog box.
CAESAR II saves the last 25 revisions.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.
3. In the Previous Revisions list in the bottom-right corner of the Open dialog box, select
the revision to rollback to.
4. Click Open.
The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.
5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.
Recent
Main window ribbon: File > Recent
Allows you to select a file to open from a list of recently opened files.
Folder Access
Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access
Provides access to commonly used software folders. Select one of the following options:
System Folder
Default Data Folder
Backup Folder
Examples
Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access > Examples
Opens the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\software version\Examples folder.
System Folder
Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access > System
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Open System Folder
Opens the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\[software version]\System folder. From

this folder, you can access the configuration file, and the Style, Templates, and Translations
folders.
Default Data Folder
Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access > Default Data Folder
Sets the default data (project) folder without selecting a specific job file. Some CAESAR II
options do not require that a job be selected but must know in which folder to work. The
command displays the Default Data Folder Specification dialog box.
All CAESAR II generated data files are written to the specified folder.
Click Examples to set the default data folder to the Examples folder delivered with CAESAR II.
Backup
Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access > Backup
Opens the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\[software version]\Backup folder.
Help
Main window ribbon: Help > Search Help

Main window ribbon: File > Help
Opens the software help file. You can search across all CAESAR II guides.
About
Main window ribbon: File > About
Displays the CAESAR II version, copyright information, and the following tools:
Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Help > Quick Reference Guide
Main window ribbon: File > About > Quick Reference Guide
Displays the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide in .pdf format. You can use the guide to learn
software basics.
Configuration Options
Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Configuration Editor
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Configuration Editor
Main window ribbon: File > About > Configuration Editor
Piping Input menu: Environment > CAESAR II Configuration
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the Configuration Editor. You can customize language, display, and other software
settings. For more information, see Configuration Editor.
Check for Updates
Main window ribbon: Help > Check for Updates
Main window ribbon: File > About > Check for Updates
Verifies whether the most current version of the software is installed.

Contact Us
Main window ribbon: Help > Contact Us
Main window ribbon: File > About > Contact Us
Opens an email to Hexagon CAS technical support in your default email client.
Smart Support
Main window ribbon: Help > Smart Support
Main window ribbon: File > About > Support
Opens the Smart Support window on the Hexagon web site. You can log in to Smart Support
or request a user name if you are a new user.
Exit
Main window ribbon: File > Exit
Closes the software.
Home Tab
Displays the most commonly used CAESAR II commands and modules.
New
Main window ribbon: Home > New
Main window ribbon: File > New
Starts a new piping or structural job.
Open
Main window ribbon: Home > Open
Main window ribbon: File > Open

Opens an existing piping or structural job. Use the Open dialog box to browse to and select
the job file to open. Click System to jump to the CAESAR II system folder. Click Example to
jump to the CAESAR II delivered example jobs folder.
You can also roll-back to a previous revision of a piping input job using the Open dialog box.
CAESAR II saves the last 25 revisions.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.
3. In the Previous Revisions list in the bottom-right corner of the Open dialog box, select
the revision to rollback to.
4. Click Open.
The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.
5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.

Piping Input
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Piping Input
Defines piping job parameters. For more information, see Piping Input Reference.
Underground Pipe Modeler

Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Underground Pipe Modeler
Converts an existing piping model to buried pipe. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler.
Structural Input
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Structural Input
Defines structural steel for the job. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler.
Static Analysis
Main window ribbon: Home > Analysis > Static Analysis
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Static Analysis
In the Classic Piping Input window:
Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Static Load Cases
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Edit Static Load Cases
Performs static analysis of pipe or structure. The command is available after error checking
the input files. For more information, see Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box.
Dynamic Analysis
Main window ribbon: Home > Analysis > Dynamic Analysis
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Dynamic Analysis

Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Dynamic Load Cases
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Dynamic Analysis
Performs dynamic analysis of pipe or structure. The command is avail\-able after error
checking the input files. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis.
Static
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Static
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Static
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: View Static Results
Displays the results of a static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor.
Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > Generate Stress Isometrics
Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress Isometrics.
Configure
Specifies computer-specific and model-specific properties. For more information, see

Configuration Editor.
CAESAR II saves properties in the CAESAR.cfg configuration file. When you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file, first in the data folder, then in the system
folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, the software displays an error
and exits.
Materials
Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Materials
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Materials
Edits or adds material to the CAESAR II material database. For more information, see Material
Database.
FEA Translation
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > FEA Translation
Opens the model in the CAESAR II FEA Translator. The translator incorporates finite element
analysis into your pipe stress analysis. You can calculate and apply more relevant FEA-based
SIFs and flexibilities (k factors) for branch connections.
For more information on using FEA tools to perform finite element analysis, see the FEATools
User Manual.
The definition of in-plane and out-plane SIFs in a tee might change in the translated
CAESAR II model based on the orientation of elements forming the tee. For more information,
see In-Plane and Out-Plane SIFs After FEA Translation.
Results Comparisons
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > Results Comparisons
Opens the model in the CAESAR II Comparison Tool. This utility compares output results from
multiple analyses, including values for displacements, forces and moments, restraint forces,
and restraint moments.
User Manual.
Criticality Evaluation
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > Criticality Evaluation
Opens the model in the Piping System Criticality Evaluator. This utility analyzes system data,
such as the number of pressure cycles, system D/T ratio, operating temperatures or
pressures, and thermal conditions, and alerts you to areas of risk in the model.
User Manual.
NozzlePRO
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > NozzlePRO
Opens the model in NozzlePRO, which is a single-component analysis tool for piping and
pressure vessels. You can analyze individual nozzles, clips, lugs, saddles or other branch
connections.
For more information on using NozzlePRO, see the FEATools User Manual.
Analysis Tab
Displays analysis modules for piping and components.
Static Analysis
Performs static analysis of pipe or structure. The command is available after error checking
the input files. For more information, see Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box.
Dynamic Analysis
Performs dynamic analysis of pipe or structure. The command is avail\-able after error
checking the input files. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis.
SIFs @ Intersections
Main window ribbon: Analysis > SIFs > SIFs @ Intersections
Calculates stress intensification factors at tee intersections. For more information, see
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors.
SIFs @ Bends
Main window ribbon: Analysis > SIFs > SIFs @ Bends
Calculates stress intensification factors at bends. For more information, see Bend Stress
Intensification Factors.
WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components/Equipment > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more information, see WRC Bulletin
107(537).
Equipment Analysis
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components/Equipment > Equipment Analysis

Provides a common interface for evaluating piping loads on centrifugal pumps, centrifugal
compressors, heaters, steam turbines, air-cooled heat exchangers, and feedwater heaters. For
more information, see Equipment Analysis.
EN-1591 Flanges
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components/Equipment > EN-1591 Flanges
Opens the Component Manager window for evaluating piping loads on EN-1591 gasketed
circular flange connections. For more information, see EN-1591 Flanges.
ASME/ANSI Flanges
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components/Equipment > ASME/ANSI Flanges
Performs ASME and ANSI flange stress calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations.
B31.G
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components/Equipment > B31.G
Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining Strength
Calculations (B31G).
Expansion Joint Rating
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components/Equipment > Expansion Joint Rating
Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more information, see Expansion Joint
Rating.
AISC
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Steel > AISC
Performs an AISC code check on structural steel elements. For more information, see
Structural Steel Checks - AISC.
Output Tab
Provides commands for output of piping or structural calculations.
Static
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Static
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Static
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: View Static Results
Displays the results of a static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor.
Harmonic
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Harmonic
Displays harmonic loading results. For more information, see Dynamic Output Window.
Spectrum/Modal
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Spectrum/Modal
Displays natural frequency/mode shape calculations or uniform/force spectrum loading

results. For more information, see Dynamic Output Window.
Time History
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Time History
Displays time history load simulation results. For more information, see Dynamic Output
Window.
Static Animation
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Static
Static Output Processor menu: Options > View Animation

Static Output Processor Standard toolbar: View Animation
Shortcut key:
ALT+M - Motion
Displays animated graphic simulations of static analysis results. For more information, see
View Animation.
Harmonic Animation
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Harmonic
Displays animated graphic simulations of harmonic loading results. For more information, see
Dynamic Output Animation Window.
Mode Shapes Animation

Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Mode Shapes
Displays animated graphic simulations of natural frequency/mode shape calculations or

uniform/force spectrum loading results. For more information, see Dynamic Output Animation
Window.
Time History Animation
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Time History
Displays animated graphic simulations of time history load simulation results. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Animation Window.
Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > Generate Stress Isometrics
Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress Isometrics.
I-Configure
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > I-Configure
Starts Alias I-Configure.
Interfaces Tab
Main window ribbon: Interfaces tab
Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical). For more
information, see External Interfaces.
Utilities Tab
Provides miscellaneous support and troubleshooting utilities.
Configure
Specifies computer-specific and model-specific properties. For more information, see

CAESAR II saves properties in the CAESAR.cfg configuration file. When you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file, first in the data folder, then in the system
folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, the software displays an error
and exits.
Materials
Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Materials

Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Materials
Edits or adds material to the CAESAR II material database. For more information, see Material
Database.
Accounting
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Accounting
Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports. For more

information, see Accounting.
Change Model Units
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Change Model Units
Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. For more information, see Change Model
Units.
Calculator
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Calculator
Launches an on-screen calculator.
Create/Review Units
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Create/Review Units
Creates custom sets of units or lets you review the units configuration. For more information,
see Create/Review Units.
Multi-job Analysis
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Multi-job Analysis
Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention. For more information,
see Batch Stream Processing.
System Folder
Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access > System
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Open System Folder
Opens the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\[software version]\System folder. From

this folder, you can access the configuration file, and the Style, Templates, and Translations
folders.
Reset to Default Layout
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Reset to Default Layout
Main window ribbon: Layout > Reset to Default Layout
Restores all window layouts to their default positions and removes all toolbar customizations.
CRC Check
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > CRC Check
Assesses whether the version of CAESAR II you are running matches the originally installed
files. Run the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) to identify if any files are corrupted. When you
click CRC Check in Utilities > Diagnostics, the software opens the CRCCHK File Verification
dialog box and begins scanning all CAESAR II files. When the scan completes, the CRC Status
column indicates if there were any files that did not match the originally installed software
files, and the File Name column shows the file path. In addition, the scan results show how
many files were read and how many errors the software detected.
The following issues can contribute to a CRC Check failure.
The distribution DVD is corrupted. Contact Hexagon CAS Support for a new DVD.
The wrong files were installed (for example a service pack was installed for the wrong
version of the software).
A virus has infected the file. Use virus-detecting software to correct this issue.
You received a new file from Hexagon CAS. The CRC value is expected to be different in
this circumstance, and it is not a problem.
Build Version
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Build Version
Scans all EXE, DLL, and COM files for the ID Version information. The software defines ID
Version information for these files to indicate version and build details for the file. The
software also displays additional information about the file, such as the name, file size, build
number, operating system, and date and time of the file. For more specifics on the ID Version
file information, click Details at the bottom of the dialog box.
Error Review
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Error Review
Provides a search dialog for error codes. When you select Error Review, the software opens
the Additional Error Information dialog box. Type the error number returned by the software
during analysis, and click OK. The software displays additional details about the error
message and any resolution steps. For general information on error handling in the CAESAR II
software, see CAESAR II Error Processing.
QA Test
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > QA Test
Compares output file information between a new version of the software and the previously
verified version. You can use the QATEST software to verify the output generated by a specific
version of CAESAR II. For more information on the fields compared, click QA Test and then
click the CAESAR II icon in the upper-left corner of the dialog box, and select QATEST
Information.
Help Tab
Provides commands to access product information and online support.
Product Reference
Search Help
Main window ribbon: Help > Search Help

Main window ribbon: File > Help
Opens the search field of the software help file. You can search across all CAESAR II guides
User's Guide
Main window ribbon: Help > User's Guide
Displays the CAESAR II User's Guide in .pdf format.
Quick Reference Guide
Main window ribbon: Help > Quick Reference Guide
Main window ribbon: File > About > Quick Reference Guide
Displays the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide in .pdf format.
Applications Guide
Main window ribbon: Help > Applications Guide
Displays the CAESAR II Applications Guide in .pdf format.
What's New
Main window ribbon: Help > What's New
Displays the CAESAR II ReadMe in .pdf format. The file provides information such as new
features, fixes, system requirements, and version compatibility for the software release.
QA Certificate
Main window ribbon: Help > QA Certificate
Displays the quality assurance certificate for the software in .pdf format.
Tip of the Day
Main window ribbon: Help > Tip of the Day
Displays the Tip of the Day window.

In addition to commands on the Help tab, CAESAR II help is context-sensitive. You
can access on-screen help by clicking ? (when available) or pressing F1 when the cursor is in
an input field. The help then displays the applicable topic.
Online Support
Product Notifications
Main window ribbon: Help > Product Notifications
Opens the product registration window on the Hexagon PPM CAS web site. Registration
allows you to receive up-to-date product information.
Check for Updates
Main window ribbon: Help > Check for Updates
Main window ribbon: File > About > Check for Updates
Verifies whether the most current version of the software is installed.
Contact Us
Main window ribbon: Help > Contact Us
Main window ribbon: File > About > Contact Us
Opens an email to Hexagon PPM CAS technical support in your default email client.
Smart Support
Main window ribbon: Help > Smart Support
Main window ribbon: File > About > Support
Opens the Smart Support window on the Hexagon PPM web site. You can log in to Smart
Support or request a user name if you are a new user.
Layout Menu
The Layout menu, located on the right side of the main window ribbon, provides options for
changing the look of the CAESAR II user interface.
Theme
Main window ribbon: Layout > Theme
Defines the color theme of the software interface. Select a theme from the list, such as Light
or Dark. Light is default selection.
Languages
Main window ribbon: Layout > Languages
Defines the language of the software interface. Select a language from the list, such as
English, Chinese, or Japanese. English is the default selection.
Icon Sizes
Main window ribbon: Layout > Icon Sizes
Defines the icon sizes in the main window ribbons and the Piping Input toolbars. Select Small,
Medium, or Large. Medium is the default selection.
Reset to Default Layout
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Reset to Default Layout
Main window ribbon: Layout > Reset to Default Layout
Restores all window layouts to the default positions, resets all toolbar customizations to their
default states, and resets the video driver to OpenGL.
ASCII Text File Rules

You can use text files in multiple locations in CAESAR II for importing data. You must follow
ASCII text standards to create an ASCII-compliant file that the software can successfully read.
Do not use special characters.
Do not use TAB because it is a special character. Instead, use SPACE multiple times.
Use a decimal point with all numeric values. Numeric values are real, floating-point
values.
Use exponential notation when necessary.

Neatly arrange columns of data using spaces. This is not required for ASCII text, but
makes the data readable. The software ignores the extra spaces during import.
To add comments, start a line with *.
CAESAR II supports importing the following text files:
Piping component (.pcf). For more information, see Import PCF.
Displacements (.disp). For more information, see Import/Export Displacements from

File.
Fatigue analysis (.fat). For more information, see Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems
and Creating a .fat File.
Spectrum data. For more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data.
CADWorx valve and flange database (.vhd). For more information, see Valve Flange
Database.
Structural steel (.str). For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler and Structural
Steel Example #2.
Fiberglass reinforced pipe property data. For more information, see FRP Property Data
File.
CAESAR II Neutral File (.cii).
CAESAR II Data Matrix.
Piping external interface (.frc). For more information, see AFT IMPULSE, PIPENET, LIQT,
and FlowMaster.
Pipeplus external interface (.pnf). For more information, see Pipeplus.
Print format (.inp). For more information, see Print.
Shortcut Keys
The following shortcut keys are available in the software.
Key Command
File Commands
CTRL+N New
CTRL+O Open
CTRL+S Save
CTRL+E Error Check
CTRL+R Batch Run
CTRL+P Print
Edit Commands
CTRL+X Cut
CTRL+C Copy
CTRL+V Paste
ALT+C Continue
CTRL+I Insert Element

CTRL+D Delete Element
CTRL+F Find Node
CTRL+G View/Set Coordinates
CTRL+M Distance
PAGE DOWN Next Element
PAGE UP Previous Element
CTRL+PAGE DOWN Alternate Next Element

(Only displays data that changed from the original element)
CTRL+PAGE UP Alternate Previous Element

(Only displays data that changed from the original element)
CTRL+HOME First Element
CTRL+END Last Element
CTRL+Z Undo
CTRL+Y Redo
Model Commands
CTRL+B Break
CTRL+SHIFT+V Valve Flange Database
CTRL+J Expansion Joint
CTRL+T Title
CTRL+H Hanger Design Control Data
Options Commands (Graphic modules only)
CTRL+ALT+U Range
CTRL+ALT+R Restraints
CTRL+ALT+A Anchors
CTRL+SHIFT+D Displacements
CTRL+ALT+H Hangers
CTRL+ALT+F Forces
ALT+SHIFT+P Axis
CTRL+ALT+N Node Numbers
ALT+SHIFT+L Length
ALT+SHIFT+T Tees
CTRL+ALT+D Diameters
CTRL+ALT+W Wall Thickness
CTRL+ALT+M Materials
ALT+SHIFT+I Insulation Thickness
CTRL+1 Temperatures
CTRL+2 Temperatures
CTRL+3 Temperatures
CTRL+4 Temperatures
CTRL+5 Temperatures
CTRL+6 Temperatures
CTRL+7 Temperatures
CTRL+8 Temperatures
CTRL+9 Temperatures
View Commands (Graphic modules only)
ALT+F9 Reset
ALT+Z Front View

(X-Y plane)
ALT+SHIFT+Z Back View

(Y-X plane)
ALT+Y Top View

(X-Z plane)
ALT+SHIFT+Y Bottom View

(Z-X plane)
ALT+SHIFT+X Left-side View

(Y-Z plane)
ALT+X Right-side View

(Z-Y plane)
F10 Southeast ISO View

Miscellaneous Commands
F2 Jump to Node Numbers
F3 Jump to Deltas
F5 Jump to Operating Conditions
F4 Jump to Diameter
F6 Jump to Materials
You cannot jump to another field when Materials is
selected.
F7 Jump to Elastic Properties
F8 Jump to Densities
F9 Jump to Line Number

You cannot jump to another field when Line Number is
selected.
ALT+1 Node Numbers
ALT+2 Deltas
ALT+3 Pipe Sizes

ALT+4 Operating Conditions
ALT+5 Materials
ALT+6 Elastic Properties
ALT+7 Densities
ALT+8 Aux Tools Toolbar
ALT+M View Animation

(Animation view only)
Configuration Editor
Specifies configuration options for CAESAR II and saves the options to the CAESAR.cfg file.
Displays the Configuration Editor dialog box.
The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains instructions that dictate how the software
operates on your computer and how it performs an analysis. Each time that you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to
perform the analysis.
If the configuration file is not found in the current data directory, the software then
searches the installation folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal
error is generated and CAESAR II exits.
The CAESAR.cfg file may vary from computer to computer, and many of the
configuration spreadsheet values modify the analysis. To produce identical results between
computers, use the same configuration file. Make a copy of the setup file to be archived with
input and output data so that identical reruns can be made. The units file, if it is modified,
must also be identical if the same results are to be produced.
View the current CAESAR.cfg file
1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup .
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
In the left-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheets categories display.

In the right-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheet values for that category
display.
The Data Directory displays the path where the current configuration file is stored.
2. Click the title in the Categories pane to navigate to the appropriate configuration
spreadsheets.
3. Click the X in the right-hand corner to exit.
Create a new CAESAR.cfg file
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
Control display.
2. Click Save and Exit located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.
Change the current CAESAR.cfg file for this computer
1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup .
Control display.
2. Click the description to change a value for a configuration attribute,
A drop-down menu which contains the possible values for the attribute displays.
3. Select a new value.
The new value displays in bold text.
4. Continue changing values until you are finished.
5. Click Save and Exit located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.
Reset the current CAESAR.cfg file to the default settings
Click Alt D to reset an individual field value in the current configuration file to its default
value.
Click Reset All -> Set Current Defaults to reset all the values for the current
configuration file to the default values.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
Control display.
2. Click the Reset All drop-down menu.
The various default file options display.
3. Select a default file.
The values in left-hand pane change to the default values. Values change to normal text
from bold text.
4. Save the changes.
The following sections explain each of the CAESAR II configuration file Category options.
Computational Control
The Computational Control category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Convergence Tolerances
Input Spreadsheet Defaults
Miscellaneous
Convergence Tolerances
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Defines the value used by the software to check the ratio of off-diagonal to on-diagonal
coefficients in the row. The default value is 1.0 e+10. If this ratio is greater than the
decomposition singularity tolerance, then a numerical error may occur. This problem does not
have to be associated with a system singularity. This condition can exist when very small,
and/or long pipes are connected to very short, and/or large pipes. These solutions have
several general characteristics:
When computer precision errors of this type occur, they are very local in nature. They
typically affect only a single element or very small part of the model and are readily
noticeable upon inspection.
The 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E11 or 1E12 and still provide a reasonable check on
solution accuracy. Any solution computed after increasing the limit should always be
checked closely for reasonableness. At 1E11 or 1E12, the number of significant figures
in the local solution is reduced to two or three.
Although the 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E20 or 1E30 to get the job to run, it is
important to remember that the possibility for a locally errant solution exists when
stiffness ratios get this high. Solutions should be carefully checked.
Friction Angle Variation

Specifies the friction sliding angle variation. The default value is 15-degrees.
This parameter had more significance in software versions prior to 2.1. It is currently
only used in the first iteration when a restraint goes from the non-sliding to sliding state. All
subsequent iterations compensate for the angle variation automatically.
Friction Normal Force Variation

Defines the amount of variation in the normal force that is permitted before an adjustment is
made in the sliding friction force. The default value is 0.15, or 15 percent. Normally, you
should not adjust this value.
Friction Slide Multiplier

Specifies the internal friction sliding force multiplier.
You should never adjust this value unless you are instructed to do so by
Hexagon CAS Support.
Friction Stiffness
Specifies the friction restraint stiffness. The default value for the friction restraint stiffness is
1.0E+06 lb/in.
Typical units (depending on your unit system):
lb/in
N/mm
N/m
N/cm
If the structural load normal to a friction restraint is less than the restraint load multiplied by
the coefficient of friction, the pipe will not move at this support – this restraint node is "non-
sliding." To model the non-sliding state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions
perpendicular to the restraint's line of action to oppose any sliding motion.
Nonlinear convergence problems may be alleviated by reducing the friction restraint stiffness.
Lower friction stiffness will more readily distribute friction loads throughout the system and
allow nonlinear convergence. However, this lower stiffness affects the accuracy of the results.
Lower stiffness values permit more "non-sliding" movement but given the indeterminate
nature of the friction problem in general, this error may not be crucial.
Rod Increment (Degrees)

Specifies the maximum amount of angular change that any one support can experience
between iterations. For difficult-to-converge problems, values of 0.1 have proven effective.
When small values are used, you should be prepared for many iterations. The total number of
iterations can be estimated from the following:
Estimate number of Iterations = 1.5(x)/(r)/(Rod Increment)
Where:
x = maximum horizontal displacement at any one rod
r = rod length at that support

Rod Tolerance (Degrees)
Specifies the angular plus-or-minus permitted convergence error. Unless the change from
iteration n to iteration n+1 is less than this value, the rod will not converge. The default value is
1.0 degree.
For systems subject to large horizontal displacements, values of 5.0 degrees for
convergence tolerances have been used successfully.
Input Spreadsheet Defaults
Alpha Tolerance
Indicates the value at which the software determines that a value in aTemperature field on the
Classic Piping Input Dialog is a thermal strain (linear thermal expansion) or a temperature.
The default value is 0.05. Any value in the Temperature fields whose absolute magnitude is
less than 0.05 is taken to be a unitless Thermal Expansion coefficient in terms of inches per
inch or mm per mm.
Coefficient of Friction (Mu)

Specifies the value that the software applies by default as the coefficient of friction to all
translational restraints. If you type 0, which is the default value, the software does not apply
any friction.
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified rotational restraint stiffnesses.
in•lb/deg
N•m/deg
The software uses a default value of 1.0E+12 in•lb/deg or 0.112980E+12 N•m/deg.
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified translational restraint stiffnesses.
lb/in
N/mm
N/m
N/cm
The software uses a default value of 1.0E+12 lb/in or 0.175120E+12 N/mm.
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for computing the hanger restrained weight loads.
lb/in
N/mm
N/m
N/cm
Where hangers are adjacent to other supports or are themselves very close, such as where
there are two hangers on either side of a trunnion support, the hanger design algorithm may
generate poorly distributed hot hanger loads in the vicinity of the close hangers. Using a more
flexible support for computing the hanger restrained weight loads often allows the design
algorithm to more effectively distribute the system’s weight. A typical entry is 50,000 lbs/in.
The default value is 1.0E+12 lb/in or 0.175120E+12 N/mm.
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%)

Specifies the default percentage of wall thickness allowed for mill and other mechanical
tolerances.
For most piping codes, this value is only used during the minimum wall thickness
computation. Mill tolerance is usually not considered in the flexibility analysis.
The default value is 12.5, corresponding to a 12.5% tolerance. To eliminate mill tolerance
consideration, set Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) to 0.0.
New Job Ambient Temperature

Represents the installed, or zero expansion, strain state.
ºF
ºC
The default ambient temperature for all elements in the system is 70ºF or 21ºC.
This value is only used to initialize the ambient temperature input field for new jobs.
Changing this configuration value will not affect existing jobs. To change the ambient
temperature for an existing job, use the Ambient Temperature field in the Piping Input Special
Execution Parameters dialog box.
New Job Bourdon Pressure

Specifies the type of Bourdon pressure effect used. The Bourdon effect causes straight pipe
to elongate and bends to open translationally along a line connecting the curvature end
points. If the Bourdon effect is disabled, there will be no global displacements due to
pressure.
None - Disables the Bourdon effect. There will be no global displacements due to
pressure.
Trans Only - Includes only translation effects (Bourdon Pressure Option #1).
Trans + Rot - Includes translational and rotational effects on bends. This option may
apply for bends that are formed or rolled from straight pipe, where the bend-cross
section will be slightly oval due to the bending process. (Bourdon Pressure Option #2)
For straight pipe, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 is the same as Bourdon Pressure Option
#2. For elbows, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 should apply for forged and welded fittings
where the bend cross-section can be considered essentially circular.
The Bourdon effect (Trans only) is always considered for FRP pipe, regardless of the
setting of New Job Bourdon Pressure.
Miscellaneous
Bend Axial Shape

Controls whether the displacement mode is ignored. For bends 45-degrees or smaller, a major
contributor to deformation can be the axial displacement of the short-arched pipe. With the
axial shape function disabled, this displacement mode is ignored, and the bend will be stiffer.
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness

Indicates whether the software uses the stiffness of spring hangers in the analysis. The
default setting is False, meaning that the software does not ignore the stiffness of spring
hangers. Setting this option to True is consistent with hand computation methods of spring
hanger design, which ignores the effects of the springs.
You should not change this value.
Include Insulation in Hydrotest

Controls whether the weight of any insulation and cladding will be considered in the hydrotest
case. To ignore the insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select False (the default
setting). To include the weight of insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select True.
For WW and WNC loads, the software includes insulation weight except when you set
the load case Stress Type to HYD in the Load Case Editor and you set Include Insulation in
Hydrotest to False.
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases

Controls how the software handles spring hangers. If you select True, the software places the
designed spring stiffness into the Hanger Operating Travel Case and iterates until the system
balances. This iteration scheme therefore considers the effect of the spring hanger stiffness
on the thermal growth of the system (vertical travel of the spring). If this option is used, it is
very important that the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) be adjusted to
match the reported hanger cold load.
If you select False, spring hangers are designed the traditional way.
Incore Numerical Check

Enables the incore solution module to test the solution stability for the current model and
loadings. This option, if selected, adds the solution of an extra load case to the analysis.
Missing Mass ZPA

Indicates which spectrum value CAESAR II uses. If you select Extracted (the default setting),
the software will use the spectrum value at the last "extracted" mode. Changing this value to
Spectrum instructs CAESAR II to use the last spectrum value as the ZPA for the missing mass
computations.
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends

Controls whether CAESAR II includes pressure stiffening effects in those codes that do not
explicitly require its use. In these cases, pressure stiffening effects will apply to all bends,
elbows, and both miter types. In all cases, the pressure used is the maximum of all pressures
defined for the element.
Pressure stiffening effects are defined in Appendix D of B31.1 and B31.3.
When set to Default, the software considers the pressure stiffening of bends according to the
active piping code.
WRC-107 Interpolation Method

Specifies the interpolation method used by the software. The curves in WRC Bulletin 107
cover typical applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any of the
interpolation parameters, such as U, Beta, and so forth, fall outside the limits of the available
curves, then CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
WRC-107(537) Version
Sets the version of the WRC-107(537) bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:
Aug'65 - August 1965

Mar'79 - March 1979
March '79 1B1/2B1 - March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves. This is the
default setting.
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clearer format. It is not
an update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537
simply provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
Database Definitions
The Database Definitions category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Databases
ODBC Settings
Databases
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path

Specifies which system folder CAESAR II users to run the software. Select a folder in the list.
Because the software writes the configuration file (CAESAR.cfg) to the local data folder, you
can configure different data folders to reference different system folders. All system folders
contain formatting files, units files, text files, and other user-configurable data files. Some of
these formatting files are language or code-specific. Therefore, you may want to switch
between system folders depending on the current job.
Use Multiple System Folders in the Same Location
You can create multiple system folders in the same location to provide different options for
different projects. System folder names must use the following naming convention:
SYSTEM.xxx, where .xxx, is a three-character suffix identifying the folder. When you follow the
required naming convention, you can create as many system folders as needed within the
CAESAR II installation program folder.. CAESAR II uses the system folder you indicate in the
configuration settings.
For example, you could set up system folders specified for each of the piping codes
configurations you need, such as:
System.STM (Stoomwezen code system configuration)
System.ANC (ASME NC code system configuration)
System.313 (ASME B31.3 code system configuration)
You could also set up system folders that are customized specific projects.
Browse and locate any system folders named using the SYSTEM.xxx format from the
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path configuration setting. Then, you can select one
and save the configuration.
Use System Folders in Varying Locations
You can create system folders that reside in other locations, such as somewhere on your
network. This allows you to share the settings from the System folder with others. However,
you must copy the System folder and other necessary program folders to the secondary
location.
You must also copy the LIB_I, LIB_M, and Spec folders (found in the Program folder
along with the System folder) to each new system folder location. You can leave the Backup,
Examples, and Temp folders in the original program folder location, as shown in the example
below.
The file name requirements mentioned in the previous section apply for system folders on a
network or in a secondary location as well. In addition, you can set up network system files
that apply at a project level.
There must be a primary system folder, named System, in which the software can place
accounting, version, and diagnostic files that it creates during execution. The location of the
primary system folder is dependent on the specific edition of the Windows operating system,
as follows:
Windows 7 and later
"C:\ProgramData\INTERGRAPH CAS\CAESAR II\<version number>\System"

Default Spring Hanger Table
Defines the value of the default spring hanger table, which is referenced during the spring
hanger design stage of the solution.
The software provides the following hanger tables:
1. Anvil 14. BHEL 27. NHK
2. Bergen Pipe Supports Inc 15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly

28. PSSI GmbH
(formerly Bergen Power) Flexider)
3. Power Piping 16. Carpenter & Paterson 29. Seonghwa
17. Bergen Pipe Priv Ltd

4. NPS Industries (India) (formerly Pipe 30. Mitsubishi
Supports Ltd)
5. Lisega 18. Witzenmann 31. Yamashita
6. Fronek 19. Sarathi 32. Sanwa Tekki
7. Piping Technology 20. Myricks 33. Techno Industry
8. Capitol 21. China Power 34. Hesterberg
9. Piping Services 22. Pipe Supports USA 35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co.
10. Basic Engineers 23. Quality Pipe Supports 36. Senior
11. Inoflex 24. PiHASA 37. Unison (Korea)

12. E. Myatt & Co. 25. Binder 38. Wookwang
13. Sinopec 26. Gradior
Expansion Joints
Specifies which expansion joint database the software should reference during subsequent
input sessions. Available databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics, IWK, Piping
Technology, and China.
Load Case Template

Specifies which load case template is active. The software uses the active template file to
recommend load cases.
Because the software writes the CAESAR.cfg file to the local data folder, you can
configure different data directories to reference different template files.
Different piping codes have different requirements for load cases. If you use multiple
piping codes in your job, CAESAR II refers to the piping code defined on the last element
in the model to determine which load cases to recommend as per the code standards.
The load case template file name is limited to 15 characters (including the extension).
LOAD.TPL (default)
Select this option, applicable only to B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX, to include alternate
Sustained (SUS) load cases to consider all support configurations for each corresponding
Operating (OPE) condition as required by the codes. This option also includes the additional
Expansion (EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple operating conditions.
LOAD_BASIC.TPL
Select this option if you do not need additional EXP stress range load cases and do not use
the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX.
LOAD_EXP.TPL
Select this option to include additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions and do not use the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3 and
B31.3 Chapter IX.
LOAD_ALT.TPL
Select this option to include alternate SUS load cases to consider all support configurations
for each corresponding OPE condition as required by B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX. This option
is applicable to all piping codes (except for IGE/TD/12), and not limited to B31.3 piping code.
This option also includes the additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions.
Piping Size Specification

Specifies the piping specification standard. Select one of the following standards: ANSI
(American National Standard), JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard), or DIN (German Standard).
By default, the software uses the ANSI pipe size and schedule tables in the input processor.
Structural Database
Specifies which database file is used to acquire the structuraI steel shape labels and cross-
section properties. Select a database, such as ANSI, AISC77, AISC2017, GERM91, KOREAN,
UK, or China.
See Structural Databases for more information on the delivered databases.
Units File Name

Specifies which of the available units files is active. The active units file is used for new job
creation and all output generation.
Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data directory, you can configure
different data directories to reference different units files.
The software first searches for units files in the local data directory, followed by the
active System directory.
User Material Database Filename

Specifies which user material database (UMD) file the software will access. By default, when
you add to or modify the supplied material database (cmat.bin), the changes are saved to a
file named umat1.umd in the System Folder.
Versions of CAESAR II prior to 5.30 used the name umat1.bin. This file can be copied,
then renamed, if necessary, to umat1.umd.
In some cases, it may be necessary to manipulate several UMD files. This can occur if UMD
files are acquired from different sources. Because a specific file name can only be used once,
it will be necessary to rename any additional UMD files. When the file suffix is UMD, and the
file resides in the System Folder, CAESAR II modules can access the files.
Material database files are accessed as described below:
Piping Input and Analysis
The software reads the software-supplied material database (cmat.bin).
The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses the updated
materials in the UMD file instead of those in the supplied database.
The Material Database Editor
The software reads the software-supplied material database (cmat.bin).
The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses updated
materials in the UMD file instead of those in the supplied database.
CAESAR II saves any changes or additions to the specified user material database
(UMD).
Create a New UMD File
1. Open the Configuration Editor and click Database Definitions.
2. In User Material Database Filename, type in a new name.

The UMD suffix should not be changed.
The file name plus the period plus the UMD suffix should not exceed 15
characters.
Do not use spaces (blanks) in the file name.
3. Before exiting the Configuration Editor, click Save and Exit to save the modified
configuration.
4. When you open Piping Input or the Material Database Editor, the software creates the
new UMD file.
Valve/Flange Files Location

Defines where CAESAR II looks for the valve/flange data file. The possible settings for this
configuration setting include:
CAESARII Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%.
Specs in CII, Data in CW
Directs the software to look for the specification files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%, but to look for the actual data files in the CADWorx folders.
CADWorx Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CADWorx folders.
Valves and Flanges

Specifies which valve/flange database CAESAR II references during subsequent input
sessions. The available databases include:
CADWORX.VHD
Reference the CADWorx Plant database.

CRANE.VHD
Reference the Crane database.
GENERIC.VHD
Reference a generic database.
NOFLANGE.VHD
Reference a database (generic) without attached flanges.
ODBC Settings
Append Reruns to Existing Data

Controls how the software handles data from multiple runs.
False
Overwrite data from previous runs in the ODBC database. This is the default setting.
True
Add new data to the database, thus storing multiple runs of the same job in the database.
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases

Turns on or off the capability to create ODBC-compliant databases for static output.
ODBC Compliant Database Name

Type the name of the ODBC project database. All jobs run in this data folder will write their
output to the database specified here.
FRP Pipe Properties

The FRP Properties category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Material Properties
Settings
Material Properties
Axial Modulus of Elasticity

Displays the axial elastic modulus of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. This is the default
value used to set the data in the input processor. When necessary, you may override this
value.
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a)

Displays the product of the ratio of the axial to the hoop elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio,
which relates the strain in the axial direction to a stress in the hoop direction.
Ea
Elastic modulus in the axial direction.
Eh
Elastic modulus in the hoop direction.
Vh/a
Poisson's ratio, nh/a, relating the strain in the axial direction due to a stress in the hoop
direction.
FRP Alpha (xE-06)

Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient for the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used
(multiplied by 1,000,000). For example, if the value is 8.5E-6 in/in/deg, then type 8.5. The
exponent (E-6) is implied.
in/in/ºF x 1.0E6
mm/mm/ºC x 1.0E6
cm/cm/ºC x 1.0E6
If a single expansion coefficient is too limiting for your application, the actual thermal
strain may always be calculated at temperature in inches per inch (or mm per mm) and
entered directly into the Temperature field on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
FRP Density
Displays the weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set
the default weight density of FRP materials in the piping input module.
lb/in3
kg/cm3
kg/dm3
kg/m3
FRP Laminate Type

Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass
reinforced plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.
FRP Property Data File
Select the file from which the software will read the standard FRP material properties. After
the file is selected, the software will give you the option of reading in from that file.
You may create FRP material files as ASCII text files with the .frp extension; these files should
be stored in the CAESAR\System sub-folder. The format of the files must adhere to the format
shown in the following sample file:
The data lines must exactly follow the order shown. The four data lines defining the
UKOOA envelope are intended for future use and may be omitted.
For information on editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules.
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus

Type the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity (in the axial direction) of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used. For example, if the material modulus of elasticity
(axial) is 3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, the ratio of these two, 0.25, should be
entered.
Settings
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening
Displays the method used to calculate the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs. The
BS 7159 code explicitly requires that the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs be
calculated using the design strain (this is based upon the assumption that the FRP piping is
fully pressurized to its design limit). This is the default method for CAESAR II.
When the piping is pressurized to a value much lower than its design pressure, it may be more
accurate to calculate pressure stiffening based on the actual pressure stress, rather than its
design strain.
This alternative method is a deviation from the explicit instructions of the BS 7159
code.
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress

Modifies the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress. Some sources, such as Shell's
DEP 31.40.10.19-Gen. (December 1998) and ISO/DIS 14692 suggest that, when using the
UKOOA code, the axial bending stress should not be multiplied by the Part Factor f2 (the
System Factor of Safety) prior to combination with the longitudinal pressure stress.
True
Modify the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress.
False
Use the UKOOA exactly as written.
Use FRP Flexibilities

Controls the fitting flexibility factor used by the software.
True
Set the fitting flexibility factor to 1.0 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the
default setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" flexibility factor equations to all FRP fittings.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software uses code flexibility
factors, regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.
Use FRP SIF

Controls the SIF used by the software.
True
Set the fitting SIF to 2.3 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the default setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" SIF equations to all FRP fittings. Optionally, you can manually type
an alternative value.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software always uses code SIFs,
regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.
Geometry Directives
The Geometry Directives category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Bends
Input Items
Bends
Bend Length Attachment Percent

Controls the amount of accuracy included in the system dimensions around bends. The
default attachment is 1.0 percent.
When the element leaving the tangent intersection of a bend is within (n)% of the bend radius
on either side of the weld line, CAESAR II inserts an element from the bend weld line to the To
node of the element leaving the bend. The inserted element has a length equal to exactly (n)%
of the bend radius. You can use Bend Length Attachment Percent to adjust this percentage to
reduce the error due to the inserted element; however, the length tolerance for elements
leaving the bend will also be reduced.
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the maximum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend. The default value is 95-
degrees.
Very large angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When
you have a reasonable radius and a large angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the large
angle bend plots well when compared to the surrounding elements, then the bend can
probably be used without difficulty. Well-proportioned bends up to 135-degrees have been
tested without a problem.
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the minimum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend angle. The default value is 5.0
degrees.
Very small angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When
you have a reasonable radius and a small angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the small
angle bend is grossly small compared to the surrounding elements, then a different modeling
approach is recommended so that the bend is not used.
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend

Controls the CAESAR II error checking tolerance for the "closeness" of points on the bend
curvature. The default value is 5.0-degrees.
Nodes on a bend curvature that are too close together can cause numerical problems during
solution. Where the radius of the bend is large, such as in a cross-country pipeline, it is not
uncommon to find nodes on a bend curvature closer than 5-degrees.
Input Items
Connect Geometry Through CNodes

Controls whether each restraint, nozzle, or hanger exists at the same point in space as its
connecting node.
Restraints, flexible nozzles, and spring hangers may be defined with connecting nodes. By
default, CAESAR II ignores the position of the restraint node and the connecting node. They
may be at the same point, or they may be hundreds of feet apart. In many cases, enabling this
option will cause "plot-wise" disconnected parts of the system to be re-connected and to
appear as-expected in both input and output plots.
Auto Node Number Increment

Sets the increment value for automatic node numbering. The software uses any non-zero,
positive value that you type to automatically increment the To node value in Classic Piping
Input. Node numbers must be numeric, ranging from 1 to 8,000,000.
The new To node number is determined as:
To Node = From Node + Auto Node Number Increment
If this value is set to 0.0, automatic node numbering is disabled.
The maximum number of nodes allowed in a piping model is a function of the memory
allocation configuration for the model. For the number of nodes allowed for your
memory allocation, see Total Elements on the Model Status tab of the auxiliary data
panel.
The maximum number of nodes allowed in a piping model is also a function of the node
number increment. For example, if your model numbers nodes by an increment of
10,000, the model can only have 800 nodes.
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance

Specifies the maximum slope of a straight pipe element for which thermal bowing effects will
be considered.
Thermal bowing is usually associated with fluid carrying horizontal pipes in which the fluid
does not fill the cross section. In these cases, there is a temperature differential across the
cross section. You can use Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance to define the interpretation
of "horizontal." By default, the software uses a value of 0.0001 as the horizontal threshold
value. If a pipe element’s pitch is less than this tolerance, the element is considered to be
horizontal, and thermal bowing loads can be applied to it. An element’s pitch is computed
using the following formula:
PITCH = | DY | / ( DX2 + DY2 + DZ2 )1/2
Loop Closure Tolerance

Sets the loop closure tolerance that CAESAR II uses for error checking. You can set this value
interactively for each job analyzed, or you can type the loop closure tolerance using this option
and override the software default value of 1.0 in without distraction.
New Job Z-Axis Vertical

Controls in which plane the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane.
False
Place the Z-axis in the horizontal plane. This is the default setting.
True
Make the Z-axis vertical. The X- and Y-axes will be in the horizontal plane.
This setting applies only to jobs created after this setting is changed.
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings category provides access to configuration settings that used to set the
different plot option colors, font characteristics, and the view options.
Advanced Options
Contains options that should only be used by graphics experts. For more information, see
Advanced Options.
Background Colors
Contains options that define the color of the plot window. For more information, see
Background Colors.
CADWorx Options
Contains options that define the color and behavior for CADWorx drawings imported into
CAESAR II models. For more information, see CADWorx Options.
Component Colors
Contains options that define the color for various components in the plot. For more
information, see Component Colors.
Marker Options
Contains options that set the node marker color and size. For more information, see Marker
Options.
Miscellaneous Options
Contains options that determine how graphics are displayed either by default or when using
the Reset Plot option. For more information, see Miscellaneous Options.
Output Colors
Contains options that set the colors used when plotting code stress in output. For more
information, see Output Colors.
Text Options
Contains options for defining font, font style, font size, and color. Scripts are supported. For
more information, see Text Options.
Visual Options
Contains options that control general plotting visibility. For more information, see Visual
Options.
To change a color, click it once and then click the ellipses button that appears to the
right. Select a color in the dialog box that appears, and then click OK. To save the color
settings, click Save and Exit before closing the Configuration Editor.
Advanced Options
Backplane Culling
This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Hexagon CAS Support for assistance.
Culling Maximum Extent

Use Culling Frustrum

Background Colors
Bottom
Sets the color for the bottom of the plot window.
Top
Sets the color for the top of the plot window.
Use Uniform Background Color

Controls the background color. Set this option to True if you want the plot background to be
one uniform color instead of blending between the top and bottom colors.
CADWorx Options
Color - Ambient
Sets the color of the ambient properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Color - Face
Sets the color of the face of the CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Color - Line
Sets the color of the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Color - Specular
Sets the color of the specular properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Color - Transmission
Sets the color of the transmission lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Gloss Value
Sets the level of the gloss value on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Show Lines
Indicates to show or hide the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Show Model
Indicates to show or hide the CADWorx drawing (model) that was imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Use AutoCAD Colors

Indicates to use the color settings from AutoCAD on a CADWorx drawing imported into a
CAESAR II model.
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough
Indicates to use the keyboard, not the mouse, to perform a walkthrough on a CADWorx
drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Component Colors
You can also change component colors on the Plot Settings dialog box. For more
information, see Display Options Toolbar .
Anchor CNode
Sets the color of Cnode anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Anchors
Sets the color of anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Displacements
Sets the color of all displacement arrows displayed in the graphics.
For more information about displacement arrows, see Displacements.
Expansion Joints
Sets the color of expansion joints when displayed in the graphics.
Flange
Sets the color of all flanges when displayed in the graphics.
Forces/Moments 1
Sets the first color of the stripe pattern of force and moment vector arrows displayed in the
graphics. The arrows show the force and moment direction.
Set the second color of the force and moment arrows in the Forces/Moments 2 configuration
setting.
For more information about force and moment arrows, see Forces.
Forces/Moments 2
Sets the second color of the stripe pattern of force and moment vector arrows displayed in
the graphics. The arrows show the force and moment direction.
Set the first color of the force and moment arrows in the Forces/Moments 1 (Component
Color) configuration setting.
For more information about force and moment arrows, see Forces.
Hanger CNode
Sets the color of Cnode hangers when displayed in the graphics.
Hangers
Sets the color of the spring hangers (and spring cans) when displayed in the graphics.
Nozzles
Sets the color of all nozzles when displayed in the graphics.
Nozzle Limit Color 1

Sets the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics.
This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an
equipment check. Set the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle
Limit Color 2 configuration setting.
Nozzle Limit Color 2

Sets the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the
graphics. This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate
system for an equipment check. Set the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in
the Nozzle Limit Color 1 configuration setting.
Pipes
Sets the color of all pipe elements when displayed in the graphics.
Restraint CNode
Sets the color of the restraint Cnode when displayed in the graphics.
Restraints
Sets the color of all restraints (except for anchors and hangers) when displayed in the
graphics.
Rigids
Sets the color of all rigid elements when displayed in the graphics.
Selection
Sets the color of the selected element when displayed in the graphics.
SIFs/Tees
Sets the color of all tees when displayed in the graphics.
Steel
Sets the color of all structural steel elements in both the structural steel plot and the piping
plot when structural steel is included.
Marker Options
Marker Color
Sets the color of the node markers shown in the graphics.
Marker Size
Sets the size of the node markers shown in the graphics.
These options determine how graphics display by default or how they display when you use
the Reset Plot option while in the graphics.
Default Operator
Controls the initial display of graphics. Available options are Zoom to Window, Annotate,
Orbit, Pan, Restore Previous, Select, and Zoom with Mouse. The default setting is Zoom to
Window.
Default Projection Mode

Specifies the projection of graphics in the software. You can select Orthographic, Perspective,
or Stretched. The default projection setting is Orthographic.
Default Render Mode

Specifies the render mode. Available options are Phong Shading, Centerline, Flat, Gouraud
Shading, Silhouette, Triangulated, and Wireframe, either with or without hidden lines. The
default render mode setting is Phong Shading.
Centerline and Silhouette are the fastest render modes and less memory intensive
for your computer graphics card.
Default View
Specifies the graphical view. Available options are SE Isometric, SW Isometric, NW Isometric,
NE Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and Restore Previous. The default view
setting is SE Isometric.
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble

Enables or disables the tooltip bubble that displays information about the element that you
mouse over in the graphics view.
True
Tooltip bubble does not display.
False
Tooltip bubble displays.
Force Black and White Printing

Controls printing output of graphics. If set to True, graphics are printed using only black and
white.
Idle Processing Count

Controls the number of objects the software can draw during a single idle cycle. CAESAR II
draws the model whenever your machine becomes idle, that is, whenever any interaction
between you and the computer ceases. For example, there may three or four idle messages
between keystrokes. On slower machines, it may increase performance to lower this value,
and vice versa.
Optimal Frame Rate

Determines how many times per second the software will re-draw the piping display when it is
being manipulated, such as when you are zooming, panning, or rotating the display. If you
experience graphics problems such as sluggishness during operations or large boxes being
drawn instead of the piping system display, lower this number.
Restore Previous Anchor Size
Returns the anchor size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the anchor size to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.
Restore Previous Hanger Size

Returns the hanger size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the hanger size to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Operator

Returns the operator to its previous setting.
True
Restore the operator to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Projection Mode

Returns the projection mode to its previous state. Projection mode is either isometric or
orthographic.
True
Restore the projection mode to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Render Mode

Returns the render mode to its previous state.
Four render modes are available in CAESAR II: solids, wireframes, silhouette, and
centerline.
True
Restore the render mode to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Restraint Size

Returns the restraint size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the restraint size to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous View

Returns the standard view to its previous setting.
The standard views are Front, Back, Top, Bottom, Left, Right, SW Isometric, SE
Isometric, NW Isometric and NE Isometric.
True
Restore the standard view to its previous setting.
False
Video Driver
Determines the video driver the software uses for graphics display. Select a specific video
driver or leave the default option, CAESAR II Determines, which means the software
intelligently selects the optimal 3D driver supported by your operating environment.
In Windows operating systems, the software gives preference to DirectX options,

followed by OpenGL options.
Output Colors
Actual Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software
will color the elements in terms of actual stress. The levels are currently set as follows:
Level Actual Stress
Level 1 <10,000 psi
Level 2 10,000 to 15,000 psi
Level 3 15,000 to 20,000 psi
Level 4 20,000 to 25,000 psi
Level 5 25,000 to 30,000 psi

Level 6 > 30,000 psi
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
percent of code allowable. For more information, see Percent Stress Settings.
Displaced Shape
Sets the color of the Displaced Shape option when displayed in output graphics.
Percent Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software
will color the elements in terms of the percent of code allowable. The levels are currently set
as follows:
Level Percent (of Code Allowable) Stress
Level 1 < 20%
Level 2 20 to 40%
Level 3 40 to 60%
Level 4 60 to 80%
Level 5 80 to 100%
Level 6 >100%
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
actual stress. For more information, see Actual Stress Settings.
Text Options
You can use these options to select font, font style, and font size and color. Scripts
are supported. The different plot texts are node numbers and names, annotation, and legends.
Annotation Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of annotation text.
Legend Text
Sets the text color and font style settings of all legends, such as displacements, temperatures,
and so forth, when displayed in the graphics.
Node Text
Determines the color and font style settings of node numbers and node names when
displayed in the graphics.
Output Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of output text.
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of rendered text. By default, the software will not draw text that is
occluded by anything else, including other text. For example, if a pipe is in front of text, the
text will not be drawn. If some text overlaps other text, the text that is further back will be
hidden. To override this behavior so that all text is shown, set
RenderedModeTextAlwaysVisible to True.
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of silhouette text.
Visual Options
These options control general plotting visibility.
Always Use System Colors
Stores the colors the software uses to display the model in the registry.
Always Use System Fonts

Stores the fonts that the software uses to display the model in the registry.
Axis Mode
Specifies display of the axes in the plot. By default, the axes display in the lower left corner of
the plot. Select one of the following:
On
Displays planes with the coordinate system axes. This option specifies Options > Axis >
Axis Planes as the default in the software.
Simple
Displays the coordinate system axes. This option specifies Options > Axis > Axis as the
default in the software.
Off
Turns off axis display. This option specifies Options > Axis > Off as the default in the
software.
For more information, see Axis.

Fixed Size Restraint Size
Controls the restraint size. By default, the software draws restraints relative to the size of the
pipe to which they are attached. For example, the symbol is larger on a 12-inch pipe than on a
2-inch pipe. You can override this behavior so that the software uses the same size restraint
everywhere by setting Use Fixed Size Restraints to True and defining a Fixed Size Restraint
Size value.
Hide Overlapping Text

Hides node text that is overwritten by other text. This makes reading the plot easier but
eliminates some node text.
North Direction
Specifies display of a north arrow with the axes. Select True or False. The North arrow
indicates the North orientation of the plant.
The north arrow does not display when you set Axis Mode to Off.
Restraint Helix is a Line

Controls how the software draws a restraint helix.
By default, a restraint with a variable retention is drawn with a small spring to indicate that it is
not fixed. If this property is set to True (the default setting), the software draws the spring as a
line; otherwise, the software draws the spring as a coiled cylinder.
If drawing the restraint helix as a line degrades plot performance, set Restraint Helix
is a Line to False.
Shadow Mode
Defines the shadow mode. Select Hard, Soft, or None. The default setting is None.
Show Bounding Box

Controls whether a bounding box appears around the model when it is being manipulated--for
example, rotated or panned-- with the mouse.
True
Display a bounding box.
False
Suppress the display of a bounding box.
Smooth Transitions
Specifies whether graphics have a smooth transition when the view is changed.
True
Enable smooth transition.
False
Change the view instantly. This option reduces the video card memory requirements.
Use Fixed Size Restraints

Controls the size of the restraint. When it is set to True, this property draws restraints based
on the value defined by the property Fixed Size Restraint Size.
Visibility %
Determines the percentage of incident light that passes through an element volume when
using the Translucent Objects or Hidden Lines option in the graphics. Setting this to zero
makes all elements completely opaque while a setting of 100% renders all elements
transparent. The default setting is 50%.
The Miscellaneous Options category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Input Items
Output Items
System Level Items
Input Items
Autosave Time Interval

Sets the time interval used to perform the auto-save function. Type a value in minutes.
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail

Controls whether the graphic thumbnail plot in the Open dialog box (accessed by clicking File
> Open in the software) is displayed. The graphics thumbnail plots a small image of the model
as a single line drawing. On some slower, memory limited processors, or when scanning very
large models, this thumbnail graphic may take a few seconds to plot the model.
True
Turn on the display of thumbnail graphics.
False
Turn off the display of thumbnail graphics.
Disable Undo/Redo Ability

Controls the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. On some installations, it may be useful
to disable the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. With Undo/Redo enabled, CAESAR II
can process a job approximately one-half the size of that which can be processed when
Undo/Redo is disabled (for similar memory settings). Likewise, with Undo/Redo enabled, the
input module speed may be reduced.
Dynamic Example Input Text

Controls how much example text is placed in new dynamic input files. By default, the software
places example text and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input files.
After you are familiar with the input, this example text may be unnecessary.
Max
Places all examples and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input files.
None
Eliminates all example text and all built-in spectrum definitions. This setting is intended for
experienced users.
Spec
Eliminates all example text but leaves the predefined spectrum definition. This means that the
built-in spectrum definitions (such as El Centro) are still defined and available for use.
Enable Autosave
Controls whether CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
True
Turn on Autosave.
False
Turn off Autosave.
Prompted Autosave
Controls whether the software prompts you at the specified time interval to save the input.
You must also set Enable Autosave to True.
True
Prompt before performing the autosave
False
Perform the autosave without prompting.
Output Items
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes

Turns on and off nodal sort. By default, the software sorts the nodes in ascending order
during the force/stress computations. This produces a displacement output report in which
the nodes are ordered in increasing magnitude. Select False to turn off this nodal sort. The
resulting displacement reports will be produced in the order the nodes were entered during
model building.
Output Reports by Load Case

Controls how output reports are sorted. By default, the software generates output reports
sorted by load case. Select False to turn off this option, which causes output reports to be
sorted by type. For reports by type, all displacement reports will be generated, then all
restraint reports, then all force reports, and so on.
Output Table of Contents

Controls the generation of a table of contents, which is normally produced after a static or a
dynamic output session.
True
Generate a table of contents upon exit. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of a table of contents.
Time History Animation

Controls the creation of the file used to animate the time history displacement of the piping
system. By default, this setting is turned on, which instructs CAESAR II to generate a file of
displacements, <jobname>.XYT, for every time step. This file is used in subsequent interactive
animation sessions by the user. The size of this file is dependent on the size of the model and
the number of time steps analyzed. Consequently, it may be advantageous from a disk usage
point of view not to create this file.
True
Generate the displacement file. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of the displacement file.

System Level Items
Compress CAESAR II Files

Controls the compression of CAESAR II files.
True
Compresses all CAESAR II job files into an archive named <jobname>.c2 when the job is not
active. After the software creates the archive, it deletes the component files (such as, _a, _j,
_p, _7, _s).
False
Leaves the component files in the data directory and does not create the c2 archive.
Advantages of using the compressed archive
Only one job file exists in the data directory.
The job and all related data are easily archived.
The job and all related data can be transmitted in its entirety.
Disadvantages of using the compressed archive
The archive makes it difficult to get to the component files.
The archive is big, because it contains all component files. Therefore, saving or
transmitting takes more resources than manipulating a single component file.
For larger jobs, the compression/decompression activity slows down file access.
Memory Allocated (Mb)

Modifies the Windows registry to increase the amount of RAM available to CAESAR II. Setting
this option to a number greater than the available RAM will cause Windows to use Virtual
Memory (hard disk space to be used as RAM). Because doing this may slow the software, it is
usually recommended only for very large piping models.
User ID
Creates a control file for a specific computer. Type a three-character user ID for each user, or
more exactly, each workstation.
When multiple workstations attempt to access CAESAR II data in the same directory
simultaneously, the control file in the data directory becomes corrupted, which may cause
abnormal software execution. In situations where there may be more than one concurrent
user running CAESAR II in a given data directory, you can use this option to create a separate
control file for each computer, thus allowing simultaneous access of the CAESAR II data
within the same folder.
This user ID is not a password and is specific to the computer requiring access and
not to the user.
SIFs and Stresses

The SIFs and Stresses category of the Configuration Editor provides access to the following
groups of configuration settings:
Advanced Settings
Code-Specific Settings
General Settings
Legacy Settings
Advanced Settings
Class 1 Branch Flexibility

Activates the Class 1 flexibility calculations. By default, this setting is False.
The appearance of this parameter in the configuration file will completely change the
modeling of intersections in the analysis. For intersections not satisfying the reduced branch
rules that d/D £ 0.5 and that D/T £100, the branch will start at the surface of the header pipe.
A perfectly rigid junction between the center\-line of the header and surface will be formed
automatically by CAESAR II using the element offset calculations. SIFs act at the surface
point for the branch. When the reduced branch rules are satisfied, the local flexibility of the
header is also inserted at this surface point. Intersections not satisfying the reduced
intersection rules will be stiffer and carry more loads, while intersections satisfying the
reduced intersection rules will be more flexible and will carry less load. All changes to the
model are completely transparent to the user. In systems where the intersection flexibility is a
major component of the overall system stiffness, you are urged to run the analysis both with
and without the Class 1 Branch Flexibility active to determine the effect of this modeling on
the analysis.
Use Schneider
Activates the Schneider reduced intersection assumptions. By default, this setting is False.
It was because of observations by Schneider that much of the work on WRC 329 was started.
Schneider pointed out that the code SIFs could be in error when the d/D ratio at the
intersection was less than 1.0 and greater than 0.5. In this d/D range, the SIFs could be in
error by a factor as high as 2.0. Using the Schneider option in CAESAR II results in a
multiplication of the out of plane branch stress intensification by a number between 1 and 2
when the d/D ratio for the inter\-section is between 0.5 and 1.0. For B31.1 and other codes
that do not differentiate between in and out-of-plane SIFs, the multiplication will be used for
the single stress intensification given.
Use WRC 329

Activates the WRC329 guidelines for all intersections, not just for reduced intersections. By
default, this setting is False.
The recommendations made by Rodabaugh in section 5.0 of WRC329 will be followed exactly
in making the stress calculations for intersections. Every attempt has been made to improve
the stress calculations for all codes, not just the four discussed in Rodabaugh’s paper.
Throughout this document, WRC330 and WRC329 are used synonymously (330 was the draft
version of 329). When finally published, the official WRC designation was 329.
Code-Specific Settings
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix

Makes the correction to the reduced branch stress calculation that existed in the 1980
through 1989 versions of B31.1. This error was corrected in the 1989 version of B31.1.
True
Turn on the correction. This is the default setting.
False
Turn off the correction.
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees

Controls the assumption that the geometry of B31.3 welding and contour insert tees
(sweepolets) meets the dimensional requirements of the code and can be classified as B16.9
tees.
True
Assume that the fitting geometry meets the requirements of Note 11, introduced in the A01
addendum, and a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r will be used.
False
Use a flexibility characteristic of 3.1*T/r, as per the A01 addendum. This is the default setting.
In order to match runs made with CAESAR II prior to Version 4.40, set this option to
True. Prior to Version 4.40, CAESAR II always used a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r.
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF

Controls the use of in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs. The EN-13480 piping code (and other
European piping codes) defaults to the use of a single SIF, applied to the SRSS of all three
bending moments. Optionally, you can utilize distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIF values for
in-plane and out-of-plane moments.
To use distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs, select True.
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor

Controls the application of the circumferential weld strength reduction factor, which is an
option in B31.1 and B31.3.
True
Suppress the application of a weld strength reduction factor.
False
Apply the weld strength reduction factor at all bends, tees, and reducers for temperatures
greater than the starting creep temperature, as defined in the code.
No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs

Controls whether welding tees and reinforced tees are included in the SIFs for reduced
fittings. Part of the discussion centers around just what should be considered a reduced
fitting. The CAESAR II default (False) is to assume that welding tees and reinforced fabricated
tees are covered by the reduced fitting expressions, even though the reduced fitting
expressions do not explicitly cover these intersection types. If you want to leave welding tees
and rein\-forced tees out of this definition, set this option to True.
Occasional Load Factor

Specifies the occasional load factor. The default value of 0.0 tells CAESAR II to use the value
that the active piping code recommends. B31.1 states that the calculated stress may exceed
the maximum allowable stress from Appendix A, (Sh), by 15% if the event duration occurs less
than 10% of any 24-hour operating period, and by 20% if the event duration occurs less than
1% of any 24-hour operating period. The default for B31.1 applications is 15%. If 20% is more
suitable for the system being analyzed, then this option can be used to enter the 20%.
B31.3 states, "The sum of the longitudinal stresses due to pressure, weight, and other
sustained loadings (S1) and of the stresses produced by occasional loads such as wind or
earthquake may be as much as 1.33 times the allowable stress given in Appendix A. Where
the allowable stress value exceeds 2/3 of yield strength at temperature, the allowable stress
value must be reduced as specified in Note 3 in 302.3.2." The default for B31.3 applications is
33%. If this is too high for the material and temperature specified, then a smaller occasional
load factor could be input.
This configuration option is used to send new job files. After the static load cases
have been defined, changing this directive will have no effect for static analysis. For existing
static load case definitions, change the occasional load multiplier on the Load Cases tab in
the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Dynamic analyses will always reference this
configuration option.
Pressure Variation in EXP Case
Controls whether any pressure variation between the referenced load cases will be considered
in the resulting expansion case. When set to Default, the software considers the pressure
variation according to the active piping code.
If you select Default or Yes, then pressure variation is considered for B31.1 and CAN Z662
codes.
If you select Yes, then pressure variation is considered for B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, B31.4,
B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.5, B31.9, ASME NC & ND, B31.1 (1967), Stoomwezen, RCC MC & MD,
CODETI, Norwegian TBK-6, EN 13480, GPTC, HPGSL, and JPI codes.
This option only affects stresses. It does not affect forces and moments.
Reduced Intersection
Defines the code rules for reduced intersection. Select one of the following options:
B31.1 (Pre 1980)
Use the pre-1980 B31.1 code rules used for reduced intersection. These rules did not define a
separate branch SIF for the reduced branch end. The branch stress intensification factor will
be the same as the header stress intensification factor regardless of the branch-to-header
diameter ratio.
B31.1 (Post 1980)
Use the post-1980 B31.1 code rules for reduced intersections. The reduced intersection SIF
equations in B31.1 from 1980 through 1989 generated unnecessarily high SIFs because of a
mistake made in the implementation. (This is according to WRC329.) For this reason, many
analysts opted for the pre-1980 B31.1 SIF calculation. CAESAR II corrects this mistake by
automatically setting B31.1 Reduced Z Fix to True (the default setting). You can vary the
status of this flag in the CAESAR II configuration file to generate any interpretation of B31.1
that you want. The default for a new job is for B31.1(Post 1980) and for B31.1 Reduced Z Fix
to be set to True.
The No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs option also affects the SIF calculations at
reduced intersections.
WRC 329
Use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced intersection is
any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329 recommendations result
in more conservative stress calculations in some instances and less conservative stress
calculations in others. In all cases, the WRC329 values should be more accurate and more in-
line with the respective codes intent.
ASME Sect. III
Use the 1985 ASME Section III NC and ND rules for reduced intersections.
Schneider
Activate the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor multiplication. Has
the same effect as Use Schneider.
General Settings
Add F/A in Stresses

Specifies whether the axial stress term is included in the code stress computation.
If you select Default in this configuration setting, the software uses whatever the currently
active piping code recommends. Only the process piping codes (except for B31.3), or codes
where the sustained stress equation is not explicitly given, have the F/A stresses included in
the sustained and occasional stress equations. The power piping codes (such as B31.1) do
not include the F/A stresses because the equations given explicitly in the code do not include
them. To force CAESAR II to include the axial stress term in those codes that do not include it
already by default, select Yes.
The F/A stresses discussed here are not due to longitudinal pressure. These are the F/A
stresses due to structural loads in the piping system itself.
Add Torsion in SL Stress

Controls how the software handles the torsion term in those codes that do not include it
already by default.
If you select Default in this configuration setting, the software uses whatever the currently
active piping code recommends. The power piping codes (such as B31.1) include torsion in
the sustained and occasional stresses by explicitly including it in the stress equation (B31.1).
The process piping codes (except for B31.3) do not include torsion in the sustained and
occasional stresses by implicitly calling for longitudinal stresses only. To force CAESAR II to
include the torsion term in those codes that do not include it already by default, select Yes.
In a sustained stress analysis of a very hot piping system subject to creep, it is

recommended that you include torsion in the sustained stress calculation using this
parameter in the setup file.
For more information, see Code Compliance Considerations.
All Cases Corroded

Controls whether CAESAR II uses corroded section modulus in stress calculations.
The B31.3 piping code reduces the section modulus for sustained or occasional stress
calculations by the reduction in wall thickness due to corrosion. Using All Cases Corroded
causes the software to use the corroded section modulus for the calculation of all stress
types. This method is conservative, and probably more realistic because corrosion can
significantly affect fatigue life or expansion.
When you clear All Cases Corroded, the software follows the piping code recommendations.
That is, depending on the active piping code, some load cases consider corrosion, and some
do not.
For more information, see Code Compliance Considerations.
Allow User's SIF at Bend

Controls the stress intensification factor for bends. Previously this was not permitted, and the
code-defined SIF was always used. To override the code’s calculated SIF for bends, select
True. The user-defined SIF acts over the entire bend curvature and must be specified at the To
end of the bend element. The default setting is False.
Base Hoop Stress On

Indicates how the value of hoop stress should be calculated. The default is to use the ID of
the pipe. Most piping codes consider the effects of pressure in the longitudinal component of
the CODE stress. Usually, the value of the hoop stress has no bearing on the CODE stress, so
changing this directive does not affect the acceptability of the piping system.
If necessary, you may change the way CAESAR II computes the hoop stress value. Available
options are:
ID
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the internal diameter of the pipe.
OD
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Mean
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the average or mean diameter of the
pipe.
Lamé
Compute maximum hoop stress according to Lamé's solution: s = P(Ro2+Ri2)/(Ro2-Ri2).
When the piping code specifies hoop stress evaluation, the software uses the code's
hoop stress calculation and ignores Base Hoop Stress On. For example, offshore or
transportation piping codes, such as B31.4, B31.8, and DNV, specify hoop stress evaluation.
Default Piping Code

Specifies the piping code that you design to most often. This code will be used as the default
if no code is specified in the problem input. The default piping code is B31.3, the chemical
plant and petroleum refinery code. Valid entries are:
B31.1 ASME-NC Stoomwezen DNV

(Class 2)
B31.3 ASME-ND RCC-M C EN 13480

(Class 3)
B31.3 Chapter IX Navy 505 RCC-M D GPTC/Z380

B31.4 CAN Z662 CODETI PD 8010-1
B31.4 Chapter IX CAN Z662 Norwegian TBK- PD 8010-2

Chapter 11 6
B31.4 Chapter XI BS 806 FDBR ISO 14692
B31.5 Swedish 1 BS 7159 HPGSL
B31.8 Swedish 2 UKOOA JPI
B31.8 Chapter B31.1-1967 IGE/TD/12

VIII
B31.9
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable

Instructs the software to default new jobs to use the liberal expansion stress allowable. This
allowable adds the difference between the hot allowable stress and the sustained stress to
the allowable expansion stress range if permitted by the code. To prevent the software from
using the allowable for new models, select False.
Use PD/4t
Instructs the software to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when
computing sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form with thin-walled pipe
thicknesses.
This option is used most often when you are comparing CAESAR II results to older pipe stress
software results. In most cases, you should use the more comprehensive default calculation.
The software ignores Use PD/4t for the offshore codes B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8
Chapter VIII, Canadian Z662 Chapter 11, and Det Norske Veritas (DNV).
Yield Stress Criterion

Specifies the method the software uses to calculate maximum stress. Select VonMises or
Max3DShear.
CAESAR II calculates the maximum stress (which is not a code stress) according to either the
von Mises Theory or the Maximum Shear Theory.
Code stress refers to a stress calculated by an equation provided by the code. For
more information on code-defined stresses, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
The Stresses Extended output report produced by CAESAR II contains a value representative
of the maximum stress state through the cross section, calculated according to the indicated
yield criteria theory.
Configuration Setting Failure Theory Calculated Stress
Max3D Shear Maximum Shear Stress Maximum Stress Intensity
Maximum Energy of
von Mises Octahedral Shearing Stress
Distortion
The software computes the selected stress at four points along the axis normal to the plane
of bending (outside top, inside top, inside bottom, outside bottom), and includes the
maximum value in the stresses report. The equations used for each of these yield criteria are
listed below. If von Mises Theory is used, the software computes the octahedral shearing
stress, which differs from the von Mises stress by a constant factor.
For codes B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and
DNV, this setting controls which equation the software uses to compute the equivalent stress.
For these codes, the software uses the equations shown in the piping code to determine the
yield stress criterion in the Stresses Extended output report.
Stress Formulation
CAESAR II reports the largest stress using four calculation points through the pipe cross
section, as show in the following figure.
The four points are established by a line perpendicular to the bending moment acting on the
pipe (shown in red). Points 1 and 4 are on the outside surface of the pipe, where radial stress
is zero. Point 1 is in bending tension and Point 4 is in bending compression. Points 2 and 3
are on the inside surface of the pipe where radial stress is compressive (negative) pressure.
Longitudinal stress (Sl), hoop stress (Sh), radial stress (Sr) and shear stress (St) are
calculated at each position using the appropriate formulas.
Shear Radial
Position Longitudinal Stress (Sl) Hoop Stress (Sh) Stress (St) Stress (Sr)
3
4
The table formulas assume that this is a B31.3-style stress equation with Lamé hoop
stress.
These stresses are translated into the principal stresses S1, S2, and S3. The following shows
a graphical representation of a typical calculation of the four position points.
Determine the principal stress using the longitudinal stress (Sl), the hoop stress (Sh), and the
shear stress (St)—which sets the red line. The principal stress refers to the points where the
red circle crosses the normal stress axis (shear stress equals zero). Place the radial stress
(Sr) (which has a shear stress of zero) on the same axis. The largest intersection point is S1
and the smallest is S3.
Equivalent Stress, Octahedral Shearing Stress, von Mises Stress:
Use the S1, S2, and S3 values in the equation above to determine the octahedral shearing
stress at each position. CAESAR II reports the largest of these four values.
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (S.I.):
S.I. = S1-S3
When you configure the software to report 3D maximum shear stress intensity, it reports the
largest intensity (S1-S3).
Legacy Settings
B31.3 Implement Appendix P

Controls the implementation of the alternate rules in B31.3 Appendix P. This option produces
a code compliance operating load case, with allowable stress values.
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010)

Controls the formula CAESAR II uses for computing the longitudinal stress for sustained
loads (SUS) for the B31.3 code. The 2010 Edition of B31.3 code introduced a specific formula
for computing SL. This code formula was previously optional and referred to as B31.3 Code
Case 178.
The software defaults to automatically computing sustained loads using this formula. You
can change the B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) configuration setting in the
Configuration Editor > SIFs and Stresses to False if you do not want the software to use this
formula, for example in the case of pre-2010 Edition jobs.
CAESAR II sets this configuration setting to True by default, which means the software
overrides the directives for F/A and torsion and uses this formula to calculate sustained case
stresses.
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress
Enables the software to include calculated axial force in the expansion stress (SE). Choose
one of the following settings:
No
Exclude axial forces from the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range value. (This is Se in Eq.
(17) of B31.3.)
|Sa| + Se
Include the absolute value of the axial force to the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range,
and report the sum as the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range, Se. This selection is more
conservative than (|Sa| + Sb)2.
(|Sa| + Sb)2
Include the absolute value for the axial force to the bending term in the (Expansion)
Displacement Stress Range equation (Se, Eq (17) in B31.3). This selection is less conservative
than |Sa| + Se. This option more closely follows theory.
Default
Follow the recommended setting for the axial force in expansion stress based on the piping
code you specified for the job. (For example, the B31.3 piping code recommends using the
(|Sa| + Sb)2 equation for axial force. So, when you set this configuration setting to Default, if
the job uses the B31.3 piping code, the software uses the (|Sa| + Sb)2 option for calculating
axial force in the expansion stress.)
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index

Modifies the stress index for sustained loads and occasional loads. The default setting is
0.0000, which indicates that the software uses whatever the currently active piping code
recommends for the SIF/Index multiplier. For example, if this configuration setting is set to
0.000 and you select B31.3 or B31.3 Chapter IX, the code defines the SIF multiplier as 0.7500.
With the release of CAESAR II 2014 and the implementation of B31.3 2012, the internal
interpretation of this existing configuration setting was changed. B31.3 2012 defines the SIF
multiplier value as 0.75. Other codes similar to B31.3 do not address this value. The default
value of this configuration setting was changed to 0.0000. This change enables CAESAR II to
internally set the multiplier to 0.7500 for B31.3 and to 1.0000 for other similar codes. The
following table summarizes these settings.
Option Configuration Sustained Moment Multiplier (I)

SIF Multiplier Setting
B31.3, B31.3 Ch IX, B31.4, Codes similar to B31.3

& B31.4 Ch XI Codes (such as: JPI, B31.5)
Option 0.0000 I = 0.75i I = i (similar to Option 4)

1
(default
)
Option 0.0001 I = 1.0 I = 1.0

2
Option 0.7500 I = 0.75i I = 0.75i

3
Option 1.0000 I=i I=i

4
This change does not affect all piping codes.
The following interpretations apply to B31.3 code prior to the 2010 Edition, so they are only
applicable if you need to analyze older jobs to the older code addenda:
B31.3 Interpretation 1-34 (February 23, 1981) File: 1470-1 states that for sustained and
occasional loads, you can use a SIF of 0.75i, but not less than 1.0. To comply with this
interpretation (1-34), type 0.7500.
B31.3 Interpretation 6-03 (December 14, 1987) File B31-87-022 permits you to ignore the
stress intensification for sustained and occasional loads. To comply with this
interpretation (6-03), type 0.0001.
Set/Change Password
You can set password protection for the configuration file using the Security command. By
setting a password on the primary configuration file, a corporate standard can be enforced
throughout the network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data folders will
allow only modification of display or other environment directives that do not affect
calculated results.
To set security on your configuration file:
1. Set up your configuration file and click Save and Exit in the top-left corner of the
Configuration Editor window to save the configuration settings.
2. From the Home tab, select File > Set Default Data Directory.
3. Browse and select the CAESAR II System subfolder in the Default Data Directory
Specification dialog box
Locate the System subfolder in the root folder based on your platform.
Windows 7/8/8.1: \Program Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\Version Number\System
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR

II\Version Number\System
Click Configure or Tools > Configure/Setup to open the Configuration Editor dialog box, and
then click on the Security drop-down arrow.
1. Select one of the following options, depending upon your current configuration:
New Password
Access Protected Data
Change Password
Remove Password
New Password
Specifies a new password. After typing a password, you can change configuration settings
from the program folder, or alter or remove the password.
Initially, New Password is the only option available.
When typing a new password, you are prompted for the new password a second time to
ensure the password was typed as expected the first time.
Access Protected Data

Allows you to modify protected options. This option is accessible only after a password
exists.
The use of this option is not necessary if there is no previously specified password. If
no password has been set, you can modify all configuration settings.
Change Password
Allows you to change your current password. You must first type the correct existing
password. The current password may be changed at any time by anyone who has
authorization to do so.
After a password has been set, the software disables all computation controls, stress options,
and any other configuration options, which could affect the CAESAR II computations.
Remove Password
Deletes the current password. Anyone with authorization can remove the current password by
entering the correct existing password for this option. After a password is removed, all
options that appear in the Configuration Editor can be modified from any folder where you
have read/write access rights.
Piping Input
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Piping Input
Shortcut key:
ALT+2 - Opens Auxiliary Data as a separate dialog box
Specifies piping parameters in the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input Dialog.
This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of command
menus and toolbars and data fields containing information about each piping element. A
graphic representation of the model displays automatically. The model updates as you add
new elements.
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box

Groups piping data into blocks of related data on the left side of Classic Piping Input. Double
click >> in the upper right corner of any group to display additional input dialog boxes.
The right side of the piping input includes the Auxiliary Data panel with tabs which relate to
items selected by double-clicking check boxes on the left side. You can also access these
tabs by selecting a command in the Aux Tools Toolbar.
Using Function Keys to Navigate Classic Piping Input
Function keys help you to quickly type data without using the mouse to move to various
property fields. By default, when you place the cursor inside a field, pressing a function key on
the keyboard moves the cursor to the beginning of a group of properties according to the list
below.
Function Key Destination Property Group
F2 From Node Numbers

F3 DX Deltas
F4 Diameter Pipe Sizes
F5 Temp 1 Operating Conditions
F6 Material Materials
F7 Elastic Modulus (c) Elastic Properties
F8 Refractory Thickness Densities
F9 Line Number -
For additional shortcut keys used throughout the software, see Shortcut Keys.
Model Status
Model Status, the first tab of the Auxiliary Data panel, displays statistics about the model.
Current Element
Displays the current piping element number.
Total Elements
Displays the total number of piping elements in the model and the maximum possible number
of elements. The maximum number of elements is determined by the memory allocation for
the model.
# of <data type>
Displays the total quantity of a data type in the model, such as bends, restraints, allowable
stresses, or flanges, and the maximum possible number of the data type.
Help Screens and Units
Press the question mark key ? or the F1 function key while the cursor is in any of the input
data cells to display interactive help text for that item. Hover the cursor over a box to display a
tool tip indicating the current units.
Node Numbers
Shortcut keys:
F2 - Jumps to Node Numbers
ALT+1 - Opens Edit Node Numbers dialog box
Indicates the node numbers for the selected element on Classic Piping Input.
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a
piping element, you must specify the element end points, called the From node and the To
node. The software uses these points as locations at which you can type or extract
information. You must specify a From and To node for all elements.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
You can set the Auto Node Number Increment configuration setting in Home > Setup >
Configure on the main window ribbon and the software generates the From and To node
values automatically (to a value other than zero) based on the increment you specify.
For information on controlling the display of node numbers, see Node Numbers.
From
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be
numeric, ranging from 1 to 8,000,000. Typically, the From node number is automatically
generated by CAESAR II from the preceding element.
A node represents a distinct point in space. The same node can be used on multiple elements
to represent connectivity, such as at a branch connection. You can change a node number but
must not use the same node number in more than one location in a model.
panel.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 8,000,000.
A node represents a distinct point in space. The same node can be used on multiple elements
to represent connectivity, such as at a branch connection. You can change a node number but
must not use the same node number in more than one location in a model
panel.
Name
Assigns non-numeric names to the node points of an element.
Double-click the Name check box to display the Node Names tab in the Auxiliary Data panel.
You can assign names of up to 25 characters for the From and To nodes.
The software maintains consistency of node names between elements which share a node.
For example, if you provide a name for a To node, the same name displays for the same node
when it is the From node for another element.
Node Numbers controls how node number and node names display in the graphic
view. For more information, see Node Numbers.
Deltas
Shortcut keys:
F3 - Jumps to Deltas
ALT+2 - Opens Edit Deltas dialog box
Indicates the length of the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length.
The vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes
between the From node and the To node. In most cases you only need to use one of the three
options, because the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is
skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must define at least one option for all
elements except zero-length expansion joints.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and
the orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid
entries include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
DX
Specifies the X-axis component of the element length.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction

or meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms
of addition, multiplication, and division, as well as the exponential format.
The table below shows example formats and results for compound lengths using English
units (ft. and in.) and metric units (m. and mm.). The software defines units for your model
through the defined units file. For more information, see Database Definitions and Units File
Name.
Example Dimension Format Example Results
6 6 in.
6 mm.
6-0 6 ft. 0 in.

or
6'0 6 m. 0 mm.
6- 6 ft. 0 in.
or
6' 6 m. 0 mm.
6.3- 6.3 ft.

or
6.3 m.
6.3'
6-10 6 ft. 10 in.

or
6'10 6 m. 10 mm.
6-10-1/4 6 ft. 10-1/4 in.

or
6'10-1/4 6 m. 10-1/4 mm.
Addition: 10 ft. 5-1/4 in.
6-10-1/4+3-7 9 m. 17-1/4 mm.
Subtraction: 3 ft. 1 in.
-12-3+15-4 3 m. 1 mm.
Multiplication: 5 ft. 3 in.
6.3*10 63 mm.
Division: 9 ft. 4.53 in.
337.6/3 112.53 mm.

For addition, you can add two or more positive operands.
The software does not directly support subtraction because a dash (-) after a number
indicates a unit for a compound length. As a result, you cannot subtract a positive
amount, such as 15-4-12-3. You must add a negative amount (such as -12-3+15-4), and
you can use only two operands.
When units for length and compound length are the same, using the dash (-) is not
recommended. For example, if both units are mm, then 6-10 results in 6 mm 10 mm. The
software displays the values as the sum of 16 mm.
To see the global coordinates of all nodes in the model, open the Coordinates list. For
more information, see List and X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, Z Coordinate.
For more information on element length, see Deltas.
DY
Specifies the Y-axis component of the element length.

Name.
6 6 in.
6 mm.
6-0 6 ft. 0 in.
or
6 m. 0 mm.
6'0
6- 6 ft. 0 in.
or
6' 6 m. 0 mm.
6.3- 6.3 ft.

or
6.3' 6.3 m.
6-10 6 ft. 10 in.

or
6 m. 10 mm.
6'10
6-10-1/4 6 ft. 10-1/4 in.

or
6'10-1/4 6 m. 10-1/4 mm.
6-10-1/4+3-7 9 m. 17-1/4 mm.
-12-3+15-4 3 m. 1 mm.
6.3*10 63 mm.
337.6/3 112.53 mm.
DZ
Specifies the Z-axis component of the element length.

Name.
6 6 in.
6 mm.
6-0 6 ft. 0 in.

or
6 m. 0 mm.
6'0
6- 6 ft. 0 in.
or
6 m. 0 mm.
6'
6.3- 6.3 ft.

or
6.3' 6.3 m.
6-10 6 ft. 10 in.

or
6 m. 10 mm.
6'10
6-10-1/4 6 ft. 10-1/4 in.

or
6 m. 10-1/4 mm.
6'10-1/4
6-10-1/4+3-7 9 m. 17-1/4 mm.

-12-3+15-4 3 m. 1 mm.
6.3*10 63 mm.
337.6/3 112.53 mm.
Offsets
Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its actual
dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box to
select or clear this option.
in
mm
cm
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From end
of the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of the
element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to zero.
Thermal expansion is “0” for the offset portion of an offset element. No element flexibility is
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage
for the offset element.
Length
Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.

Name.
6 6 in.
6 mm.
6-0 6 ft. 0 in.

or
6'0 6 m. 0 mm.
6- 6 ft. 0 in.
or
6 m. 0 mm.
6'
6.3- 6.3 ft.

or
6.3 m.
6.3'
6-10 6 ft. 10 in.

or
6'10 6 m. 10 mm.
6-10-1/4 6 ft. 10-1/4 in.
or
6 m. 10-1/4 mm.
6'10-1/4
6-10-1/4+3-7 9 m. 17-1/4 mm.
-12-3+15-4 3 m. 1 mm.
6.3*10 63 mm.
337.6/3 112.53 mm.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.
For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Y-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Z-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... 1.0
Pipe Sizes
Shortcut keys:
F4- Jumps to Pipe Sizes
ALT+3 - Opens Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box

Indicates the pipe dimensions for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. Type the dimensions for the element.
Mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. Seam weld is used only for the
IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from one element to the next during the
design session; you only need to type values for those elements at which a change occurs.
You can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules. CAESAR II converts these values to actual
outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside diameter and wall thickness are required data
inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe
size specification. Click Home > Setup > Configure on the main window ribbon to select ANSI,
JIS, or DIN as the piping size specification.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Diameter
Specifies the pipe diameter.
in
mm
cm
For ISO 14692 2017: For all other pipe codes:

1 - Diameter 1 - Diameter
2 - Wt/Sch 2 - Wt/Sch
3 - Sheath Thk 3 - Insul Thk
4 - Liner Thk 4 - Refract Thk
5 - Total wall thickness
Type the nominal diameter and the software converts it to the actual outer diameter
necessary for the analysis. If you do not want the conversion:
Use a modified UNITS file with the nominal pipe schedules turned off
Specify diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units the
tolerance on diameter is 0.063 in.)
Available nominal diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set by the
configuration software. The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
½ ¾ 1 1 ½ 2 2 ½ 3 3 ½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 42
JIS Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file jp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
ISO 14692 2017
Diameter is the outer diameter minus two times Sheath Thk.
ISO-14692 2017 distinguishes between the reinforced wall thickness and the total
wall thickness. The reinforced wall thickness does not include the liner (inside) and sheath
(outside) the reinforced wall. In CAESAR II, define the reinforced dimension (not including the
liner and sheath) for Diameter and Wt/Sch, and separately define Refract Thk, Refract
Density, Liner Thk, and Liner Density.
Seam Welded
Indicates whether the piping element is seam welded
B31.1 / B31.3
If the B31.1 or B31.3 piping codes are active, select the Seam-welded check box to activate
the Wl box. Wl (the weld strength reduction factor) is used by the software to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the element.
IGE/TD/12
If the IGE/TD/12 piping code is active, select the Seam welded check box when straight pipes
are seam welded. This option affects the stress intensification factor calculations for that
pipe section due to seam welded fabrication.
WI Factor
Specifies the WI factor.
+Mill Tol % / Wl / Ovality %
+Mill Tol %
Specifies the positive mill tolerance. This option is only enabled when IGE/TD/12 is active. It is
used when the Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to
Plus Mill Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the
nominal wall thickness increased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis. The software defaults to a value of 12.5.
Wl
For the B31.1 and B31.3 piping codes, specifies the weld strength reduction factor (Wl), to be
used in the minimum wall calculation for straight pipe.
Ovality %
For the DNV 2017 piping code, specifies the percentage of pipe ovalization. DNVGL-ST-F101
addresses the minimum and maximum allowable percentages of ovalization of piping to
prevent collapse. The software defaults to a value of 0.5.
Wt/Sch
Specifies the thickness of the pipe as the wall thickness, wt, or as a pipe schedule.
in
mm
cm
You can type a schedule indicator (such as S, XS, or 40), which the software converts to the
proper wall thickness. Available schedule indicators are determined by the active piping
specification, set by the configuration software. If you type the thickness, the software uses
your value.
For ISO 14692 2017: For all other pipe codes:

1 - Diameter 1 - Diameter
2 - Wt/Sch 2 - Wt/Sch
3 - Sheath Thk 3 - Insul Thk
4 - Liner Thk 4 - Refract Thk
ANSI B36.10 Steel Nominal Wall Thickness Designation
S - Standard
XS - Extra Strong
XXS - Double Extra Strong
ANSI B36.10 Steel Pipe Numbers
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ANSI B36.19 Stainless Steel Schedules
5S 10S 40S 80S

JIS Pipe Schedules
1990 Steel Schedules: 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1990 Stainless Steel Schedules: 5S 10S 40S
DIN Pipe Schedules
None
Only the S (standard) schedule applies to wall thickness calculations for DIN.
ISO 14692 2017
The pipe thickness, not including the sheath thickness and the liner thickness:
Total wall thickness - (Sheath Thk + Liner Thk)
ISO-14692 2017 distinguishes between the reinforced wall thickness and the total
wall thickness. The reinforced wall thickness does not include the liner (inside) and sheath
(outside) the reinforced wall. In CAESAR II, define the reinforced dimension (not including the
liner and sheath) for Diameter and Wt/Sch, and separately define Refract Thk, Refract
Density, Liner Thk, and Liner Density.
-Mill Tol % / Tvar %

-Mill Tol %
Displays the negative mill tolerance. This value is read from the configuration file and used in
minimum wall thickness calculations. Also, for IGE/TD/12, this value is used when the Base
Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to Plus Mill Tolerance. In
that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal wall thickness,
decreased by this percentage. You can change this value on an element-by-element basis.
Tvar %
Specifies the percentage variation of the reinforced pipe wall thickness.
The minimum reinforced pipe wall thickness (t) = Wt(1 - Tvar%). For more information
on Wt, see Wt/Sch.
Corrosion
Specifies the corrosion allowance used to calculate a reduced section modulus. There is a
configuration option available to consider all stress cases as corroded. For more information,
see All Cases Corroded.
in
mm
cm
Pipe Density
Displays the pipe density value. The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when
you provide a proper material number. You can override this value at any time. The software
then duplicates the value through the rest of the input.
lb/in3
kg/cm3
kg/dm3
kg/m3
Fluid Density
Defines the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads.
lb/in3
kg/cm3
kg/dm3
kg/m3
When the specific gravity of the fluid is known, you can type that instead of the density. For
example, you could type 0.85SG. Specific gravities are converted to the appropriate densities
immediately on input. To type specific gravity, follow the numeric value with the letters SG (no
spaces). The software automatically converts this value to density.
Propagate Parameters
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Operating Conditions
Shortcut keys:
F5 - Jumps to Operating Conditions
ALT+4 - Opens Edit Operating Conditions dialog
Double-click >> - Opens Edit Operating Conditions dialog
Specifies the temperatures and pressures for the selected element on the Classic Piping
Input dialog. Each temperature group ( such as T1) and pressure group (such as P1) creates a
load for use in building static analysis load cases. The software uses the loads to build
recommended load cases (such as W+T1+P1)
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (nine operating cases plus the
hydrostatic test pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures,
not changes from the ambient temperature. The software uses the temperatures to obtain the
thermal strain and allowable stresses for the element from the material database. Pressures
are gauge values and cannot be negative. Both thermal and pressure data carries forward
from one element to the next until changed.
As an alternative, you can directly specify the Thermal Expansion coefficients if the absolute
values are less than the Alpha Tolerance. Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of
0.002 and are unitless.
Typing a value in the Hydro Press field causes the software to build a hydro case in the set of
recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70°F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see Ambient Temperature.
Temperature
Specifies a temperature for each operating condition. The temperature fields allow up to nine
different operating cases. The error checker validates temperature values to ensure that they
are within the code allowed ranges.
ºF
ºC
You can exceed the ranges by typing the expansion coefficient in the temperature field in units
of length/length. When you are using material 21 (user-defined material), type a thermal
expansion coefficient instead of a temperature.
Temperature values, whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance, are taken to be
thermal expansion coefficients. Alpha Tolerance is a configuration parameter of 0.05 by
default. For example, if you wanted to type the thermal expansion coefficient equivalent to
11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 1 ft./ 12in. = .009475 in./in.
A cut short does no more than reduce the length of a pipe element to zero. For
example; if you wanted 8.5 cm of cold spring you could put in an 8.5 cm long element and
then thermally shrink its length to zero. This allows the cold spring to be manipulated as an
individual thermal case rather than as a concentrated force.
To edit operating conditions 4 through 9, double-click >> to display the Edit Operating
Conditions dialog.
The software automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. Use the
following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 – Maximum Temperature
T2 – Minimum Temperature
T3 – Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 – Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 – Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 – Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 – Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 – Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 – Compressor Operation
P4 – Demand Pressure
HP – Hydrotest Pressure
Thermal Expansion
Displays the corresponding thermal strain values when you type operating temperatures in the
temperature fields. This is a read-only property.
in/in
mm/mm
cm/cm
When the thermal expansion coefficients are not available in the material database, you can
type thermal strain in the Temperature field if the absolute values are less than the Alpha
Tolerance in the configuration. You can type up to nine thermal strain values in units of
length/length in the temperature field on the Edit Operating Conditions dialog. The software
displays these values in the Thermal Expansion fields.
Pressures
Specifies operating pressures. There are 10 pressure fields, which allow up to nine operating
and one hydrotest pressure cases. When you type multiple pressures, be careful with the
setup of the analysis load cases. Review the recommended load cases provided by the
software carefully before proceeding.
lb/in²
Bar
KPa
MPa
Specify operating pressures 4 through 9 through the Edit Operating Conditions dialog,
accessed by clicking the >>..
Type a value in the Hydro Press field to signal CAESAR II to recommend a hydrotest load
case.
Type the design gage pressure (that is, the difference between the internal and external
pressures).
The software disables the Bourdon effect (pressure elongation) by default because it
assumes the job to be non-conservative. If you want to enable the Bourdon effect, you
can do so by using the Special Execution options. See Activate Bourdon Effects.
The Bourdon effect is always considered in the analysis of fiberglass reinforced plastic
pipe (Material ID=20).
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. You must
use the following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 – Maximum Temperature
T2 – Minimum Temperature
T3 – Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 – Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 – Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 – Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 – Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 – Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 – Compressor Operation
P4 – Demand Pressure
HP – Hydrotest Pressure
Component Information
Specifies details for special components (such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints, and
tees), which require additional information. Select or clear these options by double-clicking
the applicable component check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Bend
Double-click Bend if the active element ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint. This displays
the auxiliary panel on the right side of the screen. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to a
bend to define the near, mid, and far nodes on the bend. For more information, see Bend.
Rigid
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays the auxiliary panel to collect the component weight. For more
information, see Rigid.
For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II
computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then
adds that value to the defined weight value.
The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same weight
that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of insulation added
is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe
multiplied by 1.75.
If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the element is
an artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In this case, the
software does not calculate an insulation or fluid weight for that element.
The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make sure
that the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.
Expansion Joint
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays the
auxiliary panel used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints.
Expansion joints can be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point)
or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the single-point
case, you must type all stiffness. In the continuous element case, you must omit either the
lateral or angular stiffness.
SIF & Tees
Double-click SIF & Tees if the active element has special stress intensification factors (SIFs).
CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component. For more information,
see SIFs & Tees.
Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. For more information, see
Rigid and Expansion Joints.
Bend
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend
mid-point (M).
Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override this
value or select a value from the list.
in
mm
cm
Long
Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal diameter.
Short
Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe diameter.
3D
Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.

5D
Type
Specifies the bend type.
For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges: 1 - Single Flange and 2 -
Double Flange. A bend should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within
two diameters of the bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize. If there are
no flanges on the bend, then do not specify a value for Type.
For BS 7159 or UKOOA codes with fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe, this entry refers to
the material laminate type. The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and
stress intensification factors.
1 - CSM (Chopped Strand Mat)
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
2 - VM & Woven Roving
3 - CSM & Multi-Filament
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
For ISO 14692 2005, only 3 - CSM & Multi-Filament displays.
For ISO 14692 2017, only 1 - Hand Lay displays. For more information, see Hand Lay.
Angle 1, 2, 3
Displays the angle, a, in degrees, to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional
nodes at any point on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five
degrees of each other. You can change the 5º node-spacing limit by using the configuration.
For more information, see Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend.
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By
default, CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in
this box) as well as at the zero-degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.
Node 1, 2, 3
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node
numbers must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If
numbering by fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for
the node number for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat the
added nodes on the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend
curvature may be restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes.
Nodes on a bend curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or
for the location of a restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent
intersection point for the bend.
Miter Points
Specifies the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. The software checks if the value
creates cuts that are closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be widely spaced,
and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be broken down into “n”
single cut widely spaced miters, where “n” is the total number of cuts in the bend. The number
of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and flexibilities
for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter spacing are
related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan θ )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0

r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
θ = Bend Angle / 2.0
Fitting Thk
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the
inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
in
mm
cm
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the
matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code For Tn For Mean Radius Calculation
B31.1 Fitting Fitting
B31.3 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.8 Ch Fitting Matching Pipe

VIII
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting

(1967)
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe

BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZ N/A N/A

EN
RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIA Fitting Fitting

N
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Tbend
For ISO 14692 2017, defines the wall thickness, tbend, of the bend.
in
mm
cm
The code uses Tbend to calculate the average wall thickness (tb) of the reference laminate:
tb = (2b/a)(tbend + toverlay) + [1-(2b/a)]tbend
where a is the bend angle. For more information, see Angle 1, 2, 3.
If you do not define Tbend, then the software uses the pipe wall thickness, Wt. For more
information, see Wt/Sch.
For information on bend parameters, see Figure B.1 and Figure B.2, section B.2.2, in ISO
14692-3:2017.
K-Factor
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. The software calculates the factor according to the
current piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.
The software uses Eh/Ea to calculate the K-Factor. You can also adjust K-Factor by
changing the value of Eh/Ea.
Specifies the angle, b, subtended by the overlap length of lamination (for a laminated joint) or
by the end thickness of the bell end (for an adhesive-bonded joint). If you do not define a
value, the software uses 0.
For information on bend parameters, see Figure B.1 and Figure B.2, section B.2.2, in
ISO 14692-3:2017.
Seam-Welded
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl box
for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the minimum
wall thickness of the bend element.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.
Overlay Thk
For a laminated joint, specifies the thickness of the lamination. If you do not define a value,
the software uses 0.
in
mm
cm
Wl for Bends
For B31.1 and B31.3, defines the weld strength reduction factor (Wl) for bend elements. This
value is used in the minimum wall thickness calculations.
EpTp/(EbTb)
Specifies the ratio EpTp/EbTb, where: Ep is the axial modulus of the attached pipe; Eb is the
axial modulus of the bend; Tp is the average wall thickness of the attached pipe; and Tb is the
average wall thickness of the bend.
If you do not define EpTp/(EbTb), the software uses a default value of 1.0. This value affects
the calculation of the flexibility factor for bends.
Rigid
Specifies rigid element data, usually for a valve or a flange. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Rigid check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The Rigids auxiliary panel tab defines options for the rigid element.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe and
1.75 times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe. For example, a 13 in. long 12
in. diameter rigid element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact
should be observed when modeling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel,
or small pipe/heavy equipment model. The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times
the thickness of the rigid element. For additional details, see Technical Discussions.
Type the rigid element length in the DX, DY, and DZ fields.
Rigid Weight
Defines the weight of the rigid element.
lb
N
The value should always be zero or positive and should not include the weight of any
insulation or fluid. If you type no weight, then the software models the element as a
weightless construction element. Rigid elements with zero weight are modeling constructs
and do not have fluid or insulation weight added.
If you use the valve and flange database, then the software sets the value for Rigid
Weight. For more information, see Valve Flange Database.
Rigid Type
Specifies a rigid type.
If you use Valve Flange Database , then the software sets the value for Rigid Type. For
more information, see Valve Flange Database.
The software graphically displays the rigid type in the model view.
Unspecified (0) Valve (1)
Flange (2) Flange Pair (3)
Flanged Valve (4)

When you select Flange-Valve-Flange in Valve Flange Database , the software creates a
valve and a pair of flanges. For more information, see Valve and Flange Database: <database
name> Dialog Box.
If you have not specified a value for Element Name, then the software defines
Element Name with the value for Rigid Type. No change is made to Element Name when
Rigid Type is Unspecified.
Expansion Joint
Indicates that you are supplying expansion joint data. Select or clear this option by double-
clicking Expansion Joint on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel tab controls options for expansion joint stiffness parameters and
effective diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, you must omit either the transverse
or the bending stiffness.
Setting the effective diameter to zero deactivates the pressure thrust load. Use this
method in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness to simulate the effect of axial tie-
rods.
Zero Length Expansion Joints
Specifies zeroes in the DX, DY, and DZ fields (or leave the fields blank) for hinged and gimbal
joints. Use 1.0 to define completely flexible stiffness and 1.0E12 to define completely rigid
stiffness. You must type all stiffnesses.
Finite Length Expansion Joints
Specifies the expansion joint vector in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes. Because the transverse
stiffness is directly related to the bending stiffness for finite length expansion joints, type only
one of these stiffnesses. CAESAR II calculates the other stiffness automatically based on
flexible length, effective ID, and the other stiffness. In general, type the transverse stiffness
and leave the bending stiffness blank.
Bellows Stiffness Properties
Specifies the expansion joint parameters.
Translation - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
lb/in
N/mm
N/m
N/cm
Rotation - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
in•lb/deg
N•m/deg
If the element length is zero, then you should define all stiffnesses. If the element length is not
zero, then you should leave blank either the Bending Stif or the Trans Stif box. CAESAR II
automatically calculates the stiffness that you did not type. You can type all stiffnesses for
rubber expansion joints
If the torsional stiffness value is not specified, CAESAR II uses a default value of 0.10000E+06
in•lb/deg or 0.11298E+05 N•m/deg.
Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint manufacturers) that are
used in a finite length expansion joint model should be multiplied by four before being used in
any piping software. Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint
manufacturers) that are used in a ZERO length expansion joint model should be used without
modification.
Use 1.0 for bellows stiffnesses that are completely flexible.
Use 1.0E12 for rigid bellows stiffnesses.
Zero length expansion joints can be used in many modeling applications, such as defining
struts or hinged ends. The orientation of zero length expansion joints is taken from the
element that precedes the expansion joint if the To node of the preceding element is equal to
the From node on the expansion joint element. If the preceding element does not go into the
expansion joint, then the orientation is taken from the element that follows the expansion joint
if it properly leaves the joint.
Effective ID
Specifies the effective inside diameter for pressure thrust from the manufacturer's catalog. If
left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to pressure is calculated.
in
mm
cm
For all load cases, including pressure, CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust force tending
to blow the bellows apart. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint:
Aeff. The Effective ID is calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / p)1/2

Reducer
Specifies reducer data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking Reducer on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box.
The Reducer auxiliary panel tab defines options for the reducer.
The software assigns the Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values to the To node of the
reducer. The diameter and wall thickness at the From node of the reducer element are taken
from the current piping element data.
CAESAR II constructs a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a
successively larger or smaller diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II
calculates SIFs according to the current piping code (for more information, see Code
Compliance Considerations) and applies these internally to the Code Stress Calculations.
These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other code-specific
considerations), Alpha. If Alpha is left blank, then the software calculates this value based on
the change in pipe diameter over 60% of the element length. If specified, Diameter 2 and
Thickness 2 are carried forward when the next pipe element is created as Diameter and
Wt/Sch. If not specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are assumed to be equal to Diameter
and Wt/Sch on the following element dialog box.
If there is no value for Alpha is specified on the dialog box, CAESAR II reports the alpha value
in the Errors and Warnings dialog box.
Diameter 2
Specifies D2, the diameter at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries forward as
the diameter of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that
feature is active.
If left blank, the software uses the diameter from the following element as Diameter 2.
Thickness 2
Specifies T2, the wall thickness at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries
forward as the wall thickness of the following element. Nominal values are converted to
actual values if that feature is active.
If this option is left blank, the software uses the thickness from the following element as
Thickness 2.
Alpha
Specifies a, the slope, in degrees, of the reducer transition. If left blank, CAESAR II assumes
the slope equal to the arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) / (length of sloped portion of
reducer).
TD/12. This entry is a required input for IGE/TD/12.

Because all reducers are different, the actual length of sloped portion of reducer is unknown
unless you define it. Because of this, if Alpha is not specified, CAESAR II assumes that the
length of sloped portion of reducer is equal to 60% of the total reducer length. If you leave the
Alpha value blank, then CAESAR II defaults to arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) /
(0.60 x element length).
R1
Specifies R1, the transition radius for the large end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4,
Table 8 of IGE/TD/12 Code. This option is available only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
R2
Specifies R2, the transition radius for the small end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4,
Table 8 of IGE/TD/12.
SIFs & Tees
Defines SIF and tee data. Select or clear by double-clicking the SIFs & Tees check box on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The SIFs/Tees auxiliary panel tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or
fitting types, for up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, the
software automatically calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you
override this behavior. Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display
as appropriate for the selected fitting.
There are two basic component types:
Three element intersection components
Two element joint components
A fully defined intersection model requires that three pipes frame into the intersection node
and that two of them are co-linear. Partial intersection assumptions are made for junctions
where you have coded one or two pipes into the intersection node, but these models are not
recommended. Two element joint components can be formed equally well with one or two
elements framing into the node.
You only need to type the intersection or joint type and properties on one of the elements
going to the junction. CAESAR II duplicates the intersection characteristics for all other pipes
framing into the intersection.
Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking. These
messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the
intersection SIFs.
To view and change the stress intensification factors calculated by the software, use the
Intersection SIF Scratchpad and the Bend SIF Scratchpad.
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that
follows.
Tees (see Intersection Types in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide)
1 Reinforced Pad Thk Ftg Ro Crotch

Fabricated
Tee
2 Unreinforced Ftg Ro Crotch

Fabricated
Tee
3 Welding Tee Ftg Ro Crotch
4 Sweepolet Crotch
5 Weldolet Crotch
6 Extruded Ftg Ro Crotch

Welding Tee
Joints
7 Girth Butt Weld D Or ID

Weld
8 Socket Weld Fillet

(No Undercut)
9 Socket Weld Fillet

(As Welded)
10 Tapered Weld D
Transition
11 Threaded
Joint
12 Double
Welded Slip-
On
13 Lap Joint
Flange
(B16.9)
Special Components
14 Bonney Forge
Sweepolet
15 Bonney Forge Weld ID

Latrolet
16 Bonney Forge
Insert
Weldolet
17 Full Ftg Ro Weld ID

Encirclement
Tee
This list does not include input items effecting SIF calculations for ISO 14692. For
more information on ISO 14692, see Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations for ISO
14692.
Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the To
node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is most
often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the
intersection if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type
once. CAESAR II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint
type once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only apply to
the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment >
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools
toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe the
effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad can
be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature, then the following applies:
You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration option
exists to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend. If you
set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can specify SIFs for bend To nodes. The
SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire bend curvature.
CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend curvature
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
Non-FRP piping codes
Select one of six types of tees and ten types of joints. These elements correspond to 1 to 6
and 7 to 16 in the table Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO
14692)*.
BS 7159 and UKOOA
Select Moulded or Fabricated. A moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or
Extruded (6) welding tee Type. A fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
IGE/TD/12
Select one of 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of tee type with this code,
see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
ISO 14692 2005
Select one of three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3), and Joint (2). Select 1 -
Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for non-qualified tees.
Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints and
fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for
qualified service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, mpst).
ISO 14692 2017
Select 1 - Tee for a SIF of 1.5 or 2 - Other for a SIF of 1.0.
ASME NC and ND piping codes
These codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5),
or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee types, CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
You must define a tee as the appropriate tee in Type for the proper application of in-
plane and out-of-plane SIFs along the tee's local axis. Otherwise, the software assumes the
tee is a pipe and apples SIFs along the pipe's local axis.
In-Plane SIF (ii) / Bending
Indicates the in-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or an intersection.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting SIFs & Tees on the Classic
Piping Input Dialog. Type the node number to which the stress applies. Then, specify the In-
Plane SIF (ii) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
Bending
Displays as Bending for single SIFs with the EN-13480 2017/A4 code when you select: EN-
13480 2017/A4:21 for Code on the Allowable Stresses auxiliary tab and False for EN-
13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF on the Configuration Editor.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs), see Stress Intensification
Factors and Stress Indices Details.
For more information on using local coordinate systems to define in-plane and out-
plane, see Tee Elements and Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II Local
Coordinate Definitions.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes, the
software performs code-related calculations.
In-Plane Index (Ii)
Indicates the in-plane sustained stress index (Ii) value.
Piping Input Dialog. Type the node number to which the stress index applies. Then, specify the
In-Plane (Ii) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
If you do not specify a value for In-Plane Index (Ii) box, CAESAR II sets the value to the
greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
Out-Plane SIF (io)
Indicates the out-of-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or intersection.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees on the
Classic Piping Input Dialog. Type the node number to which the stress applies. Then, specify
the Out-Plane SIF (io) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes, the
software performs code-related calculations.
Out-Plane Index (Io)
Indicates the out-of-plane sustained stress index (Io) value.
Classic Piping Input Dialog. Type the node number to which the stress index applies. Then,
specify the Out-Plane Index (io) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
If you do not specify a value for In-Plane Index (Ii) box, CAESAR II sets the value to the
greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
Torsion SIF (it)
Indicates the torsional SIF (it) value for a bend or an intersection.
specify the Torsion SIF (it) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion SIF (it) box, CAESAR II sets the value to
1.0 by default.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors and Stress Indices Details.
Torsion Index (It)
Indicates the sustained torsional moment index (It). You can use this index value (along with
the torsional moment due to sustained loads) to determine the amount of stress that is due to
sustained torsional moment.
Piping Input dialog. Type the node number to which the stress index applies. Then, specify the
Torsion Index (It) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary panel tab.
If you do not specify a value for Torsion Index (It), CAESAR II sets the value to 1.0 by
default.
Axial SIF (ia)
Indicates the longitudinal (axial) SIF (ia) value on a bend or at an intersection.
Classic Piping Input Dialog. Type the node number to which the SIF applies. Then, specify the
Axial SIF (ia) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
The B31.3 code indicates that, in the absence of more applicable data, the Axial SIF
(ia) value is 1 for elbows, pipe bends, and miter bends. The ia value is the same as the Out-
Plane SIF (io) value for all other components.
Axial Index (Ia)
Indicates the sustained longitudinal (axial) force index (Ia). You can use this index value
(along with the longitudinal force due to sustained loads and the dimensions of a cross-
sectional area of the pipe) to determine the amount of stress that is due to sustained
longitudinal force.
specify the Axial Index (Ia) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Axial Index (Ia) box, CAESAR II sets the value to
1.0 by default.
Pressure SIF (ip)
Indicates the pressure SIF (ip) value for a bend or an intersection.
Classic Piping Input Dialog. Type the node number to which the stress pressure applies. Then,
specify the Pressure SIF (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure SIF (ip) box, the software sets the value to
1.0 by default.
For ISO-14692 2005, the software only uses Pressure SIF (ip) for mitered bends and
uses the unqualified bend value of 1.3. You can type another value, such as the qualified
bend value of 1.0.
Pressure Index (Ip)
Indicates the sustained pressure index (Ip).
specify the Pressure Index (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees auxiliary tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure Index (Ip) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement
tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184 and is 2.5 in the
Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets, and
for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the WRC 329
calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted, Ftg
Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
CROTCH R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this value
can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If you
attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a
smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the
resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
WELD (D)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for butt welds and tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied
for your code.
Socket Cx / Fillet
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. The value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See Appendix D of the B31 piping
codes for further clarification. When no value is defined, the software uses zero.
Weld ID
Specifies the weld identifier value. Select 0 - As Welded or 1 - Finished/Ground Flush.
If you specify a value of 1 - Finished/Ground Flush, then the software considers the weld to
be ground flush on the inside and out and it calculates the SIF as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see Mismatch - Average / Weld (d).
This property only applies to:
Bonney Forge Sweepolets
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets
Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes
IGE/TD/12
Butt Welds in the IGE/TD/12 code
B1; Wc
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.
ASME Class 2 and ASME Class 3

Defines the primary stress index used for the given node on the current element.
Unless you otherwise over ride this value, the following values are applied for ASME Class 2
and Class 3 piping:
Straight Pipe: B1 = 0.5 B2 = 1.0
Curved Pipe: B1 = -0.1 + 0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5
B2 = 1.30/h**2/3 but not <1.0; h = tR/ rm**2
Intersections: B1 = 0.5
Butt Welded Tees: B2b = 0.4(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.5(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
Branch Connections: (r < 0.5R)
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro)

but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)**1/4 but not < 1.5
B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (Wc) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case. When you do not define a value, the sofware uses the material database
value.
The software ignores this value when you set Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor to True
in the Configuration Editor.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
BS-7159 and UKOOA
Defines the pressure stress multiplier (m) if it is different than the code requirements. For
straight pipe, m = 1.0; for bends and tees, m is defined in Figures 7.1 and 7.12 of the BS 7159
Code.
IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).
B2
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is only
applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Straight Pipe: B1=0.5 B2=1.0
Curved Pipe: B1=-0.1+0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5
B2=1.30/h2/3; but not <1.0; h=tR/rm2
Intersections: B1=0.5
Butt-Welded Tees: B2b=0.4(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0
B2r=0.5(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0
Branch Connections: (r<0.5R)
B2b=0.50 C2b but not <1.0

B2r=0.75 C2r but not <1.0
C2b=3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not

<1.5
C2r=1.15(r/t)1/4 but not <1.5
You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values for
any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are defined.
SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.
Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8)
B31.1
(B31.1 2018 only)
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of B31.1 Figure D1 as well as Notes 10a,
10c, 10d, 10e, and 10f. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining
the SIF value for the tee. This option relies on setting the Reduced Intersection and No
RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs options on the Configuration Editor.
B31.8
Indicates that the software should use B31.8 Notes 6, 9, or 10, as applicable, when
determining the SIF value for the tee.
ASME NC and ND
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of ASME NC/ND, Figure 3673.2(b)-2 and
Notes 10 and 11. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining the
SIF value for the tee. This option relies on setting the Reduced Intersection and No RFT/WLT
in Reduced Fitting SIFs options on the Configuration Editor.
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3
Indicates that the material for the ASME NC/ND tee is ferrous, which allows the software to
compute the Y value based on the highest specified temperature value.
Properties Used for SIF Calculations with FRP Piping Code ISO 14692
The ISO 14692 code provides a limited number of tee and joint types for fiberglass reinforced
pipe (FRP).
1 - Tee
The software uses the method specified in ISO 14692 for non-qualified tees.
2 - Joint
The software uses the calculations specified in the code for joints and fittings.
3 - Qualified Tee
The software uses the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for tees
(including the pressure stress multiplier, mpst).
User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping System
SIFs for non-intersection points are normally taken to be 1.0 unless the piping element is a
bend. If the SIF should be greater than (1.0), then you can type the non-unity SIF in the
Intersection Auxiliary box without specifying the intersection type. A user-defined SIF only
acts at the node on the current element.
IGE\TD\12 Requirements
IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized SIF
parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text and
figures at the end of this section.
Node
SIFs.
SIFs.
Type
Specifies the type of tees or joints.
Do/r3
Specifies the Do or r3 values for each component type
in
mm
cm
Forged Tee to BS 1640

Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldolet
Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
T/Th/Tb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
in
mm
cm
Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldolet
Specifies the theta (q) value in degrees. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12
Reference.
Drawn/Extruded Tee
in
mm
cm
Weldoflange
Reference.
Te/Tb
Specifies Te or Tb based on component type.
in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee with Pad
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Full Encirclement Tee
Long Weldneck Flange
Weldoflange
rp/do
Specifies rp or do based on the component type.
in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
r2/rc
Specifies r2 or rc values based on the component type.

in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
r1/Tc/Lh
Specifies r1, Tc, or Lh based on the component type.
in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldoflange
L1/Lb
Specifies L1 or Lb based on the component type.
in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldoflange
IGE\TD\12 Reference
Use the figures below to identify the specialized parameters.
Forged Tee
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange

Sweepolet
Fabricated Tee

Weld ID
IGE/TD/12
Stress Concentration Factors
Overrides the stress concentration factors calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code
equations. Any values typed here apply only to the element on which they have been specified
except when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
For branches of tees, any bending SCFs specified here must include the "w" term.
Fatigue Class
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any values
selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except when
entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
Boundary Conditions
Indicates you are supplying information on items which restrain (or impose movement on) the
pipe, such as restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles, or displacements. Select or clear these
options by double-clicking the applicable check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Though not required, it is recommended that you define such information on the dialog box
which has that point as the From node or To node. This is of benefit if the data must be
located for modification. The auxiliary panel tabs allow you to specify up to four restraints
(devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger, one nozzle, or
two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, you can define additional conditions
for any node on other elements.
Restraints
Aux Tools toolbar: Restraints
Related commands:
Right-click menu: Restraint > Delete Restraint
Right-click menu: Restraint > Edit Restraint
Indicates that you are specifying restraint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Restraints check box on the Classic Piping Input.
The Restraints tab of the auxiliary panel controls data for up to six restraints for each
element. Node number and restraint types are required. All other information is optional. If
you omit the stiffness, the software defaults the support to a rigid component. Enter a
support tag name in the Tag field. You can also import support tag and a Support GUID using
keywords in the PCF restraint mapping file. CAESAR II adds the support tag after you import
the PCF file.
You can specify as many as six restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than six
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
Specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as X (1,0,1) for
a restraint running at 45 degrees in the X-Z plane.
Do not use restraints in the following situations:
Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the

Displacements auxiliary panel in Piping Input.
Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles auxiliary
panel to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or
API 650 to calculate local nozzle flexibilities. You can also specify custom nozzle
flexibilities using the Custom Nozzle Type option. After the software calculates the
nozzle stiffnesses, CAESAR II automatically inserts the necessary restraints and
flexibilities into the piping model.
Hangers program-designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers

check box to open the Hanger auxiliary panel in Piping Input.
For information on controlling the display of restraints, see Restraints.
Node
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to be
on the current element.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes (CNodes) can be used to tie
one node in the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank, then the software
ties the restraint node by the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the CNode is
specified, then the software ties the restraint node by the restraint stiffness to the connecting
node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, you can use CNodes to
geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. CAESAR II controls this option
through the Connect Geometry through CNodes configuration setting.
Type
Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraints auxiliary
panel in Piping Input. For more information, see the Restraints section of the CAESAR II
Applications Guide.
Restraint Type Description Example
ANC Anchor
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
Mu The anchor is
at the center of the
pipe for a rigid
stanchion. Otherwise,
the anchor is at the
base of the stanchion.
X, Y, or Z Translational Double Acting X support
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
Mu
+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z Translational Directional +Y support with slide
plates
Modifiers:
Allows movement in
Stiffness the positive Y direction
and restrains
Gap
movement in the
Mu negative Y direction.
The plus or minus

sign (+/-) on the restraint
specifies the direction of free
movement.
RX, RY, or RZ Rotational Double Acting 1) RZ, X, and Y
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap 2) RX, RY, X, and Y.

Hinged-end rod free to
rotate about the Z-
axis. Restrains all
except RZ.
+RX, -RX, +RY, -RY, +RZ, -RZ Rotational Directional +RZ, X, and Y
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
The plus or minus

sign (+/-) on the restraint
specifies the direction of free
movement.
GUIDE Guide, Double Acting Guide (or X) and Y
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
Mu
This can also
GUIDE only restricts be X instead of GUIDE.
the pipe’s lateral movement in
the horizontal plane and does
not contain a vertical
component or a pipe axial
component.
LIM Double Acting Limit Stop LIM with gap (or X

with gap) and +Y
Modifiers:
Gap between support
Stiffness
and each limit stop
Gap
Mu
A limit stop is axial to

the pipe but may not align
with a global axis when For more information,
elements are non-orthogonal. see Gap.
This can also

be X with gap instead
of LIM with gap.
+LIM, -LIM Directional Limit Stop +LIM with gap in the

direction of the From
Modifiers: node to the To node
Stiffness (also +Y)
Gap Gap between support

and the limit stop
Mu
A limit stop is axial to

the pipe but may not align
with a global axis when
elements are non-orthogonal.
For more information,
see Gap.
This can also

be +X with gap instead
of +LIM with gap.
XROD, YROD, ZROD Large Rotation Rod YROD or +YROD
Modifiers:
+XROD, +YROD, +ZROD,
Stiffness
Length
Fi
All rods are This can also

directional. If there is no sign be +YROD instead of
it is assumed to be positive. YROD.
-XROD, -YROD, -ZROD Large Directional Rotation -YROD

Rod
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Length
Fi
X2, Y2, Z2 Translational Double Acting X2 soil stiffness with a

Bilinear load limit
Modifiers:
K1
K2
Fy
For more information,
see Stif, K2, and Mu.
+X2, -X2, +Y2, -Y2, +Z2, -Z2 Translational Directional The directional
Bilinear restraint allows
movement in the
Modifiers: specified direction.
K1
K2
Fy
RX2, RY2, RZ2 Rotational Double Acting RX2, RY2

Bilinear
Modifiers:
K1
K2
Fy
+RX2, -RX2, +RY2, -RY2, +RZ2, -RZ2 Rotational Directional Bilinear The directional
restraint allows
Modifiers: rotation in the
K1 specified direction
about the specified
K2 axis.
Fy
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR Bottom Out Spring YSPR
Modifiers:
Stiffness
F
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB Translational Double Acting YSNB
Snubber
Modifier:
Stiffness
+XSNB, -XSNB, +YSNB, -YSNB, Directional Snubber The directional

+ZSNB, -ZSNB restraint allows
Modifier: movement in the
specified direction.
Stiffness
ANC
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at the
node.
X, Y, or Z
Specifies restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it defines the
direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom. For example, a
+Y restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is free to move in the
plus Y direction.
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)
Specifies translational skewed restraints. These values can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you
type a direction vector such as vecx, vecy, or vecz, CAESAR II converts the direction vector
into the corresponding cosines.
RX, RY, or RZ
Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
Guide
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.

LIM
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type
a sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element longitudinal
axis.
XROD, YROD, ZROD
Specifies translational, large rotation, rod, or hanger-type restraints. These values can be
preceded by a (+) or (-) sign to indicate the orientation of the pivot point about which the rod
swings. A (+) is assumed. In the case of a YROD, this implies that the pivot point is above the
pipe. The rod or hanger length is also required.
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD (VECX, VECY, VECZ)
Specifies translational skewed, large rotation rod, or hanger type restraints.
X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses
associated with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear
restraints can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy, vecz)
Specifies rotational skewed restraints.
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR
Specifies spring supports. These values can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
A bottom out spring requires additional input. The additional input includes the spring rate,
allowed travel, and initial load. If the allowed travel in the direction of support is exceeded, the
spring bottoms-out.
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB
Specifies snubbers, which are restraints that engage only during quick movements such as
those induced by a shock. They only act on the piping system in the occasional load case.
Snubbers can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
Because CAESAR II cannot perform load stepping, static analysis with snubbers requires a
preliminary manual analysis to determine thermal movements. Here is the procedure.
1. Analyze a hot operating case without your occasional loads.
2. Take the displacements from this analysis at the snubbers and put them back into the
input.
3. At the location where the snubbers are defined, define a CNODE and put these
displacements on the CNODE.
4. For your real analysis, apply these displacements to all load cases. Because they are on
the far side of the snubber, they won't affect anything unless the load case is called OCC,
which activates the snubber stiffness.
So:
When you run your standard OPE case (W+T1+P1+D1), the snubber node displaces as
before. There are no restraints because the load case is OPE, not OCC.
When you run the operating + occasional case (W+T1+P1+D1+WIND1), the snubber
node displaces along with its CNODE. There is a difference in these two displacements
due to the WIND1 load and the snubber stiffness, because the case is now set as OCC.
K2
Specifies the yield stiffness, K2, of a bilinear restraint. Type a positive value. Type a value of
1.0 for very small stiffnesses. The software treats a K2 value of zero as rigid.
When the load on the restraint exceeds Fy, the stiffness, Stiff, on the restraint
changes from K1 to K2.
Gap
Specifies a gap value based on the selected restraint Type.
GAP
in
mm
cm
Specifies the distance along the restraint line of action that the restrained node can travel
before resistance to movement begins. The gap value must be positive. The gap is given in
degrees for rotational restraints. If the translational restraint is not preceded by a sign, then
the restraint is double acting and the gap exists for both positive and negative displacements
along the line of action. For example, if a 0.25 in. gap is specified at a +Y restraint, then the
restrained node can move freely 0.25 in. in the minus Y direction before restraint occurs. The
gap specification does not affect the amount of free displacement that can occur along the
positive Y direction in this example.
You can type two restraints having the same line of action but with different signs at the same
node when you define windows of allowed movement. Be careful to remember to form the
window with signs on restraints rather than with signs on gaps. A gap is a measure of length
in CAESAR II. A gap is always positive.
Examples:
TYPE GUI GAP 1/4 ... One-quarter inch gap on either side of the guided restraint.
TYPE +Y GAP 3.0 ... Three-inch gap below the support that must be closed before the +Y
support begins acting.
TYPE RX GAP 5.0 ... Five-degree gap about the X axis about which the pipe may rotate
freely before rotational restraint occurs.
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Len
in
mm
cm
Specifies the swinging length of the rod or hanger. This is the distance along the restraint line
of action from the restrained node to the pivot point. The restraint swings about the pivot
point. If a CNODE is defined then the restraint swings about the CNODE. Len is a required
entry.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
K2
lb/in
N/mm
N/m
N/cm
in•lb/deg
N•m/deg
Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds Fy,
the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to model shallow
trench or groove-type pipeline supports. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero as rigid. Type 1.0
for very small stiffnesses.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR

"x"
in
mm
cm
Specifies the distance traveled along the spring axis before bottom-out occurs. In the case of
a typical YSPR, this is the movement in the negative Y direction before the spring bottoms out.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
To graphically display restraint gaps, use the Restraint legend. For more
information, see Legends Toolbar and Using Legends to Check Your Model.
Stif
Specifies stiffness associated with any support, guide, limit stop, rod, or spring that can be
defined as a restraint. If you leave this option blank then the defined restraint is considered
rigid. The default rigid restraint stiffness is 1.0E12. Avoid stiffnesses greatly in excess of
1.0E15.
lb/in
N/mm
N/m
N/cm
in•lb/deg
N•m/deg
K1 is the initial stiffness of a bilinear restraint (for example, X2). If the restraint is not rigid,
then you can type any positive stiffness.
If you specify a stiffness value for an anchor, the translational degrees of freedom at the
anchored node receive the specified value, and the rotational degrees of freedom receive a
factored value using the ratio of rotational stiffness divided by translational stiffness. The
ratio is determined by the units you define for the model.
Units File Rotational Translational Ratio

(.FIL) Stiffness Stiffness
ENGLISH 1 1 1
DEUTSCH 0.11298 0.175127 0.64513
BAR 0.11298 0.175127 0.64513
FRANCE 0.11298 0.175127 0.64513
JAPAN 0.11298 175.12 6.4516e-4
MM 0.11298 175.12 6.4516e-4
SI 0.11298 1.75127 0.064513
TUV 0.11298 0.175127 0.64513
Mu
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM
MU - Specifies the static friction coefficient. Friction provides resistance to movement along
the direction normal to the restraint line of action. The magnitude of the friction force is equal
to MU * Fn, where Fn is the normal force on the restraint. You can automatically assign a
friction coefficient to every new translational restraint by assigning a value to the Coefficient
of Friction box in the configuration. For more information, see Coefficient of Friction (Mu).
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
lb
Fi - Specifies the initial spring load. Leave this box blank for a rigid YROD. If you use YROD to
model a spring hanger, type the hanger stiffness into the STIF box. Type the initial cold load
on the hanger.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
lb
Fy - Specifies the yield load. If the load on the support is less than Fy then the initial stiffness
K1 is used. If the load on the support is greater than Fy then the second stiffness K2 is used.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
lb
F - Specifies the initial spring cold load. This input is required and is almost always positive.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
na - Not Applicable. This box is not used when the restraint TYPE is snubber.
Tag (Restraint Tag)
Specifies the restraint identifier or name. Type to manually create a new name. You can
import and export tags through a .pcf file or a neutral file.
The tag:
Displays in piping input, model graphics, and Isogen.
Exports to applicable output reports and MDB files.
Duplicates with the restraint or hanger when you duplicate the element.
GUID (Unique Component Identifier)
Displays the software-assigned GUID for the restraint.
GUID is a display-only value in the Restraints list input. For more information, see
List.
Hangers
Indicates that you are supplying hanger data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Hangers on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can fully define the hanger data, or the
hanger can be designed by CAESAR II:
To specify default values for all hangers in a model, see Hanger Design Control Data.
Any changes you type in the Hangers tab of the Piping Input auxiliary panel override the
global values you specify in the Hanger Design Control Data dialog.
To create a spring can, see Spring Can with Friction Builder.
The software provides catalogs for more than 35 spring hanger vendors.
For information on controlling the display of hangers, see Hangers.

For more information on how CAESAR II selects hangers, see Hanger Sizing Algorithm
Node
Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.
Design Data
There are two sections on the Hanger tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel.
Design Data
Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for you.
Predefined Hanger Data
Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The software provides the following hanger tables:
1. Anvil 14. BHEL 27. NHK
2. Bergen Pipe Supports Inc 15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly

28. PSSI GmbH
(formerly Bergen Power) Flexider)
3. Power Piping 16. Carpenter & Paterson 29. Seonghwa

17. Bergen Pipe Priv Ltd
4. NPS Industries (India) (formerly Pipe 30. Mitsubishi
Supports Ltd)
5. Lisega 18. Witzenmann 31. Yamashita
6. Fronek 19. Sarathi 32. Sanwa Tekki
7. Piping Technology 20. Myricks 33. Techno Industry
8. Capitol 21. China Power 34. Hesterberg
9. Piping Services 22. Pipe Supports USA 35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co.
10. Basic Engineers 23. Quality Pipe Supports 36. Senior
11. Inoflex 24. PiHASA 37. Unison (Korea)
12. E. Myatt & Co. 25. Binder 38. Wookwang
13. Sinopec 26. Gradior
Additional design options are available if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data,
accessed by clicking Hanger design criteria in the piping input. Specify the default hanger
table that appears in this dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger Table configuration
setting in Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples of incorporating spring
hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the CAESAR II Application Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs
CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the selection of less expensive
variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports when the spring loads are just
outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended load ranges are the most extreme
ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers build double-spring supports to
accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom travel limits to accommodate either
end of the extended table. Make sure that the manufacturer can supply the spring before you
use the maximum ranges. Use of the extended range often eliminates the need to go to a
constant effort support.
Most manufacturers do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range
for a hanger with springs that do not support an extended range, the software returns the
standard spring table and ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design
Cold load spring hanger design is a method of designing the springs in which the hot (or
operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of the piping. This method of
spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or
when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A

hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection is
a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is at
the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference
between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal
expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value

proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered)
Many designers prefer that the hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of
the spring table. This provides as much variability as possible in both directions before the
spring bottoms out when the system is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective
computer modeling of piping systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by
chart methods or calculated by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring
hot loads are at the middle of the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the
hot load to this position. The CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the
design load is closer to the middle of the larger spring's range, but never switches spring
types. This option, when it is effective, can only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II
attempts to move the hot load to the next higher spring when it is within 10% of the maximum
travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old
one.
Tag (Hanger Tag)
Specifies the hanger identifier or name. Type to manually create a new name. You can import
and export tags through a .pcf file or a neutral file.
The tag:
Duplicates with the restraint or hanger when you duplicate the element.
Available Space (neg. for can)
Specifies the amount of room above or below the pipe where you can install the hanger or
spring can. If the value is negative, then CAESAR II assumes that a spring can is to be
installed. If the value is positive, then CAESAR II assumes that a hanger is to be in installed.
in
mm
cm
The software creates hangers or cans for a location only if they can be installed in the space
allotted. The precise definition of available space varies with the manufacturer.
This is the available vertical clearance for the hanger or spring can:
Leave the Available Space box blank or set to zero if available space is not an important
design criterion.
When the available space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs
are typically chosen in place of one large spring.
Allowable Load Variation (%)
Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. Type the
value as a percentage. For example, type twenty five percent as 25.0.
If this value is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table.
This is approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the
hot load is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the
operating displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation is
25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
or as may be more familiar:
For a cold load design, the denominator is Cold Load.
Rigid Support Displacement Criteria
Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
in
mm
cm
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to be
supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined hanger
travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support is selected
instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria
box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases, these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid
rod has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit
Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant
effort support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support
from the manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
in
mm
cm
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the Maximum
Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a constant effort
support for a location.
No. Hangers at Location
Specifies the number of hangers at a location.
Type a positive number to indicate the exact number of hangers at that location.
Leave the box blank to indicate that CAESAR II place as many hangers as necessary to make
the installation work.
Type a negative number to indicate the maximum number of hangers that you accept. For
example, if you want to use as few springs as possible with a maximum limit of five springs,
type -5.
For information on the display of multiple hangers, see Hangers.
Allow Short Range Springs
Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from the
selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some instances
and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons. Clear this
check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range spring.
The software assumes that mid-range springs are more standard, readily available, and in
general cheaper than their short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short-range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Operating Load (Total at Loc.)
Overrides the operating load that CAESAR II is calculating.
lb
This value is normally specified when you think that loads on a piece of equipment are
reduced if a hanger in the vicinity of the equipment is artificially caused to carry a
proportionately larger part of the total load. This operating load is the hot load that the hanger
is designed to support after it undergoes any travel due to the thermal expansion of the
piping. CAESAR II's calculated hanger operating loads may be read from the hanger table
printed in the output processor. The column is titled HOT LOAD. The value also appears in this
table. Type the total operating load that you want to use at the location. For example, if there
are two hangers specified at the location and each should carry 500 lb., then the operating
load specified should be 1,000 lb.
Hanger Hardware Weight
Specifies any additional weight that must be supported by the hanger that exists between the
hanger and the pipe. This weight could affect the hanger design if the magnitude of this
weight is great enough.
lb
Multiple Load Case Design Option
Specifies the design option to use for spring hanger sizing calculations when multiple thermal
operating load cases exist. Each load case is a temperature and pressure combination
defined in Operating Conditions.
You can base the design on one or more operating conditions. For example, a two-pump
installation where only one pump operates at a time is a good application for multiple load
case design.
1 - Operating Case #1
through
9 - Operating Case #9
Designs the hanger for the selected operating load case.
10 - Maximum Load
Designs the hanger for the maximum load from the operating load cases included in No. of
Hanger Design Operating Load Cases.
11 - Maximum Travel
Designs the hanger for the maximum travel from the operating load cases included in No. of
Hanger Design Operating Load Cases.
12 - Avg Load & Travel
Designs the hanger for the average load and average travel from the operating load cases
included in No. of Hanger Design Operating Load Cases.
13 - Max Load & Travel
Designs the hanger for the maximum load and maximum travel from the operating load cases
included in No. of Hanger Design Operating Load Cases.
Maximum load and maximum travel can be from different operating cases and can result in
conservative hanger design.
You can use options 10 to 13 if there is more than one operating state for the hangers.
To use these options, you must define more than one design operating load case in No.
of Hanger Design Operating Load Cases on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
No. of Hanger Design Operating Load Cases sets a global value for the model. You can
override the global value for a specific hanger on the Hangers auxiliary panel.
Free Restraint at Node
Specifies the node number for the equipment where the restraint is freed. You can also
specify the corresponding free code to tell CAESAR II which of the restraint or anchor
directions to free. For nozzles that are further removed from the hanger usually only the Y
direction should be freed. Anchors or restraints simulating equipment connections that are in
the immediate vicinity of the hanger are usually freed during the hanger design restrained
weight run so that loads normally going to the equipment nozzle are carried by the hanger.
Hangers are commonly used around equipment nozzles to support the weight of the pipe as it
thermally expands away from the nozzle. The hanger can usually be designed to take almost
the full weight of the pipe between the anchor and the hanger if the anchor is freed when
making the restrained weight calculation. The pipe going to the anchor is treated just like a
free end, but only for the hanger weight calculation only.
The Free Restraint at Node box works in conjunction with the Free Code box. If the Free Code
is not specified for an anchor, then the software assumes that the anchor is completely free
for the restrained weight run.
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It is
run automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.
Free Code
Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or
restraint should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that
anchor in the Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the directions
to be released in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The available free codes
are as follows:
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)
Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X, Y,
Z, RX, RY, and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use
that option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about 4
pipe diameters.
Predefined Hanger Data
Specifies predefined hanger data. When you use the Predefined Hanger Data section on the
hanger dialog box and there is more than one hanger at the location, use the No. of Hangers
at Location box in the Design Data section to specify the number of hangers. Then, type the
spring rate and pre-load applicable to a single hanger. There is no reason to try to compute the
equivalent spring rates or theoretical loads.
Pre-defined hanger data can be specified in one of two ways:

Specify all information for the hanger.
Specify only the spring rate for the hanger.
If you specify all information, and the restraint configuration for the node is completely
defined, then it is not included in the hanger design algorithm.
For a position to be completely pre-defined, one of the following conditions must apply:
Spring rate and theoretical cold load
Constant effort support load
Spring Rate
Specifies the spring rate.
Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load
Specifies the cold load for the hanger. If you type both the spring rate and the cold load, the
hanger location is completely predefined, and CAESAR II does not perform analysis level
design for the hanger.
Resetting Loads on Existing Spring Hangers
If only the spring rate is given, CAESAR II assumes that you want to rerate the spring at the
given location. The software reads the old spring rate from the existing hanger and inputs it
directly to CAESAR II. Leave the Theoretical Cold Load box blank for the rerate. If more than a
single spring exists at the location, then type the total number of springs in the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section. CAESAR II assumes that the load is
distributed evenly among multiple springs at the same point.
CAESAR II goes through its normal hanger design procedure to calculate the load and travel
for all proposed hanger locations including the location with springs to be reset. The stiffness
of the reset springs is not used for this redesign. After CAESAR II sizes the springs, it makes a
comparison with the user-defined spring rates. If the selected spring rate is within 5% of your
existing spring rate, CAESAR II lists the spring's figure number and size in the output report. If
the selected spring rate is more than 5% of your value, no manufacturer's data is listed. In
either case, CAESAR II uses the spring rate that you typed in all following analyses. It is up to
you to confirm that the new hot and cold loads are within the existing spring's working range.
The primary use of the rerate capability is to find new installed loads for old springs. Springs
might be rerated after the shutdown of a unit that has been operating continuously for a long
period, or after mechanical or process changes are made to a piping system.
Constant Effort Support Load
Specifies the support load for a constant effort hanger and defines the hanger location. This
value is also included in all hanger design runs and all analysis cases following the hanger
cases that include the hanger preload force set in their formulation.
GUID
Displays the software-assigned GUID for the hanger.
GUID is a display-only value in the Hangers list input. For more information, see List.
Nozzle Flex
Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The Nozzles tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel controls options for flexible nozzle
connections. When you type values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates
the flexibilities and adds them to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads
according to your specified criteria. You can select WRC 297, API 650, PD 5500, or Custom in
the Nozzle Type box.
WRC 297
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.
After error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and Warnings
dialog. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC 297 bulletin. It is
sometimes helpful to know just how close a nozzle is to one of the several asymptotic limits
or to a curve boundary.
You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, the nozzle element must be normal to the vessel shell. If
you want to model hillside nozzles and latrolets, the first (and possibly very short) nozzle
element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the local
stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the true
centerline of the nozzle.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the vessel
head. The nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each other with a
minimum angle of 20 degrees. The nozzle and vessel centerlines cannot be colinear.
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node
and fills the corresponding values in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle Wall Thickness
boxes.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is unrestrained and does not have displacements specified for any of
its degrees of freedom.
The software automatically includes nozzle flexibilities in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. CAESAR II establishes six restraints for each flexible nozzle
input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each
of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for
nozzle nodes.
You should not put a restraint or an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility
data and any additional stiffnesses between these two nodes erroneously add to the nozzle
stiffnesses.
Vessel Node (Optional)
Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then the
nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel nodes
when you want to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or
foundation.
A vessel can be any type of vessel, tank, heat exchanger, vessel head (not just the
shell), or any other equipment.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosines VX, VY, VZ
Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel.
The nozzle direction cosines are taken from the current element's delta dimensions. The
vessel cosines act as a local reference vector similar to equipment nozzles in the Nozzle Lmt
Check.
For example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>
PD 5500 allows nozzles on cylinders or spheres.
Fax - Axial (Nozzle) (radial stiffness)
Mi - In-plane Bending (longitudinal stiffness)
Mo - Out-of-Plane Bending (circumferential

stiffness)
Mt - Torsional (Nozzle) (torsional stiffness)
D - Direction cosine of shell


stiffness)
Represents a nozzle on any type of head. D - Direction cosine of head
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, if the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are
collinear, the software flags this as an error.
For the custom option you are not limited to radial nozzles. For Custom, you can directly
define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the vessel head. The nozzle and
vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each other with a minimum angle of 20
degrees. The nozzle and vessel centerlines cannot be colinear.
Nozzle Outer Diameter
Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle.
in
mm
cm
CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the corresponding pipe diameter. You can
override this value because it does not have to be equal to the diameter of the pipe used to
model the nozzle.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only and
provides a way to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another
method.
Nozzle Wall Thickness
Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle.
in
mm
cm
CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can
override this value because it does not have to be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe
element used to model the nozzle.
method.
Distance to Stiffener or Head
Specifies the distance along the vessel centerline from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel which significantly stiffens the
vessel's cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface. This value is
optional and is ignored for spherical vessels.
1 - Distance to Stiffener or Head
2 - Distance to Opposite Stiffener

in
mm
cm
Distance to Opposite Stiffener
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel on the opposite side from Distance
to Stiffener or Head. This value is optional and is ignored for spherical vessels.
in
mm
cm
Vessel Outer Diameter
Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.
in
mm
cm
method.
Vessel Wall Thickness
Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the vessel.
Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
in
mm
cm
method.
Vessel Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle.
in
mm
cm
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, this thickness is added to the vessel wall thickness
before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.
method.
Vessel Temperature (Optional)
Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction.
ºF
ºC
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, you must also type a valid vessel material number in the
corresponding field. The software uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot
modulus-of-elasticity.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only and provides a way
to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.
Vessel Material (Optional)
Specifies the vessel material number.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, this is an optional field. You must pair the vessel
material number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can be
any valid material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number are
left blank or zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software and is for information only.
API 650
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design
of Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."
Nozzle Node
acting on the node.
boxes.
input.
nozzle nodes.
stiffnesses.
Tank Node (optional)
Specifies the node number on the tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
tank shell.
This is optional. If you do not specify one, then the nozzle node is connected by the
stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you type this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to the tank node.
Specify the tank node when you want to model through the tank from the nozzle connection
to the foundation.
Check.


stiffness)

stiffness)

in
mm
cm
model the nozzle.
method.
in
mm
cm
Distance to Tank Base
Specifies the height of the nozzle from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.
in
mm
cm
Reinforcing
Specifies the location of the reinforcing. Select Shell or Nozzle.
Tank Outer Diameter
Specifies the outside diameter of the storage tank. API 650 Addendum 1 does not
recommend these computations for diameters less than 120 feet.
in
mm
cm
Tank Wall Thickness
Specifies the wall thickness of the storage tank at the point where the nozzle connects to the
tank. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
in
mm
cm
Tank Modulus of Elasticity
Specifies the hot modulus of elasticity for the tank.
lb/in²
N/mm²
KPa
If this value is left blank, the software uses a default value of 0.2950E+08 lb/in² or
0.2034E+06 N/mm².
Tank Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
Specifies the coefficient of thermal expansion of the plate material of the tank. Values are
listed in engineering handbooks or the appropriate section of the API 650, App P. If this value
is left blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
in/in/ºF x 1.0E6
mm/mm/ºC x 1.0E6
cm/cm/ºC x 1.0E6
Temperature Change
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences.
ºF
ºC
For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the temperature change
would be 107 – 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature defined in configuration
and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left blank, the software
assumes a value of zero.
Fluid Height
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.
in
mm
cm
Fluid SG
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.
Set Displacement Vector
Specifies the displacement vector to assign to the calculated displacements. If you select one
among D1 to D9, the calculated displacements become the boundary conditions of the
current job, and CAESAR II can use them for the stress analysis. If you have already specified
displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II uses the calculated
displacements to replace the original displacements. If you select None, CAESAR II does not
use the calculated displacements for the stress analysis.
PD 5500
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.
Nozzle Node
acting on the node.
boxes.
input.
nozzle nodes.
stiffnesses.
foundation.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ
If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an
error.
in
mm
cm
model the nozzle.
method.
Distance to Stiffener or Head
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel which significantly stiffens the
vessel's cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface. This value is
optional and is ignored for spherical vessels.
in
mm
cm
Distance to Opposite Stiffener
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel on the opposite side from Distance
to Stiffener or Head. This value is optional and is ignored for spherical vessels.

in
mm
cm
Vessel Type
Specifies the type of vessel. Select Cylinder or Sphere.
in
mm
cm
method.
in
mm
cm
method.
in
mm
cm
method.
Vessel Temperature (Optional)
Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction.
ºF
ºC
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, you must also type a valid vessel material number in the
corresponding field. The software uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot
modulus-of-elasticity.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only and provides a way
to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.

Custom
Allows you to define flexibility values that you calculate using another method. You can also
define informational properties that are included in reports.
Nozzle Node
acting on the node.
boxes.
input.
nozzle nodes.
stiffnesses.
foundation.
Check.


stiffness)

stiffness)
Axial (Nozzle)
Specifies the radial stiffness in the direction axial to the nozzle, as calculated using another
method.

stiffness)

stiffness)
If you do not define a stiffness value, the software uses the default rigid stiffness.
In-Plane Bending
Specifies the longitudinal stiffness at the nozzle and along the run of the pipe, as calculated
using another method.

stiffness)

stiffness)
D - Direction cosine of head
For a nozzle in the center of the head,

Represents a nozzle on any type of head. in-plane and out-of-plane stiffness are
the same due to symmetry.
For a hillside (off-center) nozzle, you

should apply stiffness in the proper
direction.
Out-of-Plane Bending
Specifies the circumferential stiffness at the nozzle and across the pipe cross-section, as
calculated using another method.
stiffness)

stiffness)
D - Direction cosine of head
For a nozzle in the center of the head,

Represents a nozzle on any type of head. in-plane and out-of-plane stiffness are
the same due to symmetry.
For a hillside (off-center) nozzle, you

should apply stiffness in the proper
direction.
Torsional (Nozzle)
Specifies the torsional stiffness on the nozzle, as calculated using another method.

stiffness)

stiffness)
in
mm
cm
model the nozzle.
method.
in
mm
cm
method.
in
mm
cm
method.
in
mm
cm
method.
in
mm
cm
method.
Displacements
Defines displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking Displacements on

the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
in
mm
cm
Rotation units: degrees
The Displacements tab controls displacements for up to two nodes (Node 1, Node 2) for each
element. Type a value to specify the displacement allowed in a direction. Specify 0.0 to fully
restrain the node in a direction. Specify no value to allow free movement of the node in a
direction.
Free
Indicates that the direction is undefined and free for all nine possible vectors. Free is the
default value for all degrees of freedoms at each node before you define any values.
After you define a value for a direction on one vector, Free changes to Fixed for the
same direction on the remaining vectors.
Fixed
If a displacement value is entered for any direction on a vector, indicates an undefined and
fixed displacement for the remaining vectors.
Fix DOFs
When you define a value for any direction, sets the remaining Free fields of the vector to the
fixed value of 0.00.
Specifying no value for directions for all nine vectors models the node as free to move in
all directions.
Specifying 0.00 for all directions is the same as defining an ANC anchor restraint.
Example
1. Define directions on one vector. 2. Click Fix DOFs.
For information on controlling the display of displacements, see Displacements.

Node 1, Node 2
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at this
node.
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9
Specifies displacements for up to nine vectors, each corresponding to an operating

temperature. For each vector, you can define the six degrees of freedom in the global X, Y and
Z directions.
Type a value to specify the displacement allowed in a direction. Specify 0.0 to fully restrain
the node in a direction. Specify no value to allow free movement of the node in a direction.
Free
Indicates that the direction is undefined and free for all nine possible vectors. Free is the
default value for all degrees of freedoms at each node before you define any values.
After you define a value for a direction on one vector, Free changes to Fixed for the
same direction on the remaining vectors.
Fixed
If a displacement value is entered for any direction on a vector, indicates an undefined and
fixed displacement for the remaining vectors.
Fix DOFs
When you define a value for any direction, sets the remaining Free fields of the vector to the
fixed value of 0.00.
If an imposed displacement is specified for a degree-of-freedom, then that degree-of-freedom

is considered restrained for all load cases whether or not they contain that displacement set.
You can import displacements into the CAESAR II model from a file. For more
information, see Import/Export Displacements from File.
Flange Checks
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this
option by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file
if you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are
located in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges
in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.
Flange evaluation can be performed for individual load cases and for ABS and MAX load
combination cases. For more information, see Combination Method.
From, To, Both
Specifies whether the flange is on the From end, the To end, or both ends of the element.
Peq/NC-3658.3 Selection
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method or
the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
Peq
Evaluates the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/(p)G3 + 4F/(p)G2 + PD £ Pressure Rating
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)

M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
NC-3658.3
Evaluates the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 equation
(12) method. The software rearranges the equation so that the factored moment is less than
the limit:
(36,000/3125) * Mfs / (C * Ab) < Min(Sy, 36000 psi) in U.S. customary units
(250/21.7) * Mfs / (C * Ab) < Min(Sy, 250 MPa) in SI units
Where:
Mfs = Bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange
Sy = Yield strength of flange material at design temperature
C = Bolt circle diameter
Ab = Total cross-sectional area of bolts
For the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 equation (13) method for
dynamic events (Mfd), double the limit.
Read from File
Displays the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. Click this button to read Temperature-
Pressure Rating data from a file (ASME and DIN flanges are shipped with CAESAR II).
As an alternative to reading from a file, you can type the data directly into the table.
You can create your own data files by following the format described in the CAESAR II
documentation.
Values for both Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME – 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory.
Flange Class/Grade
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure class
and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange Temperature-Pressure
Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically builds a flange name made up
of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material Class.
Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle
Displays the gasket diameter.
in
mm
cm
Values for Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you select ASME – 2003 from the
Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the text file ASME-2003.G located in
the system folder of your application data directory. This box does double duty depending on
which analysis technique is active.
Peq Method
Specify the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction. From ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 2, (except as noted in sketch (1) of Fig 2-4), G is defined as (see Table 2-
5.2):
when b0 is less than or equal to 1/4, G equals the mean diameter of the gasket contact
face
when b0 is greater than 1/4, G equals the outside diameter of the gasket contact face,
less 2b.
When using the Peq method with the Stoomwezen Piping Code, use the bolt circle
diameter instead of the gasket load reaction diameter (see chapter D0701 of the Code RToD).
The results of this Peq Method are considered by Stoomwezen to be conservative.
NC-3658 Method
Specify the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through
the bolt centers.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the

flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis
- Load Case Editor.
Temperature-Pressure Table
Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange Temperature-
Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a material grade. You can type up to 24
temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in ascending temperature order.
Pressure - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
lb/in²
Bar
KPa
MPa
Temperature - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
ºF
ºC

- Load Case Editor.
Bolt Area (Ab)
Specifies the total cross-sectional area of the bolts at the root of thread or the section of least
diameter under stress.
in
mm
cm
Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9
Specifies the flange yield stress at the cold (ambient) temperature and at each of the
operating temperatures, for use in calculating the flange allowable stress.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²

- Load Case Editor.
Nozzle Lmt Check
Indicates that you are supplying equipment data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Lmt Check on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system.
The various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must
be less than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time-
consuming task, which cannot be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables you to define overall nozzle limits. This permits CAESAR II to perform a first
pass screening. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that
fail this initial screening.
Example
To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:
The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available,
you can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the
Nozzle Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment
Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a
simple check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute
for the more rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.
Node
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node
should have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node
represents an equipment nozzle.
Comparison Method
Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits. Available
choices are:
Absolute
Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to FX_allowable, FY to
FY_allowable, and so on.
|Fa| £ |Fal|
|Fb| £ |Fbl|
|Fc| £ |Fcl|
|Ma| £ |Mal|
|Mb| £ |Mbl|
|Mc| £ |Mcl|
SRSS
The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the corresponding
allowable is compared to 1.0.
Forces
and
Moments
Unity Check
The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by their respective allowables is
compared to 1.0.
and
Ref Vector X, Y, Z
Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system ABC
for this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments fields. The vector must be
perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:
( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction
( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction
( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z plane.
For the Equipment Limits Check, the angle between the pipe element and the
equipment reference vector should be 90. If you are trying to model an API-610 end nozzle on
a horizontal pump, set the reference vector to the CAESAR II global vertical axis.
Read from File
Displays the Open dialog box. Select an equipment file (some files are shipped with CAESAR
II) from which to read force and moment data. If the file contains multiple nozzle types, select
a nozzle type in the Select a Nozzle Type dialog box to complete the data import into the
Forces - Moments fields. Alternatively, you can enter the data directly into the fields.
Forces - Moments
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for the
load limits.
Forces - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
lb
Moments - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
in•lb
Nm
The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A is defined by the
current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference vector, and axis C is
the cross product of A and B (the right-hand rule). For more information on the use of these
limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method.
Pipe/nozzle axis
Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft direction.)
Other perpendicular direction.

Loading Conditions
Indicates that you are defining loads acting on the pipe. Select or clear these options by
double-clicking the applicable check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
These loads may be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed
uniform loads (which can be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces),
or wind loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factor—the loads
themselves are specified when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape
factor check boxes are unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the
loads were removed from these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change
on subsequent screens.
You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration and Environment.
Forces/Moments
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by double-
clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Forces - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
lb
Moments - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
in•lb
Nm
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per
element. You can use up to nine force vectors.
For information on controlling the display of forces and moments, see Forces.
Node
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for a
vector. You can type as many as nine vectors. The components of the force and the moment
are along the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Uniform Loads
Defines uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the Uniform Loads
check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The software defines the uniform load as force per unit length of pipe (F/L) unless
you specify gravitational loading (G) as a load multiplier.
lb/in
kN/m
N/m
N/cm
N/mm
The Uniform Loads tab controls up to nine uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model until
you change it.
UX, UY, and UZ
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components of each uniform load vector. You can type components
for up to nine vectors.
G's
Specifies a uniform load in terms of gravitational loading. You most often use uniform loads
in g’s for static earthquake loadings. You can specify g's individually for each vector.
Seismic Wizard
Opens the Seismic Wizard.
You can specify G’s as the default for each vector by selecting Uniform load in G’s for
Environment > Special Execution Parameters . For more information, see Special Execution
Parameters.
Examples
For uniform loading in force per unit length (F/L), you can specify a snow load of 8.0 pounds
per foot (assuming units of pounds per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) as follows:
UX UY UZ G's
1 -8/12 ¨
or as:
UX UY UZ G's
1 -.6667 ¨
For uniform load in G’s, you can specify a 1.0g load in the horizontal X direction as:
UX UY UZ G's
1 1.0 þ
You can specify a 1.0g load in the minus Y direction, which is the same as the pipe weight
load in Y-up coordinate system.
UX UY UZ G's
1 -1.0 þ
Wind / Wave
Indicates that you are supplying environmental load data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel tab indicates whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or wave
loading. The pipe cannot be exposed to both.
Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave,
current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This dialog box tab is also used to specify the Wind Shape Factor when Wind is specified. The
dialog box tab is used to specify various wave coefficients when Wave is specified. The
software automatically computes the wave coefficients if you leave these boxes blank.
Entries on this auxiliary panel tab apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later
element.
Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.
Wind Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wind load data. Wind load data is distributive and applies to
the current and all following elements until you change it.
Wind Shape Factor
Specifies the coefficient as defined in ASCE 7 in Figure 6-21 for chimneys, tanks, and similar
structure. A value of 0.5 to 0.65 is typically used for cylindrical sections. Activating the wind
option activates the Wind Load Input tab, which is accessed from the Load Case Editor during
static analysis.
Refer to the respective wind code standard for the applicable wind shape factor,
specific to that code.
Wave Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.

Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Drag Coefficient, Cd
Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6 to
1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca
Specifies the added mass coefficient. This coefficient accounts for the added mass of fluid
entrained into the pipe. Typical values range from 0.5 to 1.0. Type 0.0 to calculate the added
mass coefficient based on particle velocities.
Lift Coefficient, Cl
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.
Marine Growth
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The software
increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.

in
mm
cm
Marine Growth Density
Specifies the density used if you are including the weight of the marine growth in the pipe
weight. If you leave this box blank, the software ignores the weight of the marine growth.
lb/in3
kg/cm3
kg/dm3
kg/m3
Off
Indicates that you do not want wind or wave loads on the current element and all following
elements until you change it.
Materials
Shortcut keys:
F6 - Jumps to Materials
ALT+5 - Opens Edit Materials dialog box
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe material’s elastic modulus, Poisson’s ratio,
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a material database
containing the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved
by picking a material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire
material name and then picking it from the match list.
The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during
error checking.
Material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session. You
only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.
Material
Displays the material name from the material database. Materials are specified either by
name or number. All available material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are
displayed in the list. Because this list is quite long, typing a partial material name (such as
A106) allows you to select from matching materials.
Materials 1-17 define generic materials without code allowable stresses.
Material 18 defines a cut short cold spring element.
Material 19 defines a cut long cold spring element.
Material 20 defines Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe.
Material 21 represents user-defined material.
Materials 101 and greater define materials specific to the active piping code associated
with a pipe element.
Examples
(CAESAR II number) <material specification per piping code> <material grade>
(104) A106 A
(180) A335 P1
(CAESAR II number) <material specification per piping code> <composition
difference>
(306) API-5L X65
(307) API-5L U70
(CAESAR II number) <material specification per piping code><seamless (S) or

welded (W)>–<maximum thickness in mm>–<fatigue life in thousands of hours>
(406) 1.0345S–16–100
(469) 1.0345S–40–200
When you select a material from the database, the software places the physical properties
and the allowable stresses in the Classic Piping Input dialog.
If you change the temperature or piping code later, the software automatically updates the
allowable stress values.
For user-defined material, type the corresponding properties.
Allowable Stress
Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by double-
clicking Allowable Stress on the Classic Piping Input dialog. When selected, the Allowable
Stresses auxiliary tab displays in the auxiliary panel tab. Allowable stresses are automatically
updated for material, temperature, and code if available in the material database.
Properties on the Allowable Stresses tab change with the selected piping code.
Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements
until you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves to specify material fatigue curve data.

< f > Allowed Maximum of 1.2
Indicates whether to allow a maximum B31.3 stress range factor, f. Starting with the 2004
edition, B31.3 permits the stress range factor to exceed 1.0 under certain conditions.
On
Allows f to exceed 1.0, up to the limit of 1.2
Off
Limits f to a maximum value of 1.0.
This option is distributive and applies to the current and all following elements until you
change it.
This option is not used for B31.3 Chapter IX.
a_R
For ISO 14692 2017, specifies the long-term axial stress for a partially restrained hydraulic
(R_test) condition.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
For information on failure envelope points, see Figure B.1 of ISO 14692-2:2017.
If you do not specify a value for a_R and h_R, then the software uses a simplified failure
envelope based on other defined envelope points: al(0:1), al(2:1), and hl(2:1).
al(0:1)
For ISO 14692 2017, specifies the long-term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial
stress (hoop stress is 0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is
double the axial stress at this point).
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5 and 0.75
for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type.
If you do not define al(0:1), then you must define a_R and h_R. The software then
calculates al(0:1) from a_R, h_R, al(2:1), and hl(2:1) according to section B.1 in ISO
14692-2:2017.
al(1:1)
Specifies the long-term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962 2005, hoop
stress has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized
failure profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
If you do not define al(1:1) and hl(1:1), the software uses a simplified envelope for
plain pipe.
al(2:1)
Specifies the long-term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop stress
is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is hl(2:1) = 2 * al(2:1). This is a natural condition
when a pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However, CAESAR II allows you to type
different values for hl(2:1) ≠ 2 * al(2:1). In this case, the software displays a warning message
in the Error Checker.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
Allowable Stress Indicator / Pipe Restrained Status
The B31.4,B31.8, and ISO-14692 2017 codes recognize restrained and unrestrained
conditions.
Restrained and unrestrained options define the stress equations used but do not
affect the forces, moments, and displacements calculated for the pipe element. For example,
if you select Restrained Pipeline when the pipe element is not restrained, the software uses
restrained stress equations even though they do not represent the true state of the pipe
element. We recommend that you use the CAESAR II Determines option, which allows the
software to make stress equation selections based on the actual operating conditions.
For B31.4, select an indicator to define the stress equations and allowable values used by the
software:
Restrained Pipeline
Specifies fully restrained pipe, which is locked in position. The pipe is fully restrained beyond
the virtual anchoring at bearing points (such as elbows and tees). Axial stress is defined
without the use of bending moment.
Unrestrained Pipeline
Specifies all piping that is not fully restrained. Unrestrained pipe is free to displace laterally
and to strain axially. Stress calculation is dominated by bending moment.
CAESAR II Determines
Specifies that the software selects the stress equations based on the calculated axial load in
the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress calculation when the axial
pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load, meaning the pipe is held in place by the restraint
of the soil. The software applies the unrestrained stress calculations when the axial load is
different from the limiting load by more than 2.5%.
The limiting load is the force needed to fully restrain the pipe's axial growth. The axial growth
is due to the thermal expansion and the pressure expansion calculated when a Bourdon
pressure option is selected in the Configuration Editor or in Special Execution Parameters.
The Bourdon effect is always considered for FRP pipe, regardless of the Bourdon
setting used.
For information on the code equations used, see Code-Specific Notes in the Technical
Discussions section.
You typically use this option with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when
modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler.
Inland Riser/Platform
Specifies riser and platform piping on inland navigable waters and instructs the software to
select different sets of allowable values as defined in the Table 403.3.1-1.
For B31.4 Ch XI, B31.8, and ISO 14692 2017, select one of the following indicators:
Restrained Pipeline
Specifies fully restrained pipe, which is locked in position. The pipe is fully restrained beyond
the virtual anchoring at bearing points (such as elbows and tees). Axial stress is defined
without the use of bending moment.
Unrestrained Pipeline
Specifies all piping that is not fully restrained. Unrestrained pipe is free to displace laterally
and to strain axially. Stress calculation is dominated by bending moment.
CAESAR II Determines
Specifies that the software selects the stress equations based on the calculated axial load in
the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress calculation when the axial
pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load, meaning the pipe is held in place by the restraint
of the soil. The software applies the unrestrained stress calculations when the axial load is
different from the limiting load by more than 2.5%.
The limiting load is the force needed to fully restrain the pipe's axial growth. The axial growth
is due to the thermal expansion and the pressure expansion calculated when a Bourdon
pressure option is selected in the Configuration Editor or in Special Execution Parameters.
The Bourdon effect is always considered for FRP pipe, regardless of the Bourdon
setting used.
For information on the code equations used, see Code-Specific Notes in the Technical
Discussions section.
You typically use this option with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when
modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler.
Design Factor displays on the Allowables tab of List.
Alpha:fab
Specifies the fabrication strain resistance factor (afab).
This option displays for the DNV 2017 code.
Alpha:gw
Specifies the girth weld strain resistance factor (agw). Type a value between 0.6 and 1.0.
If you do not define a value, the software calculates the value based on DNV 2017, section
13.4.10.

Alpha:h
Specifies strain hardening (ah).
Appendix P - OPE Allowable Reduction
Indicates whether the software reduces the Operating Range Allowable value by 15%.
Appendix P in the 2010 Edition of B31.3 requires a reduction of the Operating Range
Allowable value by 15% for materials with ratio of Sy/St > 0.8. The software selects this check
box by default for the B31.3 code. When selected, CAESAR II performs this reduction, when
applicable.
You must set the Implement Appendix P configuration setting to True for CAESAR II to
display this check box on the Allowable Stresses tab of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. You can find this configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses > B31.3 Code-
Specific Settings section of the Configuration Editor.
This option is not used for B31.3 Chapter IX.
Buried
When selected, specifies that the pipe element is buried.
Burst (opr)
Specifies burst failure during operation. Select a safety class of Low, Medium, or High.
Burst (test)
Specifies the burst failure during testing. Select a safety class of Low, Medium, or High.

Chemical Resistance (A2)
Specifies the partial factor for chemical resistance, A2. If you do not define this value, the
software uses the default value of 1.0. The maximum value is 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.3 Chemical Degradation.
The effect of chemical degradation of all system components from either the transported
medium or the external environment shall be considered on both the pressure and
temperature ratings. System components shall include adhesive and elastomeric
seals/locking rings, if used, as well as the basic glass fiber and resin materials.
The effect of chemical degradation shall be accounted for by the partial factor A2 for
chemical resistance, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002. If the
normal service fluid is water, then A2 = 1. Reference shall be made to manufacturers' data if
available.
In general, the aqueous fluids specified in the qualification procedures of ISO 14692-
2:2002 are among the more aggressive environments likely to be encountered. However,
strong acids, alkalis, hypochlorite, glycol, aromatics and alcohol can also reduce the
properties of Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) piping components; the effect depends on
the chemical concentration, temperature and resin type.
The information from the manufacturers' tables is based on experience and laboratory
tests at atmospheric pressure, on published literature, raw material suppliers' data, and
so on. Chemical concentrations, wall stresses, reinforcement type and resin have not
always been considered. Therefore, the tables only give an indication of the suitability of
the piping components to transport the listed chemicals. In addition, the mixing of
chemicals may cause severe situations.
Code
Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default
setting in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their
current publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.1 Transportation codes

B31.3 B31.4
B31.3, Chapter IX B31.4, Chapter XI
B31.5 B31.8
B31.9 CAN/CSA Z662
Norwegian TBK-6 GPTC/Z380
ASME Sect III NC (Class 2) PD 8010-1
ASME Sect III ND (Class 3) Offshore codes
Navy 505 B31.4, Chapter IX
BS 806 B31.8, Chapter VIII
EN-13480 CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
HPGSL DNV 1996
JPI DNV 2017 (DNVGL-ST-F101)
Swedish Power Piping Code PD 8010-2

(Method 1)
Swedish Power Piping Code

(Method 2)
B31.1 - 1967
Stoomwezen
RCC-M C
RCC-M D
CODETI
FDBR
BS 7159
UKOOA
IGE/TD/12
ISO 14692 2005 & 2017
For information on code compliance considerations, see Technical Discussions.
Collapse
Specifies collapse failure. Select a safety class of Low, Medium, or High.
Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
Aluminum
Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at temperatures lower than room
temperature.
Austenite
Austenite stainless steel with high nickel content. For use at temperatures higher than room
temperature.
Others
Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
Unspecified
This is the default option.
Condition
Specifies the condition of the pipe during analysis. Select Empty, Water-filled Install, System
Test, or Operation.
Curve Radius
Specifies the installed radius of curvature when you lay a straight pipe element in an arc.
ft
mm
According to ISO 14692-2017, roping stress is proportional to Ea (the Axial Modulus

of Elasticity) and inversely proportional to the Curve Radius. On a flat surface, the curve radius
of the ground is infinite and decreases as the curvature increases. If the curve radius is not
specified correctly, a large amount of roping stress can be generated. To ignore the roping
stress, define a very large value for Curve Radius, such as 1e12.
Cyclic Service (A3)
Specifies the partial factor for cyclic service, A3. If you do not define this value, the software
uses the default value of 1.0. The minimum value is 0.25 and maximum value is 1.0.
ISO 14692-3:2017 uses A3 to scale the long-term envelope to the design envelopes to account
for the effects of cyclic loading.
Cyclic internal pressure loading may be applied with caution to axial loads provided they
remain tensile and is not applicable for reversible loading.
DCC
Specifies the displacement-controlled condition. Select a safety class of Low, Medium, or

High.

Design Factor
Specifies the design factor and hoop stress value for B31.4 Ch IX, Table A402.3.5-1. Select
one of the following options:
Design Factor Hoop Stress Factor (F1)
Offshore Pipeline 0.72
Offshore Riser/Platform 0.6
Custom Defines a custom value in the Hoop Stress Factor box.
Design Factor displays on the Allowables tab of List.
Design Lifetime (A0)
For ISO 14692 2017, specifies a factor for design life, A0, for FRP pipe. The software uses A0
as a multiplier for the expected lifetime value of the pipe. For example, an A0 value of 1 with
expected lifetime at the typical default value of 20 years results in a design lifetime of 20
years.
If you want a longer lifetime, then use a smaller value of A0 to reduce the allowable stress
limits. A smaller value of A0 creates a smaller operating envelope, making it harder for the
pipe system to pass requirements imposed by the modified envelope and extending the
design lifetime. You must separately calculate the value of A0 as defined by the code.
If you do not define this value, the software uses the default value of 1.0. The maximum value
is 1.0.
Example
Determine A0 to achieve a design lifetime of 30 years for GRE pipe operating at the default
temperature of 149° F (65° C).
According to the code:

A0 = (20 yrs/30 yrs)^Gxx
where
Gxx = a parameter depending on the resin system and operating temperature
From Table A.1 in ISO 14692-2:2017, Gxx = 0.065
thus
A0 = 0.974
Df
Specifies the shape factor, Df for pipe zone embedment material and compaction. The
software requires a value for Df to calculate the ring bending stress. If you do not define Df,
the software uses the default value of 8.0.
Use the following values for Df, as defined by AWWA-M45, third edition, 2014.
Gravel 1 Sand 2
Pipe Dumped to Slight Moderate to High Dumped to Slight Moderate to High

Stiffness 3 4 3 4
psi kPa Shape Factor, Df
9 62 5.5 7.0 6.0 8.0
18 124 4.5 5.5 5.0 6.5
36 248 3.8 4.5 4.0 5.5

72 496 3.3 3.8 3.5 4.5
1 GW, GP, GW-GC, GW-GM, GP-GC, and GP-GM per ASTM D2487 (includes crushed rock)
2 SW, SP, SM, SC, GM, and GC or mixtures per ASTM D2487
3 <85% Proctor density (ASTM D698), <40% relative density (ASTM D4253 and D4254)
4 ³85% Proctor density (ASTM D698), ³40% relative density (ASTM D4253 and D4254)
DFac
Specifies the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Its value
must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
If you do not type a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.
DNV Wall Thickness Calculator
Displays the DNV Wall Thickness Calculator dialog box. You can calculate DNV 2017
(DNVGL-ST-F101) output for the selected pipe element and estimate required wall thicknesses
based on burst, collapse, and load interaction criteria at defined depths.
For more information, see DNV Wall Thickness Calculator.
Eff
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current
piping code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5
Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. If Eff is
specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by Eff before they are used in the flexibility
calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS 806 (e),
CODETI (z), FDBR (vl), GPTC/Z380
Allowable stress or yield stress tables do not include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies. Eff is
ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum
wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D
Ignored for both flexibility and minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for
these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6
Circumferential joint factor z and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than in
the calculation of the allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen
Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not consider weld joint
efficiency for this code.
BS 7159
Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software uses a
default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA
Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically 0.67.
IGE/TD/12
Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the
IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV
Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2. The value
must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
EN-13480
Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum
wall thickness.
PD-8010 Part 1
Weld joint factor used in determining the allowable hoop stress. See Section 6.4.3.1 for
details.
PD-8010 Part 2
Not used.
ISO 14692
Eff is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
JPI
Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
Eh/Ea
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus Eh to the axial modulus of elasticity Ea. If you do not
define this value, the software uses a default value of 2.0.
The software uses Eh/Ea to calculate the bend flexibility factor, K-Factor. You can
adjust K-Factor by changing the value of Eh/Ea.
Ehb
Specifies the hoop (circumferential) bending modulus, Ehb. This value is required for
calculating the ring bending stress. If you do not define Ehb, the software uses the value
defined for Eh.

lb/in²
N/mm²
KPa
F1, F2, ... F9
Specifies the cyclic stress range reduction factor for most piping codes.
Some codes use different naming to indicate the cyclic stress range reduction factor.
Consult the applicable piping code for methods of combining cycle life data where
several thermal states exist and where the number of thermal cycles is high.
Unless otherwise specified, the software assumes a value of 1.0 if you do not type a
value.
For applicable codes, you can also specify the number of cycles, typically in the
thousands or greater, instead of the cyclic stress range reduction factor. The software
then calculates the cyclic stress range reduction factor as specified in the code.
B31.1
Cyclic stress range factor as defined by equation 1c.
B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX
Stress range factor as defined by equation 1c and corresponding to Fig 302.3.5. For B31.3, the
stress range factor can exceed 1.0 if certain criteria are met.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI
Fatigue factor is obtained from the equation given in Section 403.3.2. The fatigue factor
cannot exceed 1.2.
B31.4 Chapter IX
Not used.
B31.8
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section 833.8(b).
B31.8 CHAPTER VIII
Not used.
B31.9
References B31.1 for detailed stress analysis. For more information, see Paragraph 919.4.1.b.
CODETI
Called U in the code.
NORWEGIAN
Called fr in the code. This value can be as high as 2.34.
DNV
Material ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
CAN Z662
F1 = L - The location factor from Table 4.2
F2 = T - The temperature derating factor from Table 4.4
For F1 = L:
Application CLASS 1 CLASS 2 CLASS 3 CLASS 4
Gas (non-sour) and HVP (non-sour)
General 1.000 0.900 0.700 0.550
Cased crossings 1.000 0.900 0.700 0.550

Roads 0.750 0.625 0.625 0.500
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Stations 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Other 0.750 0.750 0.625 0.500
CO2 ( non-sour)
General 1.000 0.800 0.800 0.800
Cased crossings 1.000 0.800 0.800 0.800
Roads 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
Stations and
0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
terminals
Other 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
LVP multiphase (non-sour), LVP liquid & quasi-liquid hydrocarbon (with low flammability), &
LVP oilfield water
Uncased railway
0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
crossings
All others 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Class 1 - Location areas with no development or containing ten or fewer dwelling units
intended for human occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing one or more of the following:
11 to 45 dwelling units intended for human occupancy.
Buildings occupied by 20 to 120 persons.
Small, well-defined outside areas occupied by 20 to 120 persons.
Industrial installations where release of fluid from the pipeline can produce a dangerous
or environmentally hazardous condition.
Class 3 - Location areas containing one or more of the following:
46 or more dwelling units intended for human occupancy.
Facilities from which rapid evacuation can be difficult, such as hospitals, prisons, and
day-care facilities.
Buildings occupied by more than 120 persons.
Small, well-defined outside areas occupied by more than 120 persons.
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.
For F2 = T:
Temperature Derating Factor T
up to 120 (C) 1.00
150 0.97
180 0.93
200 0.91
230 0.87
F3 through F9 are not used.
CAN Z662 Chapter 11
F1 - Not used.
F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4
F3 = - FA design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1, column A
F4 = - FB design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1, column B
F5 through F9 are not used.
BS 806
Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
FDBR
Identical to B31.1 unless you type the thermal expansion coefficients into Temperature so that
the software cannot determine EHn. In this case, type a value of 1.0 for Fac and use F1, F2, ...
F9 to specify the product of (f * EHn/EC) for each Temperature case, where EHn is the hot
elastic modulus at operating conditions and EC is the cold elastic modulus.
SWEDISH METHOD 1
Creep rupture stress at temperature. This value corresponds to the nine possible thermal
states.
STOOMWEZEN
Creep related material properties as follows:
F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
BS 7159
Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that its value is
greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
σn = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life
UKOOA
Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio is defined as
sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for each of the
operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12
UTS value.
EN-13480
Stress range reduction factor, U, taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the B31.1 table
above) or computed from equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380
Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2)
Not used.
ISO 14692
F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI
Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
Fac
Specifies the multiplication factor. The field changes according to the current piping code and
is generally used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1
Not used.
B31.3
Not used
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI
Not used.
B31.4 Chapter IX
Used only when you select Custom for Design Factor. Define a Hoop Stress Factor value in the
range of 0.5 and 0.72.
B31.5
Not used.
B31.8
Not used.
B31.8 Chapter VIII
F1, Hoop stress design factor, according to Table A842.2.2-1 of B31.8. Appropriate values are
0.72 for pipelines or 0.50 for platform piping and risers.
B31.9
Not used.
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3
Not used.
B31.1 (1967)
Not used.
Navy 505
Not used
CAN Z662
Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ Ea(T2-T1) + (1-n) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
a = thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
n = Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a long
distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that
the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes the hoop stress
component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the
axial stress is compressive.
BS806
Not used.
Swedish Power Code, Method 1
Sigma(tn) multiplier. This value is usually 1.5. This value should be 1.35 for prestressed (cold
sprung) piping. The default value is 1.5.
Swedish Power Code, Method 2
Not used.
Stoomwezen
Constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, see Stoomwezen Section
5.2.
RCC-M C, D
Not used.
CODETI
Not used.
Norwegian
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, RM. If this value is not specified, this
factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR
Overrides the elastic modulus ratio of EHn/EC (hot modulus/cold modulus) which is
automatically determined by the software. Normally, you can leave this box blank.
The ratio is used to compute the expansion case allowable stress based on the material and
temperature. However, you can type a value greater than zero and less than one to override
the ratio calculated by the software.
To use FBDR, type the hot modulus EHn in Elastic Properties. The software determines the
cold modulus EC and computes the elastic modulus ratio.
FBDR is the only piping code in CAESAR II which uses the hot modulus in the
flexibility analysis.
If you type the thermal expansion coefficient into Temperature, then the software cannot
determine EC. In this case, type a value of 1.0 in Fac and use F1, F2, ... F9 to specify the
product of (f * EHn/EC) for each Temperature case.
BS 7159
Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined in Section 7.2.1 of the code. This should be
0.85 for liquids, 0.8 for gases, and 1.0 for ambient temperature changes. If left blank, this
value defaults to 1.0.
UKOOA
Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined for the BS 7159. If left blank, this value
defaults to 1.0.
IGE/TD/12
Material shakedown factor Ksd described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are
1.8 for carbon steel and 2.0 for austenitic steel.
HPGSL
Not used.
JPI
Not used.
DNV
Usage factor Nu (pressure bursting) from Tables C1or C2. Values must be between 0.64 and
0.84.
EN-13480
Not used.
GPTC/Z380
Construction design factor from Table 192.111.
PD-8010 Part 1
Same usage as CAN Z662.
PD-8010 Part 2
Not used.
ISO 14692
Fac is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
Fatigue Curves
Displays the Material Fatigue Data dialog box, where you specify cycle and stress values.
Stress - Typical units (depending on your unit system):
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
Use material fatigue curve data to evaluate fatigue load cases and cumulative use scenarios.
The software considers fatigue curves to be specified using a logarithmic interpolation.
IGE/TD/12 provides the opportunity to type up to five fatigue curves, representing fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W. Fatigue evaluations are explicitly specified by IGE/TD/12. CAESAR II
offers them as extensions to other codes.
Cycles / Stress
Defines cycles and stresses in pairs. You must type the values in ascending order by cycles.
Type stress values as the allowable stress range rather than allowable stress amplitude. You
can type up to eight cycle-stress pairs.
Read from File
Displays the Open dialog box where you can select a .fat file containing cycle and stress data.
The software provides some .fat files.
Cycle and stress values carry forward (in cycle/stress pairs) to succeeding elements
until you manually change a value. When you change a cycle or stress value, the
software retains the values of the cycle/stress pair even if the values later change in a
preceding element.
The software always replaces a blank field with 0.
Static fatigue cases are evaluated against the full range of the fatigue curve, while
dynamic fatigue cases are assumed to represent amplitudes, and are therefore
evaluated against half of the range of the fatigue curve.
Gamma:c
Specifies the condition load effect factor (gc).
h_R
Specifies the long-term hoop stress for a partially restrained hydraulic (R_test) condition.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
If you do not specify a value for h_R and a_R then the software uses a simplified failure
envelope based on other defined envelope points: al(0:1), al(2:1), and hl(2:1).
The value of h_R must be less than the value of hl(2:1).
Hand Lay
Indicates that the bend is hand-laid. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of the flexibility factor for the bend.
hl(1:1)
Specifies the long-term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
If you do not define al(1:1) and hl(1:1), the software uses a simplified envelope for plain
pipe.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, the software assumes that hl(1:1) is equal
to al(1:1) and displays a warning message in the Error Checker.
hl(2:1)
Specifies the long-term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress
is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, shl(2:1)= 2*sal(2:1). However, CAESAR II
allows shl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of sal(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a
warning message in the Error Checker.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to
twice al(2:1) and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more
information, see al(2:1).
Ksd
Material shakedown factor described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
Carbon Steel: 1.8
Austenitic Steel: 2.0
LCC
Specifies the load-controlled condition. Select a safety class of Low, Medium, or High.

Material with Luder Plateau
For tensile stress, specifies a material with a stress-strain curve that includes a Lüder plateau.
A Lüder plateau is a discontinuity due to yield point elongation in the post-yield state of the
stress-strain curve.
Specifies the equivalent stress check usage factor. Define a value between 0.77 and 1.00.
Ns
Specifies the pressure yielding usage factor. Define a value between 0.77 and 0.96.
Nu
Specifies the pressure bursting usage factor. Define a value between 0.64 and 0.84.
Partial Factors for Temperature 1, 2, ... 9
Specifies the partial factor for temperature. Because each operating temperature needs an A1
factor, you may need to specify up to 9 factors if all 9 operating temperatures are defined in a
model. If you do not define these values, the software uses the default value of 1.0. The
maximum value is 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.2 Design Temperature.
The effect of temperature on reduction of mechanical properties shall be accounted for by the
partial factor A1, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002.
The maximum operating temperature of the piping system shall not exceed the temperature
used to calculate the partial factor A1 of the GRP components. If the operating temperature is
less than or equal to 65°C, then A1 is generally equal to 1.0
The effect of low temperatures on material properties and system performance shall be
considered. For service temperatures below 0°C, the principal should consider the need for
additional testing, depending on the resin system. Both qualification as well as additional
mechanical tests should be considered.
Glass Reinforced Plastic GRP materials do not undergo ductile/brittle transition

within the temperature range of this part of ISO 14692. Because of this, there is no significant
abrupt change in mechanical properties at low temperatures. A concern is that at
temperatures lower than –35°C, internal residual stresses could become large enough to
reduce the safe operating envelope of the piping system.
Prop. Buckling
Specifies propagation buckling. Select a safety class of Low, Medium, or High.
Pvar
Specifies the pressure variance.
lb/in²
Bar
KPa
MPa
The field name changes according to the selected piping code.
ASME and RCC-M C, D
Variance in the pressure between operating and peak to be used as the component in
equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not type the peak pressure for Pvar.
Type the difference between the operating pressure and the peak pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2
Beta for the Seff calculation. If not given, this value defaults to 10%. Type ten percent as 10.0.
Values must be between 0.1 and 25.0. Values specified outside of this range are
automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the allowed range. The definition for beta, as given
in the Swedish piping code in section 5.6.2.1, is the "maximum allowable minus the tolerance
as a percentage of the nominal wall thickness".
Stoomwezen
Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian
Difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure Pmaks (in
equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping
code (V) or not required (N).
DNV
Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between 0.77 and
1.00.
PD-8010 Part 1
Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1.2. Typical limits on this value are 0.3 and 0.72,
depending on categories and class locations. This design factor determines the allowable
hoop stress. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 1.
PD-8010 Part 2
Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1 Table 2. Type the value of fd for the hoop stress
evaluation. This value should be either 0.6 (riser/land fall) or 0.72 (seabed/tie-in). CAESAR II
determines the appropriate fd values for the equivalent stress from Table 2. This value has no
units for PD-8010 Part 2.
This value is taken from the Material Database, if available and applicable, unless you
type a value.
ISO 14692
Pvar is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
Qs
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
A qualified stress, Qs, provided by the manufacturer is defined as:
Pq is the qualified pressure;
D is the average diameter of the pipe;
tr is the average reinforced wall thickness of the pipe.
The qualified stress, sqs, for fittings is calculated as:
CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1), and
hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.
You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are not
in the piping model. You can type positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r, for
example) to pass the Error Checker.
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined as:
where:
ssh(2:1) is the short-term hoop strength, under 2:1 stress conditions
ssa(0:1) is the short-term axial strength, under axial loading only
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, use the default values:
Short-term
Strength Bi-axial
Fitting Component
Stress Ratio (r)*
Filament-wound
unidirectional 90° and ±
0.45
Q°
Bends 1.0
Filament-wound and
hand-lay 1 1.9
100% hand-lay
Filament-wound and
Tees 1.0
hand-lay 1
Other Hand
CSM/WR 1, 9 1.9
laminated
Spigot/Socket Adhesive
or Mechanical 1.0
Connection
0.45
Joints Threaded
1.0
Flange
2.0
Laminated
You can use a higher factor for r if justified by testing according to 6.2.6 ISO 14692-
2-2002.
CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not
be required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.
Specifies the reaction force or resistance point load.
lb
Sc
Specifies the cold stress value. Typically, this is the cold allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills this box automatically
after you select the material and piping code. The value of SC is usually divided by the
longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
See the notes that follow for your selected piping code.
B31.1
Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where
applicable. Do not use these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint efficiency
(Eff) is given on this dialog box, then CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint efficiency before
using it in the allowable stress equations.
Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The Eff value should be
zero, blank, or one. The 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
as part of the tables in Appendix A. If you are using this version of the code, then you should
type a value for Eff in the appropriate box on this dialog box.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI
Not used. The only stress value in B31.4 is the yield stress taken from Table 1 in the appendix.
For more information, see Sy.
B31.5
Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The value of Eff should be
zero, blank, or one.
B31.8
Su, the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
B31.8 Chapter VIII

Not used. The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from Appendix D. For more
information, see Sy.
B31.9
SC is taken directly from I-1. If you define a value for Eff, the software only uses it in the
minimum wall thickness check.
ASME NC and ND
SC is taken directly from Appendix I. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Navy 505
There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is implied in

Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given, then CAESAR II divides SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should be zero, blank, or one.
CAN Z662
Not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the standards or
specification under which the pipe was purchased. For more information, see Sy.
BS 806
0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. Eff is not used in BS 806. If
you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Swedish Method 1
Not used. Method 1 only uses the yield or creep rupture stress at temperature (SHn and Fn
respectively on this dialog box). Eff is used but is the circumferential weld joint efficiency and
has a different meaning.
Swedish Method 2
SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. Eff is not used. If you define
a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
B31.1 (1967)
SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix A. These tables
include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. Do not use these efficiencies
for flexibility stress calculations. If you define a value for Eff, then CAESAR II divides the SC by
the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
Stoomwezen (1989)
SC is the yield stress at room temperature. This value is referred to as Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D
SC is taken from the Appendix. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software
ignores it.
CODETI
This is famb from the code. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores
it.
Norwegian
This is f1 from the code. Eff is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
BS 7159
Not used. Design stress is typed in the SH boxes.
UKOO
Not used. Design stress (in the hoop direction) is typed in the SH boxes.
IGE/TD/1
Not used.
DNV
Not used.
EN-13480
SC is the basic allowable stress at minimum metal temperature as defined in Section 12.1.3.
GPTC/Z380
Not used.
PD 8010-1
Not used.
PD 8010-2
Not used.
ISO 14692
SC is used in a different way. See reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Not used.
JPI
Not used.
SH1, SH2, ... SH9
Specifies the hot stresses. Typically, these are the hot allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
CAESAR II fills the boxes automatically after you select the material and piping code. There
are nine boxes corresponding to the nine operating temperatures. You must type a value for
each defined temperature case. The value of SH is usually divided by the longitudinal weld
efficiency (Eff) before being used.
See the recommendations that follow for your selected piping code.
B31.1
Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC.

Not used.
B31.5
B31.8
Temperature derating factor, T, according to Table 841.116A.
B31.8, Chapter VIII
Temperature derating factor, T (according to Table 841.116A).
B31.9
Allowable stress from Table I-1. For more information, see SC.
ASME NC and ND
Allowable stress from Appendix I.
Navy 505
Allowable stress from Table XIIA. For more information, see SC.
CAN Z662
Not used.
BS 806
0.2% of the proof stress at design temperature Appendix E. Eff is not used.
Swedish Method 1
Yield stress at temperature from Appendix 1.
Swedish Method 2
Allowable stress at temperature from Appendix 2.
B31.1 (1967)
Stoomwezen
Yield stress at design temperature. This value is referred to as Re (vm) in the code.
RCC-M C, D
Taken from the Appendix.
CODETI
f from the code.
Norwegian
f2 from the code.
FDBR
Hot allowable defined in Section 3.2.
BS 7159
Design stress sd in the longitudinal direction as defined in Section 4.3 of the code (σd =Σd *
Elamx). Specify design stress in the circumferential (hoop) direction by typing the ratio of the
circumferential design stress to the axial design stress in the Eff box. Because design strain
should be the same for both directions, the value in the Eff box is also the ratio of Elamf(hoop)
to Elamx (longitudinal).
UKOOA
Allowable design stress in the hoop direction defined in the code as f1 * LTHS. The three hot
allowable stress boxes correspond to the three possible temperature cases.
DNV
Yield stress is used here instead of hot allowable stress.

IGE/TD/12
Yield stress is used here instead of a hot allowable stress.
EN-13480
Allowable stress at maximum metal temperature.
GPTC/Z380
Temperature reduction factor T according to Par. 192.115.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2)
Not used.
ISO 14692
SH is used in a different way. See the reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Not used.
JPI
Not used.
SMTS
Defines the minimum tensile stress specified by DNVGL-ST-F101.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²

SMYS
Defines the minimum yield stress specified by DNVGL-ST-F101.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
Supplementary Requirement
Select Supplementary Requirements to apply a material factor aU of 1.0.
Sy
Specifies the yield stress, Sy. CAESAR II fills the box automatically after you select the
material and piping code.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
The field changes according to the current piping code and is generally used for transmission
and non-US piping codes.
B31.1
Used only for the hydrotest allowable.

Specified minimum yield stress. Used for the allowable stress determination.
B31.5
Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph addresses ferrous
materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value typed here should be the
quantity (40% of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is defined, the OPE case is
considered a stress case. This value is the allowable reported in the output report. The
computed operating stress includes all longitudinal components and ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII
Specified minimum yield stress.
B31.9
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3
Basic material yield strength at design temperature for use in Eqn. 9 for consideration of Level
A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits must be satisfied in separate runs by
adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the CAESAR II configuration file. If the
occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the minimum of 1.2 x 1.5 SH or 1.5 SY. If
the factor is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 SH or 1.8 SY. If the factor is 2.0, the
allowable is the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 SH or 2.0 SY. To satisfy the code, replace SH with SM for
the latter two.
Navy 505
Not used.
CAN Z662
Minimum yield strength taken from the standards or specifications under which the pipe was
purchased or according to clause 4.3.3.
BS 806
Sustained stress limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep rupture design
stress value defined in Appendix A under cold, or any other, operating condition. See 17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1
Not used. Type the yield stress at temperature in the respective SHn boxes for the up to nine
possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2
Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967)
Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989)
Tensile strength at room temperature. This value is referred to as Rm in the code.
RCC-M C, D - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
CODETI
Norwegian
Allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If you do not type a value,
then this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR
BS 7159
Not used.
UKOOA
Not used.
IGE/TD/12 - Minimum yield stress (SMYS).

DNV
Not used. This value is calculated as Sy = min(Sy1, ..., Sy9).
EN-13480
GPTC/Z380
Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 1
PD-8010 Part 2
ISO-14692
Sy is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Not used.
JPI
Not used.
SY (c)
Specifies the minimum yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at room temperature.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
SY1, SY2, ... SY9
Specifies Syt, the specified minimum yield or stated 0.2% endurance (proof stress) of the pipe
material at maximum design temperature.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
This option only displays when you select JPL or HPGSL in the Codes list..
SYa
Specifies the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature. This is also referred to as SMYS or SY.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
System Design Factor
Specifies the system design factor. This value is multiplied by the occasional load factor (k) to
generate the value of the part factor for loading (f2). If you do not define this value, the
software uses the default value of 0.67.
The purpose of the system design factor is to define an acceptable margin of safety between
the strength of the material and the operating stresses for the three load cases. These load
cases are occasional, sustained including thermal loads, and sustained excluding thermal
loads. The following table shows the relationship between the system design factor, the
occasional load factor, and f2, along with their default values.
Load System Design Occasional Load Part Factor for

Loading Type Duration Factor (SDF) Factor Loading (f2)
Occasional Short-term 0.67 1.33 0.89
Sustained
Including Long-term 0.67 1.24 0.83
Thermal Loads
Sustained
Excluding Long-term 0.67 1.00 0.67
Thermal Loads
The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ Load
Factor.
TD/12 Modulus Correction
Specifies the modulus correction divisor.
lb/in²
N/mm²
KPa
IGE/TD/12 Section A5.6 requires that the allowable fatigue stress (as specified in the fatigue
curves) be adjusted by the ratio of the material modulus of elasticity divided by 209´103
N/mm2. This divisor can be adjusted if necessary by changing the entry in the Modulus
Correction box.
Thermal Factor (k)
Specifies the thermal factor. This factor is defined in Section 8.4 of ISO-14692-3:2002(E). In
the absence of further information, the thermal factor k should be taken as 0.85 for liquids
and 0.8 for gasses. If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 1.0.
UTS (c)
Specifies the minimum tensile strength at room temperature.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength, Sut, at the design temperature.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
UTSa
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength of the pipe material corresponding to the specified
ambient temperature.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
y/D
Specifies the predicted vertical pipe deflection. The software requires a value for y/D to
calculate the ring bending stress. If you do not define this value, the software uses the
maximum value of 0.05.
in
mm
cm
For more information, see AWWA-M45, third edition, 2014.
Elastic Properties
Shortcut keys:
F7 - Jumps to Elastic Properties
ALT+6 - Opens Edit Elastic Properties dialog
Displays the cold elastic modulus, EC, hot elastic moduli at operating conditions, EHn, and
Poisson’s ratio, m, of the material for the selected element. The software automatically fills in
the properties from the materials database. If you want to change any material property
extracted from the material database, change the value in the corresponding field.
You must manually define the properties for the user-specified Material type 21.
Elastic modulus: Typical units (depending on your unit system):
lb/in²
N/mm²
KPa
EH1 through EH9 define hot elastic moduli for operating conditions defined by Temperature
and Pressures.
To edit the hot elastic moduli for operating conditions 4 through 9, double-click >> to display
the Edit Elastic Properties dialog.
When the temperature for an operating condition falls above the maximum temperature
or below the minimum temperature for the material, the software defines the
corresponding EH value as 0.
Material properties in the database can be changed permanently using the Material
Database Editor.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
The CAESAR II FRP pipe element models an orthotropic material whose properties can be
defined by:
Ea - Axial Modulus-of-elasticity
Eh - Hoop Modulus-of-elasticity
nh/a - Poisson's ratio of the strain in the axial direction resulting from a stress in the hoop
direction.
G - Shear Modulus (Not related to the Elastic Modulus and Poisson's ratio in the conventional
manner.)
FRP pipe is specified by setting the Material box to 20. The material name displays and FRP
properties from the configuration file display on the dialog box.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: Elastic
Modulus changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to "Ea/Eh*nh/a". The
latter entry requires the value of the following expression: (Ea*nh/a) / Eh. This expression is
equal to na/h, Poisson's ratio of the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the
axial direction. The shear modulus G is defined by typing the ratio of G/Ea (shear modulus to
axial modulus) on the special execution parameters screen. You can type only one ratio for
each job.
The decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular
cross-section is typically negligible because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher
than the axial modulus for FRP pipe. Because of this, a default flexibility factor of 1 is used for
these components. Similarly, because the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe are
likely to have no bearing on FRP design, the software applies a SIF of 2.3 to all fittings.
CAESAR II uses these recommendations for all FRP fittings unless you specifically override
the defaults. You can override the defaults on a point-by-point basis or by forcing all
calculations to adhere to the requirements of the governing code through a CAESAR II
configuration parameter. Note that if the BS 7159, UKOOA, or ISO 14692 code is in effect, all
SIFs and flexibility factors are calculated according to that code regardless of the
configuration parameter settings.
Densities
Shortcut keys:
F8 - Jumps to Densities
ALT+7 - Opens Edit Densities dialog box
Specifies the densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents in this block from
The piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material
Database. You can also type Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by
following the input immediately with the letters: SG, for example, 0.85SG (there can be no
spaces between the number and the SG).
If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no
insulation density is specified, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Densities dialog box.
Refract Thk
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping.
in
mm
cm
Refractory is applied to the inside of the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system
and reduces the internal pipe area affecting the fluid weight in the system.
1 - Diameter
2 - Wt/Sch
3 - Insul Thk
4 - Refract Thk
Refract Density / Liner Density
Defines the density of the refractory. Type a value or select a material from the list for Refract
Density. When you select a material, the density value replaces the material name.
For ISO-14692 2017, defines the density of the liner. Type a value for Liner Density.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could lead to
undersized restraints.
ISO-14692 2017 distinguishes between the reinforced wall thickness and the total wall
thickness. The reinforced wall thickness does not include the liner (inside) and sheath
(outside) the reinforced wall. In CAESAR II, define the reinforced dimension (not
including the liner and sheath) for Diameter and Wt/Sch, and separately define Refract
Thk, Refract Density, Liner Thk, and Liner Density.
If you specify Liner Thk, but do not specify Liner Density, then the software uses Pipe
Density as the liner density.
Refractory Material Density
English SI / MM Deutsch Bar / France /Japan / TUV

(lb/in3) (kg/cm3) (kg/dm3) (kg/m3)
A.P. Green Greencast 94 0.09433 0.00261 2.61105 2611.05444
A.P. Green Kast-O-Lite 0.08391 0.00232 2.32263 2322.62915

25
A.P. Green Kast-Set 0.08391 0.00232 2.32263 2322.62915

A.P. Green Kruzite 0.07234 0.00200 2.00237 2002.37109
Castable
A.P. Green MC-22 0.06655 0.00184 1.84210 1842.10400
A.P. Green MC-30 0.05208 0.00144 1.44157 1441.57434
A.P. Green VSL-35AST 0.02257 0.00062 0.62474 624.73761

94
B & W Kaocrete 32-C 0.05787 0.00160 1.60184 1601.84180
B & W Kaocrete B 0.08333 0.00231 2.30657 2306.57446
B & W Kaolite 2200 0.09549 0.00264 2.64316 2643.16333
B & W Kaolite 2200-HS 0.03241 0.00090 0.89711 897.10870
B & W Kaolite 2500-LI 0.04745 0.00131 1.31342 1313.41602
B & W KAO-TAB 95 0.03472 0.00096 0.96105 961.04956
Insul Thk
Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping.
in
mm
cm
Insulation applied to the outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and
in the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
1 - Diameter
2 - Wt/Sch
3 - Insul Thk
4 - Refract Thk
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Clad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected
pipe area used for wind load computations.
in
mm
cm
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Liner Thk
For ISO-14692 2017, specifies the thickness of the liner (tl) to be applied to the piping.
in
mm
cm
The liner is applied to the inside of the pipe. The software includes the liner in the dead weight
of the system and in the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
1 - Diameter
2 - Wt/Sch
3 - Sheath Thk
4 - Liner Thk
Even if you specify the unit weight of liner, the thickness values are still required so that
the software can determine the correct projected area.
Sheath Thk
For ISO 14692-2017, specifies the thickness of the sheath (ts) to be applied to the piping.
in
mm
cm
The sheath is applied to the outside of the pipe. The software includes the sheath in the dead
weight of the system and in the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
1 - Diameter
2 - Wt/Sch
3 - Sheath Thk
4 - Liner Thk
Even if you specify the unit weight of sheathing plus liner, the thickness values are still
required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Insulation Density / Sheath Density
Defines the density of the insulation. Type a value or select a material from the list for
Insulation Density. When you select a material, the density value replaces the material name.
For ISO-14692 2017, defines the density of the sheath. Type a value for Sheath Density.
If you do not specify Insulation Density, then the software uses the default value of
Calcium Silicate, as shown in the table.
If you specify Sheath Thk but do not specify Sheath Density, then the software uses
Pipe Density as the sheath density.
Insulation Material Density
English SI / MM Deutsch Bar / France /Japan / TUV

(lb/in3) (kg/cm3) (kg/dm3) (kg/m3)
Amosite Asbestos 0.9259E- 0.2563E-03 0.2563 0.2563E+03

02
Calcium Silicate 0.6655E- 0.1842E-03 0.1842 0.1842E+03

02
Careytemp 0.5787E- 0.1602E-03 0.1602 0.1602E+03

02
Fiberglass 0.4051E- 0.1121E-03 0.1121 0.1121E+03
(Owen/Corning) 02
Foam-Glass/Cellular 0.4630E- 0.1282E-03 0.1282 0.1282E+03

Glass 02
High Temp 0.1389E- 0.3845E-03 0.3845 0.3845E+03

01
Kaylo 10 (TM) 0.7234E- 0.2002E-03 0.2002 0.2002E+03

02
Mineral Wool 0.4919E- 0.1362E-03 0.1362 0.1362E+03

02
Perlite / Celo-Temp 0.7523E- 0.2082E-03 0.2082 0.2082E+03

1500 02
Polyurethane 0.1273E- 0.3524E-04 0.3524E-01 0.3524E+02

02
Styrofoam 0.1042E- 0.2884E-04 0.2884E-01 0.2884E+02

02
Super X 0.1447E- 0.4005E-03 0.4005 0.4005E+03

01
Cladding Density
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the outside
of the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also included in
the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
lb/in3
kg/cm3
kg/dm3
kg/m3
Insul/Cladding Unit Weight

Displays an alternative to specifying the insulation and cladding thickness and density. This is
an optional combined uniform load (weight per unit length).
lb/in
kN/m
N/m
N/cm
N/mm
If you are applying wind loads, then you must type the insulation and cladding
thickness to obtain the correct projected area for wind load computation.
Line Number
Shortcut key: F9
Specifies the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more pipe
elements.
Line numbers carry forward to successive elements on the same pipeline. You only need to
specify data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number or name, do one of the following:
Select <new..> to automatically assign a name. The line number is named Line Number
<x>, where <x> is a sequential number.
Type to manually create a new name.
Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type.
See Line Numbers to:
Open the Line Numbers legend.
Create line numbers for selected pipe elements.
Show and hide pipelines by line number.
Element Name
Specifies the name or identifier of the selected element. Type to create a new name. You can
use Element Name to provide a name more descriptive than from/to node names.
If you use Valve Flange Database and have not previously typed an element name, then the
software creates a name in the format <Rigid Type>_<End Type>_<Class>. You can type a
different name. For more information, see Valve Flange Database.
The element name:
Duplicates when you duplicate the element.
If you have not specified a value for Element Name, then the software defines
Element Name with the value for Rigid Type. No change is made to Element Name when
Rigid Type is Unspecified.
Available Commands
The following commands are available in the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input Dialog.
File Menu
Performs actions associated with opening, closing, and running the job file.
New
Piping Input menu: File > New
Standard toolbar: New
Shortcut key: CTRL+N
Creates a new CAESAR II job.
Controls parameters for creating a new CAESAR II job.
Enter the name for the new job file

Specifies the job name.
Piping Input
Indicates that the job is a piping job. The software only displays this radio button option when
you create a new file from the CAESAR II main window.
Structural Input
Indicates that the job is a structural job. The software only displays this radio button option
when you create a new file from the CAESAR II main window.
Enter the data directory
Specifies the location of the job file. You can type the directory into the field, or click the
browse button to browse to the directory.
Open
Piping Input menu: File > Open
Standard toolbar: Open
Shortcut key: CTRL+O
Opens an existing CAESAR II job.
Open Dialog Box
Open Dialog
Opens existing model files with a standard Windows Open dialog and the following CAESAR
II-specific options:
Preview
Displays a thumbnail graphic of a selected CAESAR II file and the last version of the software
used to save the file.
System
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II System folder.

Examples
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II Examples folder.
Previous Revisions
Displays previously saved revisions of the selected file as <file name><date/time>. Select a
previous revision to open it when you click Open on the dialog.
The previous revision opens as <file name> without <date/time> appended.
Open CADWorx Model

Piping Input menu: File > Open CADWorx Model
Reference CAD Models toolbar: CADWorx Model
Opens an existing CADWorx model.

Save
Piping Input menu: File > Save
Standard toolbar: Save
Shortcut key: CTRL+S
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.
Save As
Piping Input menu: File > Save As
Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Save As Dialog Box
Save As Dialog Box
Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
Lists the files in the selected folder that match the selected file type. You can sort the list by
clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name
Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click a file in
the Name list.
Save as type
Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.

Save as Graphics Image
Piping Input menu: File > Save as Graphics Image
Saves the current CAESAR II job as one of the following file types:
TIFF image file (.tif)
HOOPS streaming file (.hsf)
Windows bitmap (.bmp)
JPEG file (>jpeg or .jpg)
To use images in CAESAR II reports, see Saving an Image for Later Presentation.
Error Check
Piping Input menu: File > Error Check
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Start Run
Shortcut key: CTRL+E
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis. When the
error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. For more
information, see Error Checking.
Archive
Piping Input menu: File > Archive
Input Tools toolbar: Archive
Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to type the
password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without this
password; however, they can be opened and reviewed.
Archive Dialog Box
Archive Dialog Box
Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.
Batch Run
Piping Input menu: File > Batch Run
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Batch Run
Shortcut key: CTRL+R
Error checks the model and then runs static analysis. This process stops only for errors, which
must be resolved for the analysis to run successfully. When you select Batch Run, the
software uses the existing or default static load cases when performing the static analysis.
Print Setup
Piping Input menu: File > Print Setup
Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Print Setup Dialog Box
Print Setup Dialog Box
Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.

Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Print Preview
Piping Input menu: File > Print Preview
Displays a preview of the printed output.
Print
Piping Input menu: File > Print
Standard toolbar: Print
Shortcut key: CTRL+P
Prints the current file. The software prompts you to select the reports to print, prior to printing.
Input Listing Options Dialog Box
Any time an input listing is written to a file or to the printer, the format of each of the reports is
obtained from the .inp file. The .inp files are ASCII text files which can be modified to create
reports of differing styles or content. You can modify the Initial.inp to change the page length
in the report, and the starting and stopping column positions. Any text editor (such as
Notepad) can be used to change any of the .inp files. If you change the .inp file, you may
receive fatal errors during report generation if impossible formats, or if invalid commands are
requested.
For information on editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules.
If you prefer a different (more columnar) form of the basic element data, three additional
formatting files have been provided.
ELEMENT0.INP - Intergraph CAS standard element format
ELEMENT1.INP - 1st alternate element format
ELEMENT2.INP - 2nd alternate element format
ELEMENT3.INP - 3rd alternate element format
To use any of these formatting files, change folders to the CAESAR II\System folder. Then,
copy the formatting file that you want to use into Element.inp.
To print an Input Echo from the input dialog box, click File > Print. To write an Input Echo to
the screen for review, click File > Print Preview.
You can print an input listing from the output module as part of the entire output
report.
Input Listing Options Dialog Box
Controls the options to include in the print job. You can change the report contents by
modifying the input options. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material
properties, boundary conditions, and report formatting are available:
Elements Allowables Units
Material ID Coordinates
Node Names Setup File
Offsets Title
Forces Control Parameters
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave
SIF's and TEE's
Bends
Rigids
Expansion Joints
Reducers
Flanges
Equipment Check
Restraints
Displacements
Hanger
Flexible Nozzles
Select what you want to print, and then click OK.
Recent Piping Files

Piping Input menu: File > Recent Piping Files
Displays a list of most recently opened piping files.
Recent Structural Files

Piping Input menu: File > Recent Structural Files
Displays a list of most recently opened structural files.
Exit
Piping Input menu: File > Exit
Closes the session and the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box. The software prompts
you to save any unsaved changes.
Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.
Cut
Piping Input menu: Edit > Cut
Standard toolbar: Cut
Shortcut key: CTRL+X
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
Copy
Piping Input menu: Edit > Copy
Standard toolbar: Copy
Shortcut key: CTRL+C
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the
previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
Paste
Piping Input menu: Edit > Paste
Standard toolbar: Paste
Shortcut key: CTRL+V
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.
Continue
Piping Input menu: Edit > Continue
Navigation Tools toolbar: Continue
Shortcut key: ALT+C
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if
there is no next element.
Duplicate Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Duplicate Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Duplicate Element
Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly continue building the model.
Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For more information on duplicating
groups of elements in a model, see Block Operations Duplicate.
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
Insert Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Insert Element
Input Tools toolbar: Insert Element
Shortcut key: CTRL+I
Inserts an element.
Insert Element Dialog Box
Insert Element Dialog Box
Controls options for inserting an element.
Before
Inserts a new element prior to the current element. The To node of the new element is then
equal to the From node of the current element.
After
Inserts a new element following the current element. The From node of the new element is
then equal to the To node of the current element.
Delete Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Delete Element
Input Tools toolbar: Delete Element
Shortcut key: CTRL+D
Deletes all selected elements.
You must select the current element to delete the current element. You can also select and
delete other elements without deleting the current element.
Find Node
Piping Input menu: Edit > Find
Plot Tools toolbar: Find Node
Shortcut key: CTRL+F
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you
to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can type the node
numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you define only the From node number, the
software searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you
define only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node
number. When the software locates the element, it highlights the element and fits it in the
view. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the
model.
Find Element Dialog Box
Find Element Dialog Box
Controls parameters for finding elements.
Node Numbers
Specifies the node numbers to search for. Enter a single node number to find the next element
containing that node number (either as a From or To node). Enter two node numbers to find
the next element containing both of those node numbers (in either order).
Zoom to Node if Found
Indicates that the software will display the found node in the active view.
View/Set Coordinates
Piping Input menu: Edit > View/Set Coordinates
Input Tools toolbar: View/Set Coordinates
Coordinates List input right-click menu: View/Set Coordinates
Shortcut key: CTRL+G
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each disconnected pipe
system segment.
This may be required when:
1. You want to show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative, coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontinuous segments must allow the piping
segments to plot in the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.

Global Coordinates Dialog Box
Global Coordinates Dialog Box
Defines the global coordinates for the starting (From) node of a disconnected element.
Node
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the disconnected element. You can change
the node number to another valid node number to reconnect the element. All following
elements move with respect to the new node number.
X Coordinate
Specifies the global X coordinate for the starting node. You can change the coordinate value.
All following elements move with respect to the new coordinate.
Y Coordinate
Specifies the global Y coordinate for the starting node. You can change the coordinate value.
Z Coordinate
Specifies the global Z coordinate for the starting node. You can change the coordinate value.
If the node and any coordinate are both changed, and the changed node is valid, then
the software ignores the coordinate change and moves the disconnected element to the
new node.
After closing the Global Coordinates dialog box, disconnected element rows display in
light green shading on the Coordinates and Elements lists.
Close Loop
Piping Input menu: Edit > Close Loop
Input Tools toolbar: Close Loop
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the model.
Increment
Piping Input menu: Edit > Increment
Input Tools toolbar: Increment node
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto
Node Number Increment.
Set Node Increment Dialog Box
Set Node Increment Dialog Box
Specifies the parameters for setting an increment between nodes.
Node Increment
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Distance
Piping Input menu: Edit > Distance
Input Tools toolbar: Distance
Shortcut key: CTRL+M
Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you select on the
model.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Distance Dialog Box
Measure between two nodes
1. Open a CAESAR II file.
2. Click Home > Input > Piping Input in the main window.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box displays.
3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Click Between Element Nodes to measure distance between two specified nodes.
5. Type the starting and ending node numbers and click Calculate.
The software displays the measured distance in the Delta X, Y, Z boxes at the bottom of
the Distance dialog box, on the measure line in the model, and in the status bar at the
bottom of the window.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side or even minimize the dialog box entirely. Then, as you measure
distances, the results display on the model and in the status bar at the bottom of the
window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open) or close the Distance dialog box.
Measure between the first (origin) node and a selected node on a model
1. Open a CAESAR II file.
2. Click Home > Input > Piping Input in the main window.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box displays.
3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Double-click to select the element.
5. Click Origin and To Nodes.
You must have only one element selected on the model to use Origin and To
Nodes.
The software displays the measured distance from the To node of the element selected to
the origin (first) node in the model.
The distance measurement, including the location of the start and end points, displays in the
Results section of the dialog box and at the bottom of the main CAESAR II window. The delta
DX, DY, DZ boxes at the bottom of the Distance dialog box show the differences of change
along the three axes.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side. Then, as you measure distances, the results display on the model
and in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open),or close the Distance dialog box.
Distance Dialog Box
Allows measurements for finding distances between nodes or specified points on a model.
Choose a measuring method, and then view results for the measurements in the Distance
dialog, at the bottom of the dialog box, and on the model.
Use the Pan and Zoom functions to move around larger models when measuring the
distance between two nodes.
Press SHIFT to confine the measuring line to the x-, y-, or z-axis directions. When you
press SHIFT, the software selects the axis nearest to the cursor location. As the mouse
moves around the model, the software changes the measuring line direction to the
closest axis to the cursor location.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Measure Method
Between Element Nodes
Directs the software to choose the start and end point of an element on the model by
highlighting snap points. Snap points are markers that indicate element node points. The
software uses snap points to highlight a node when the mouse cursor comes within a certain
proximity range of it. Between Element Nodes is selected by default. Clear this option to
measure without using the snapping functionality.
Clear Between Element Nodes when measuring distance in imported graphics models,
such as from CADWorx or Smart 3D. The software cannot snap to nodes on models
created outside of CAESAR II.
Change the shape, size, and color of snap point markers by right-clicking and selecting
Properties > Display Options. Make changes to the Graphic Edit Options > Symbol
Information settings, and then click Apply in the Plot Settings dialog box.
Origin and To Nodes
Calculates the distance between the origin point using the starting node coordinates (0,0,0),
and a selected point on the model.
To and From Nodes
Calculates the distance between two nodes. Type the node numbers in the boxes and click
Calculate (or press ENTER) for the software to perform the distance calculation. The distance
calculated displays in the Results area of the dialog box. To and From Nodes is selected by
default.
Calculate
Calculates the To and From Nodes measurement specified in the Measure Method.
Free Measure
Calculates the distance between two points anywhere in an orthogonal view of the model
(regardless of the node). Free measure lets you measure randomly on a model to get general
estimates of distance.
You should only use Free Measure when you are in a 2D view, such as a front,
back, top, bottom, left-side, or right-side view. Do not use Free Measure in isometric views
(southeast, southwest, northeast, or northwest) or other non-orthogonal views. For precise
measurements in any view, use the Between Element Nodes option.
Results
Displays the results of the distance calculation.
The software also displays the result on the status bar at the bottom of the window. The
results indicate the start and end point and the length measured in the unit of measure
specified for the current model.
The software displays the difference of change along the three axes in the delta (DX, DY, DZ)
boxes.
List
Piping Input menu: Edit > List
List Operations toolbar: List input
List input right-click menu: Choose List
Related commands:
Piping Input menu: Edit > List > Show All Lists
Piping Input menu: Edit > List > Close All Lists
Displays the selected input data, such as for Allowables, Bends, and Elements, in a grid. You
can edit, delete, or modify data in the lists. The list dialog boxes display as a row of tabs at the
bottom of the piping input. These tabs specify the list options that you can access.
When you select a tab, a grid of input data displays. You can access all input data through the
various list dialog boxes.
The following shows an example of an Elements list dialog box.
If you edit input data on a list dialog box, the software also updates values in the Classic
Piping Input dialog box. The software indicates values that carry forward on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box by displaying the value in red if there is a change to the data value. In
the example shown above, the PIPE OD value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the
element From Node 30 to To Node 50. The software displays the first element in the list with
the new value in red. Elements 2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1 automatically. The
value of PIPE OD does not change until you enter a new value for element 4. All elements
below element 4 inherit that value unless a new value is entered.
Right-Click Context Menu
The following commands are available when you right-click an editable cell in a list.
Choose List
Opens and closes a list.
Block Operations > Rotate, Delete, Duplicate, Renumber, Invert, and Change Sequence
Performs global editing operations on the block of selected elements of the piping system.
For more information on the block operations, see Block Operations Toolbar.
Block Operations > Status
Displays the Block Status dialog box, which shows the piping data in the current job and in the
block.
Block Operations > Hide Duplicate Data
On the Elements list only, hides duplicated (grey) fields and displays only black and red fields,
so that you can more easily review changes.
Find/Replace
Displays the Find/Replace dialog box, where you can search and replace data in the selected
column.
Find what - Defines the value to find in the column.
Replace with - Defines the replacement value.
Match whole word only - Limits the search to cells that exactly match the complete value in
Find what.
Find Next - Proceeds to the next matching cell.
Replace - Replaces the value in a matching cell with the value in Replace with.
Replace All - Replaces all matching cells with the value in Replace with.
Close - Closes the Find/Replace dialog box.
Find/Replace is only available for user-defined data.
Find/Replace is not available for row and column headers and columns containing
check boxes.
When you change a cell value, the value carries forward to all subsequent cells in the
column until you define a new cell value.
After selecting a cell, you can also access Find/Replace by using CTRL+F or Edit > Find.
View/Edit Disconnects
Displays the Disconnected Segments dialog box, which specifies the absolute coordinates for
each disconnected pipe system segment. For more information, see View/Set Coordinates.
This option is available in the Coordinates list.
Change Properties
Specifies display properties for the current list on the Display Settings dialog box, including
title, grid line, color, and current cell properties. You can specify different properties for each
list.
Reset Default Properties
Resets display properties for the current list to the default software values.
Zoom In
Increases the text, column, and rows sizes of the grid for the current list.
Zoom Out
Decreases the text, column, and rows sizes of the grid for the current list.
Restore 100%
Restores the text, columns, and rows of the grid to the default sizes.
X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, Z Coordinate
Displays the global X, Y, and Z coordinates of the starting (From) node of an element. These
are read-only values defined in one of the following ways:
The software calculates the global coordinates by cumulatively adding the delta values
(DX, DY, and DZ) from each element. For more information, see Deltas.
You can specify global coordinates for the first node of each disconnected pipe system
segment. For more information, see View/Edit Disconnects.
This coordinate values display in the Coordinates list.
Next Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Next Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Next Element
Shortcut key: PAGE DOWN
Skips to the next element.
Alternate command
Shortcut key: CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Skips to the next element and only displays data that changed from the original element.
Previous Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Prev Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Previous Element
Shortcut key: PAGE UP
Skips to the previous element.
Alternate command
Shortcut key: CTRL+PAGE UP

Skips to the previous element and only displays data that changed from the original element.
First Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > First Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: First Element
Shortcut key: CTRL+HOME
Skips to the first element.
Last Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Last Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Last Element
Shortcut key: CTRL+END
Skips to the last element.
Undo
Piping Input menu: Edit > Undo
Input Tools toolbar: Undo
Shortcut key: CTRL+Z
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z.
You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available
memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo function resets the redo function.
Redo
Piping Input menu: Edit > Redo
Input Tools toolbar: Redo

Shortcut key: CTRL+R
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by the
amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo function resets the undo function.
Edit Static Load Cases
Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box. For more information, see Static
Analysis.
Edit Dynamic Load Cases
Displays the Dynamic Analysis dialog box displaying static load information. For more
information, see Dynamic Analysis.
Review Units
Piping Input menu: Edit > Review Units
Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to
create the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To
change the input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.
Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling, as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.
Break
Piping Input menu: Model > Break
Input Tools toolbar: Break
Shortcut key: CTRL+B
Divides an element into two or more individual elements. This command displays the Break at
element <node> - <node> dialog box.
Break at Element Dialog Box
Break at Element - Dialog Box
Controls options for breaking an element.
A straight run of pipe between two nodes needs to be broken to insert a restraint, or
some other change in properties.
A long straight run of pipe needs to be broken into multiple, uniform lengths of pipe with
similar support conditions on each length. For example, a long straight run of rack
piping, or a buried run with multiple soil supports at each point in the run.
For the Insert Single Node option, the software provides default values for New Node Number
and Distance at the halfway point between the two existing nodes. You can change these
values.
In the example below, nodes 10 and 20 are 12 feet apart. The software sets the default New
Node Number to 15, and the default Distance to 6 feet.
If there was some other node in the model with a restraint (or imposed displacements), like
the one to be put on the newly generated node 15, then the node identifying that restraint
location could be filled in at the line Get Support From Node and the restraint would be
automatically placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node 10 is copied to node 15.
For the Insert Multiple Nodes option, the software defines the Length of each element value
based on the values you specify for Total Number of Break Elements and Node Step.
If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:
Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed
directly when requested at the prompts.
Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of
the individual elements in the run are known.
To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions
in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node
Indicates that only one node is inserted.

Insert Multiple Nodes
Indicates that more than one node is inserted.
Single Node Information
New Node Number
Indicates the node number for the inserted node.
Distance in (in.) from Node <node number>
Specifies the distance from the selected node.
Multiple Node Information
Total Number of Break Elements
Specifies the number of elements to insert.
Node Step
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Length of each element
Displays the length of each element to insert.
Allow Duplicate Node Numbers
Indicates that duplicate node numbers are allowed.
Get Support From Node
Specifies the node from which to copy support information.
Insert Restraints
Piping Input menu: Model > Insert Restraints
Right-click menu: Restraint > Insert Restraint
Related commands:
Right-click menu: Restraint > Delete Restraint
Right-click menu: Restraint > Edit Restraint
Divides the selected element into two elements and places a restraint at the break. This
command displays the Insert Restraint dialog box.
Insert Restraint Dialog Box
Insert Restraint Dialog Box
Controls options for inserting a restraint.
Selected Element Length
Displays the length of the selected element.
Break and Insert at New Node
Breaks the selected element by the defined parameter, creates a new node, and inserts the
restraint at the node. Type a value for the new node number.
Element Midpoint - Breaks the element at its midpoint.
Distance in from Node <node number> - Breaks the element at a distance from the selected
node. Select the node and type a value.
Define restraint properties on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
Insert at Existing
Inserts a restraint at one or both nodes for the element.
From Node - Select to insert the restraint at the starting node.
To Node - Select to insert the restraint at the end node.
Define restraint properties on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
Copy Restraint from Node

Copies the properties from the restraint at the specified node when creating the new restraint.
Properties display in on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box.
OK
Creates the new restraint.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without creating a new restraint.
Valve Flange Database

Piping Input menu: Model > Valve
Input Tools toolbar: Valve Flange Database
Shortcut key: CTRL+V
Provides access to the CADWorx valve and flange databases. This command displays the
Valve and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.
Valve and Flange Database Dialog Box
Add an Element from the Valve Flange Database
1. Type the node numbers for the rigid element in the From and To boxes on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box.
2. Click Valve/Flange on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.
3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.
4. Select where to insert the new element.
Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate
three RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data
from the Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.

If the selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of the
element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing
a table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
If the line size later changes, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform another
table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:
The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights
than those typically available in the GENERIC database.
Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes
the efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files
and specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of
the CADWORX.VHD file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These
specifications are in the CADWORX\SPEC subfolder. For more information on editing
this file, see below.
You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because
the specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which
involves possibly editing the CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described
below.
The CADWORX.VHD ASCII text file is structured as follows:
The first line must read CADWORX.DAT. It must not be changed.
The second line is editable. It must begin with a zero. The second number on the line
designates the number of specifications to make available. It can be a maximum of 7.
The third line is editable. It lists the available specifications. Each specification name
must consist of 8 characters, padded by blanks on the right. The specification names
designate files with extension .SPC, located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR II or
the CADWorx Plant specification folder (if the CADWORX option is set in the registry).
The fourth line is editable. It designates whether each specification uses English or
Metric nominal pipe sizes. Seven blanks followed by a 1 indicate an English nominal,
while seven blanks followed by a 2 indicate a metric nominal.
The last five lines are not editable.
The specification files are in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR installation folder. They are
designated by the extension .SPC. The specification files correlate pipe size and component
with the appropriate data file. Individual lines in the file list the library subfolder to the LIB_I or
LIB_M folder, depending on whether English or Metric units are in effect), file name (with an
extension equal to the library name), range of nominal pipe sizes for which the specified data
file applies. You can edit any of these items. The last item on the line is the component type
number and should not be changed. Other items in the file pertain to CADWorx Plant and are
not significant to CAESAR II.
The data files hold the dimensional and weight values. Data files for different types of
components hold different types of data. The data columns are labeled. The only data with
significance to CAESAR II involves the weight and lengths. You can change these values. The
following is a typical component data file for weld neck flanges:
You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual. For information on editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules.
Valve and Flange Database: Dialog Box
Provides the following databases:
CRANE steel valves and total flange length
GENERIC valves and 2/3 flange length
Corner and Lada valves - no flanges
CADWorx Plant (this is the CAESAR II default)

The CRANE database contains all flanged and welded fittings in the CRANE steel valve
catalog. The GENERIC database contains information from a variety of sources. In some
cases, such as weights for control valves, information from different sources was found to
vary considerably. In these cases, the largest reasonable weight was selected for use in the
database. In other cases, only the length of the fitting was available.
The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database
offers nine different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves,
flange pair, and single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged,
threaded, or socket). Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves
automatically provides for gaskets.
Rigid Type
Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type
Specifies the end type for the fitting.
Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve adds the length and weight of two flanges and
gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the two
mating flanges.
Class
Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element
Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end
Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end
Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends
Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange
Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve-flange
combinations.
Activate Flange Check
Turns on the flange check.
If you use Valve Flange Database and have not previously typed a value for
Element Name, then the software creates a name in the format <Rigid Type>_<End
Type>_<Class>. You can type a different name.
Expansion Joint
Piping Input menu: Model > Expansion Joint
Input Tools toolbar: Expansion Joint Modeler
Shortcut key: CTRL+J

Creates expansion joints and displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and
Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes.
The software displays expansion joints in blue.
Expansion Joint Dialog Box
CAESAR II automatically generates an expansion joint model from catalog data. The catalog
used may be selected in the CAESAR II Configure/Setup routine. You decide where in the
model the expansion joint should go, that is, between which two nodes, and the modeler
assembles the completed joint. Selectable joint styles include Untied, Tied, Hinged, Gimbaled,
Untied-Universal, and Tied Universal expansion joints.
An example selection session is illustrated as follows.
You can select any of four material types. These material types are used to adjust the
bellows stiffnesses to the actual highest temperature in the model. This typically results
in higher stiffnesses than those shown in the vendor's catalog because the stiffnesses
in the catalog may be based on a higher design temperature.
You can select any combination of end types.
Bellows, liner, cover, rod, and hinge or gimbal assembly weights are looked up from the
stored database and automatically included in the expansion joint model.
For universal joints, the minimum allowed length is stored, but when the available space
exceeds the minimum allowed, you are prompted for the length that you want the
expansion joint assembly to occupy.
The last screen that follows shows the "proposed" model before it is inserted into the
CAESAR II input. This allows you to investigate the characteristics of several joints
before settling on one.
Actual maximum pressure ratings are also a part of the database, and in many cases
exceed the nominal pressure rating shown in the catalog. You can use pressures up to
these actual allowed maximums.
Allowed joint movements are also stored as part of the database and are printed with
each proposed model. These values should be recorded for use in checking the model
after a successful design pass has been completed.
Pressure thrust is included in the modeling considerations for each of the expansion
joint styles, removing this concern.
In the case of "tied" expansion joints, rigid elements are used to model the tie-bars.
Restraints with connecting nodes are used to contain the pressure thrust, and to keep
the ends of the expansion joint parallel.
From / To Nodes
Indicates whether the expansion joint assembly should be installed at the From end or the To
end of the current element if the length of the current element exceeds the length of the
expansion joint assembly.
Hinge/Pin Axis
Specifies the direction cosines which define the axis of the hinge pin of the expansion joint
assembly. That is, the axis about which the joint can rotate.
For example, if the hinge can rotate about the X-axis, type:1.0 0.0 0.0
Tie Bar Plane
Specifies the direction cosines corresponding to a line drawn from the mid-point of one tie rod
to the mid-point of the other. If an expansion joint has only two tie rods permitting rotation
about the plane defined by the tie rods, type the direction cosines which, when crossed with
the axis of the expansion joint assembly, define the plane.
In this example, you would enter VX as1.000, VY as -0.000, and VZ as 0.000.
Overall Length
Specifies the length of the universal joint. Alternatively, select the check box to default the
joint length to the shortest recommended length. The length of a universal joint is variable
depending upon the length of the intermediate spool piece.
Expansion Joint Database
Specifies the database to use in the modeler. The current expansion joint vendor provides
multiple databases.
You can change the default expansion joint vendor in Expansion Joints.
Torsional Spring Rates
Type a large value such as 1E10 if the torsional spring rate is unknown. This produces
conservative results. These results are conservative with respect to loads and non-
conservative with respect to displacements. It is very common to rate the bellows allowed
torsion by the amount of rotation that it experiences. Large torsional stiffnesses result in
small, seemingly satisfactory rotations. When results from a piping analysis are
communicated back to the expansion joint manufacturer, it is important to report both the
rotation and the stiffness used to produce that rotation. For more information, see Expansion
Joints.
Expansion Joint Design Notes
It was common practice in the expansion joint industry to design expansion joint bellows and
hardware (restraints) for the system pressure, and pressure thrust only. Generally, no
consideration was given to the system deadweight or thermal forces. This poor practice was
tolerated before the wide-spread use of piping analysis software because:
The deadweight and thermal forces are normally small compared to the pressure and
pressure thrust.
Designers laid out expansion joints so that the thermal forces were very low and
therefore not significant.
The allowable stresses used in hardware designs have a significant safety factor.
The forces and moments generally were not known. Today, when an expansion joint is
modeled, it is recommended that al information relating to the joint be submitted to the
expansion joint manufacturer. This is especially true of the forces and moments resulting
from the operating loads, such as deadweight, thermal forces, and operating deflections.
Better evaluations of the loading conditions on the bellows and hardware simply help the
manufacturer make sure that his design is suited for the intended installation and service.
Modeler Results
Click Build to insert the proposed model of the expansion joint assembly into the piping
system model.
The Bellows Catalog Data (at the bottom of the Expansion Joint Modeler dialog box) shows
the bellows stiffness parameters and allowable movements from the vendor catalog. Note the
allowable movements for later evaluation of the expansion joint.
Expansion Joint Modeler Notes
Expansion joints cannot be inserted on an element that is either already rigid or an expansion
joint. Bends, however, can be at either end of the element where you are inserting the
expansion.
You do not have to give a length on the element where you are inserting the expansion joint.
The six types of expansion joint models supported currently by CAESAR II are:
Untied single bellows
Tied single bellows
Hinged single bellows
Gimbaled single bellows

Untied universal bellows
Tied universal bellows
The four possible joint end types are:
Welded-end
Slip-on flange
Weld neck flange
Plate flange
If the length of the element to receive the expansion joint model is given, then the expansion
joint assembly should fit within this length. If it does not, a warning message displays. If a
universal joint has been requested, the length of the receiving element should be at least long
enough to accept the smallest possible universal length, as defined by the minimum spool
piece size from the manufacturers' database. If the element to receive the universal
expansion joint model is zero, you are prompted for the expansion joint length. If the element
to receive the universal expansion joint model had an original length, then the maximum
possible space available for the universal is reported and you are asked for the length. If the
element to receive any expansion joint is longer than the expansion joint to be inserted, you
are prompted for the end of the element where the joint should be inserted. Overall universal
lengths should be limited to about 10 times the pipe diameter before the center spool piece
weight begins to become a problem.
If there is a bend at either the From or the To end of the element to receive the expansion joint,
then you must define the length of the element.
To find extra nodes needed for the expansion joint model, CAESAR II starts with the element
From node and increments by one until enough nodes not used elsewhere in the model are
encountered. It is these nodes that are reported in the Proposed-model dialog box.
Angular stiffnesses reported are given in the current set of units. Only the translational
stiffness label is found at the top of the bellows stiffness report. If you are unsure about the
rotational stiffness units, they may be seen either in the help screens or in the UNITS report
from the LIST option.
You are prompted to adjust the stiffness for the expansion joint if the highest operating
temperature is given and not equal to the expansion joint catalog design temperature. This
reduces bellows stiffnesses greater than those published in the catalog.
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined and distributed over the
expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model
that are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not
use them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with your
intentions.
Expansion Joint Styles
The following six styles of expansion joints are built automatically by CAESAR II. With each
type is a brief discussion of its use when associated with hot, pressurized equipment
protection.
Untied
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in all
directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for, external
to the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the expansion joint
novice needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. The conditions below make using and
analyzing an untied expansion joint difficult:
Guide restrictions limiting displacements into the joint
Regular maintenance problems because of support hardware away from the bellows
Pressure thrust
Tied
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:
You do not have to design for pressure thrust.

Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field
easier.
There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly to
the rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively complicated
geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.
The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:
They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility to
sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.
The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility that is
unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows
displacement becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as
predicted.
Hinged
Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one axis.
Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often used in
pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very little load
to any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that displacement
into the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be experienced by
the system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism are high,
considerable friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing of the joint.
This transmits larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Gimbal
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These
joints are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions, while
transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.
U-UNIV
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single
unrestrained expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a
much higher capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied
universal expansion joint subjects the system to pressure thrust loads which must be
designed for external to the expansion joint. Even when pressure is negligible, these joints can
often be difficult to use in practice unless proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects
the joint against unwanted movement.
T-UNIV
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the
tied universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust loads
are restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where vertical
pipe runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a single
mode (lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths result in
smaller lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of the
center spool. A good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten times
the pipe diameter. Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar
mechanisms are not designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to
Available Expansion Joint End-Types
The following expansion joint end-types are available in the CAESAR II modeler.
Welded
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.
Slipon
Indicates a slip-on flange.
WN
Indicates a weld neck flange.

Plate
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure
ratings, such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions,
codes, and materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned
that there are no database values for the geometry and line size.
Bellows Application Notes
The following considerations are important when selecting the number of convolutions for an
application.
Movement Capability
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement and
then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After an
analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made using
the expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.
Spring Forces
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.
Available Space
The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a
confined area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.
Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated joints.
The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all bellows in the
database and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against the allowed
pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain applications.
Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic T.I.G.
butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the specific
media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to system
operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to make
specific recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four most
common bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:
304SS—A240 to 304 Stainless Steel
316SS—A240 to 316 Stainless Steel
600Inc—Inco 600 High Nickel
625Inc—Inco 625 High Nickel
Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces
pressure drop and prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are usually
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum and are
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers
catalog for additional information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or
turbulent flow systems. Also, heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage.
Covers are also recommended when the line is insulated.
Title
Piping Input menu: Model > Title
Input Tools toolbar: Title

Shortcut key: CTRL+T
Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with the
problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so on.
These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Control Data

Piping Input menu: Model > Hanger Design Control Data
Input Tools toolbar: Hanger design criteria
Shortcut key: CTRL+H
Specifies global spring hanger design criteria for the model.
Hanger Design Control Data Dialog Box
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box contains data that also displays for each hanger
in your model. The software populates values you specify in this dialog box on the individual
Hangers tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel. However, you can override those values on a
hanger-by-hanger basis.
You can globally specify the following properties:
No. of Hanger Design Operating Load Cases
Calculate Actual Cold Loads
Hanger Table
Multiple Load Case Design Option

For examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see Hangers in
the CAESAR II Application Guide.
No. of Hanger Design Operating Load Cases
Specifies the number of thermal operating load cases to be considered when designing spring
hangers, as defined in Operating Conditions. You can specify a maximum of nine operating
load cases. You should not pick a value that exceeds the number of operating cases defined
in Operating Conditions.
For example, if you want to design some hangers based on operating load case 1 and other
hangers based on operating load case 2, then define No. of Hanger Design Operating Load
Cases as 2.
If the value is more than one, then you must also select Multiple Load Case Design
Option.
Calculate Actual Cold Loads
Indicates that CAESAR II makes one additional pass after the hanger design is completed and
the hangers are installed. The pass determines the actual loads that should be used when the
hangers are first installed and the load flanges adjusted in the field. This calculation tends to
be important in the following situations:
The stiffness of the piping system is small.
The stiffness of the hanger selected is high.
The hanger travel is large. This is usually more important in smaller diameter piping
systems that are spring supported away from equipment nozzles.
Actual cold loads should be calculated when springs in smaller diameter lines are to be
adjusted in the cold position.
Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.

CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from the
selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some instances
and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons. Clear this
check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range spring.
The software assumes that mid-range springs are more standard, readily available, and in
general cheaper than their short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short-range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. Type the
value as a percentage. For example, type twenty five percent as 25.0.
If this value is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table.
This is approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the
hot load is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the
operating displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation is
25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
or as may be more familiar:
For a cold load design, the denominator is Cold Load.
Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
in
mm
cm
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to be
supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined hanger
travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support is selected
instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria
box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases, these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid
rod has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant
effort support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support
from the manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
in
mm
cm
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the Maximum
Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a constant effort
support for a location.
Seismic Wizard
Piping Input menu: Model > Seismic Wizard
Wizards toolbar: Static Seismic Wizard
Selects a seismic code and its associated data.
The wizard computes the applicable g factor and fills in the appropriate data cells. X-
component is set into Vector 1, Y-component is set into Vector 2, and Z-component is set into
Vector 3; all other load components are set to zero.
A warning displays if the current element has uniform loads defined.
Because the wizard sets data in gravitational loading, you must verify other uniform load
definitions for correctness.
Seismic Design Code
Specifies the design code and edition for the current job. You can select ASCE 7-05/IBC 2006,
ASCE 7-10/IBC 2012, ASCE 7-16, CFE Sismo, KHK 2012, NBC 2005, or NBC 2010.
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard
KHK Static Seismic Wizard
NBC Static Seismic Wizard
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard
Computes the static g-factor based on the ASCE 7 or IBC methodology. Select your edition in
Seismic Design Code.
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
Importance Factor I (ASCE)
Specifies the component importance factor from ASCE #7 Section 11.5.1. Type 1.5 for life-
safety components, components containing hazardous material, or components that are
required for continuous operation. Type 1.0 for all others.
Response Factor R (ASCE)
Specifies the component response modification factor, from ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1. The
software provides 3.5 as the default value for piping with joints made by welding or brazing.
Type a value range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1 defines the default value as 12 for piping with joints made by
welding or brazing. However, CAESAR II uses the default value of 3.5 in accordance with B31E
(Standard for Seismic Design), Paragraph 3.1: "When the seismic design force is computed
based on Para.13.3.1 of ASCE7... the parameter Rp shall not exceed 3.5..."
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE)
Specifies the maximum mapped MCE spectral response acceleration at short periods
according to Section 11.4.1, Chapter 22 – Seismic Ground Motion and Long-period Transition
Maps – provide values for Ss.
Site Class (ASCE)
Specifies the site class code. Based on the soil properties, the site is classified as Site Class
A, B, C, D, E, or F according to Chapter 20, Site Classification Procedure for Seismic Design. If
you do not know the soil properties in enough detail to determine the site class, use Site Class
D.
Component Elevation Ratio z/h (ASCE)
Specifies the ratio of height in structure at the point of attachment over the average height of
the supporting structure.
Component Amplification Factor ap (ASCE)
Specifies the component amplification factor from Table 13.6-1. Type 2.5 for distribution
system, such as piping. This term reflects the relationship of the piping response to the
structure response.
Long-Period Transition Period TL
Specifies the time period for a longer-period structure when generating an ASCE 7 Spectrum
Type in Dynamic Analysis. TL is determined from maps provided by ASCE, similar to zone
maps, for all 50 states. ASCE 7-2005 and ASCE 7-2010 reference the maps in section 11.4.5.
ASCE Example
For further information on the Seismic Wizard see the example below and ASCE 7 Wind and
Seismic Load Combinations.
Importance Factor IP = 1
Component Response Modification Factor RP = 3.5, from Table 13.6-1, "Piping in accordance
with ASME B31,"
Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration Ss = 1.552, Mapped MCE Spectral Response
Acceleration at short periods according to Section 11.4.1.
Site Coefficient (Fa) = 1.0 for Site Class D, according to Table 11.4-1.
Maximum Considered Earthquake MCE SMS - The MCE is adjusted for site class effects as
defined in Section 11.4.3,
SMS = Fa SS = 1.552
SDS - Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4.
SDS= 2/3 SMS = 2/3 * 1.552 = 1.0347
The appropriate seismic acceleration is aH
= [ (0.4aPSDS) / ( RP / IP )] ( 1 + 2z/h)
= [(0.4 x 2.5 x 1.0347)/(3.5/1.0)](1 + 2 * 0.5)
= 0.59126
Check limits on aH:
aH <= 1.6 * SDS* IP = 1.6 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 1.65552
aH >= 0.3 * SDS * IP = 0.3 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 0.31041
aH = 0.59126
av = 0.2 SDS= 0.2 * 1.0347 = 0.20694
The software does not include the 0.7 multiplier in the seismic wizard
calculations. Apply the multiplier in the load case definitions.
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard
Computes the static g-factor based on the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual) 1993 methodology.
Seismic Zone (CFE)
Specifies the seismic zone. Zone D is the zone of highest seismic activity. Zone A is the least
active. For more information, review the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual). A map with different regions displays on page 1.3.29.
Structure Group (CFE)
Specifies the structural group as defined in the following table:
Group A High Degree of Safety

Group B Intermediate Degree of Safety
Group C Low Degree of Safety
Soil Type (CFE)
Specifies the soil type as defined in the following table:
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers

I Hard Soil with propagation velocity bo = 700 m/s or
modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m2
Ground deposits with fundamental period of

II Med. Soil vibration and effective velocity of propagation
which meets the condition: bcT5 + b5Tc > bcTc
Ground deposits with fundamental period of

III Soft Soil effective vibration of propagation which
meets the conditions: bcT5 + b5Tc < bcTc
First Mode Period (CFE)
Specifies the period of first natural mode of the piping system in seconds.
Increase Factor (CFE)
Specifies the increase factor. The Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect on
the structure. This value scales up the earthquake loads in a linear (Scalar) fashion. This value
is traditionally 1.118 and should always be greater or equal to 1.0.
CFE Sismo Example
For further information on CFE Sismo, see the example below.
For seismic zone D and soil type I, the following parameters are found in Table 3.1.
a0 = 0.50
C = 0.50
Ta (s) = 0.0
Tb (s) = 0.6
r=½
If T> Tb , then
a = c ( Tb / T)r = 0.50 * (0.6 / 1.15) ^ 0.5 = 0.3612
For a structure group of A – High Safety, the acceleration is multiplied by 1.5
a = 0.3612 * 1.5 = 0.5417
KHK Static Seismic Wizard
Computes the static g-factor based on the High Pressure Gas Safety Institute of Japan (KHK)
methodology.
Seismic Level (KHK)
Specifies the earthquake level factor. Select 1 for a level 1 earthquake or 2 for a level 2
earthquake.
Seismic Zone (KHK)
Specifies the seismic zone, as defined in the following graphic. Select SA, A, B, or C.
Source: Seismic Design Standard for the High Pressure Gas Facilities, MITI Notice No. 515 dated
Oct. 26, 1981. METI Amended Notice No. 250 dated Nov 29, 2013. High Pressure Gas Safety
Institute of Japan (KHK), Seismic Design Guideline for the High Pressure Gas Facilities to the
2012 edition, newest revision Sep 25, 2015.
The zone determines the zoning factor (β2.).

Zone Level 1 Earthquake β2 Level 2 Earthquake β2
SA 1.0 1.0
(special
A)
A 0.8 0.8
B 0.60 0.7
C 0.4 0.7
Soil Profile (KHK)
Specifies the type of soil. Select 1, 2, 3, or 4.
The soil type determines the soil factor (β3.).
Soil
Profile Soil Factor
Value Type of Soil β3
1 Before tertiary deposit ground 1.4
2 Diluvial deposit ground 2.0
3 All types other than 1, 2, and 4 2.0

4 The thickness of soil fill or alluvial 2.0
deposit is 25m or more
Importance Class (KHK)
Specifies the importance class as designated by the type of gas, storage capacity (W), and
distance of the transmission pipe layout (X). Select Ia, I, II, or III.
The importance class determines the importance factor (β1.).
Importance
Importance Factor
Class β1
Ia 1.00
I 0.80
II 0.65
III 0.5
When β1x β1 is less than 0.33, the value of β1 shall be 0.33.

Damping Factor (KHK)
Specifies the damping factor used to determine the modification (or response compensation)
factor.
Natural Period (KHK)
Specifies the natural period of the seismic structure in seconds.
Vertical Response Magnification Factor (KHK)
Specifies the vertical response magnification factor (β6), typically 1.5 for a skirt-supported
tower and 2.0 for other structures.
Horizontal Response Magnification Factor (KHK)
Specifies the horizontal response magnification factor (β5), the product of the standard
response magnification factor and the response compensation factor.
The standard response magnification factor is defined in the following graphics.
For SA and A seismic zones:
Source: Seismic Design Standard for the High Pressure Gas Facilities, MITI Notice No. 515
dated Oct. 26, 1981. METI Amended Notice No. 250 dated Nov 29, 2013. High Pressure Gas
Safety Institute of Japan (KHK), Seismic Design Guideline for the High Pressure Gas Facilities
to the 2012 edition, newest revision Sep 25, 2015.
For B and C seismic zones:

For Seismic Level 2:

When a plastic response is expected for a strong earthquake, the natural period of
the structure may move to a longer period. As a result, the response in a shorter period takes
the maximum (peak) value for each response spectrum.
Height of Supporting Structure (KHK)
The height of the supporting frame (Ht).
Height at Support Point (KHK)
Height at the supporting point of the pipe-supporting structure.
This value is optional if you define the seismic coefficient distribution factor (μ).
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (mu) (KHK)
Specifies the seismic coefficient distribution factor (μ). The minimum value is 1.0.
KHK Example
The seismic wizard computes the g-factors for the three global directions and defines the
uniform load vector on the selected element. The wizard uses the specified height of the
associated support elevation of the element to compute the seismic coefficient distribution
factor (µ). The computed uniform load vector is applied (that is, carried forward) to all
subsequent elements until changed. If the support elevation changes or if the support is a
vessel, you may need to use the wizard multiple times.
KHK Input Data
Seismic Level = 2
Seismic Zone = SA
Soil Profile = 1
Importance Class = Ia
Damping Factor = 0.030000
Natural Period = 0.200000
Vertical Response Magnification Factor (β6) = 2.000000
Horizontal Response Magnification Factor (β8) = 2.000000
Height of Supporting Structure (Ht) = 10.000000
Height at Support Point (H) = 10.000000
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (µ) = 1.200000
Elevation unit label = meters
KHK Output
Earthquake Level Factor = 2.000000
Seismic Importance Factor(β1) = 1.000000
Seismic Zoning Factor (β2) = 1.000000

β1 * β2 = 1.000000
Seismic Soil Factor (β3) = 1.400000
Vertical Response Magnification Factor (β9) = 2.000000
Horizontal Seismic Coefficient (Kh) = 0.420000
Vertical Seismic Coefficient (Kv) = 0.210000
Standard Response Magnification Factor = 3.000000
(Damping) Compensation Modification Factor = 1.180000
Horizontal Response Magnification Factor (β5) = 3.540000
Design Modified Horizontal Seismic Coeff (Kmh) = 1.486800
Design Modified Vertical Seismic Coeff (Kmv) = 0.420000
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (µ) = 1.200000
Design Modified Horizontal g-factor = 3.568320
Design Modified Vertical g-factor = 0.840000
NBC Static Seismic Wizard
Computes the static g-factor based on the NBC 2005 methodology.
Importance Factor IE (NBC)
Specifies the importance factor as defined in Article 4.1.8.5 as defined in the following table:
Importance Category Importance Factor (IE)
Low 0.8
Normal 1.0
High 1.3
Post-disaster 1.5
Site Class (NBC)
Specifies the site classification for the seismic site response from Table 4.1.8.4.A.
Sa(0.2) (NBC)
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
4.1.8.4.(1).
Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn] (NBC)
Specifies the component elevation ratio. The values hx and hn are the height above the base
to level n or x respectively. The base of the structure is the level at which horizontal
earthquake motions are imparted to the structure.
Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC)
Specifies the force amplification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Element or Component Factor [Cp] (NBC)
Specifies the component factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar] (NBC)
Specifies the component response modification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.

NBC Example
For further information on the use of the Static Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IE = 1.0 for a "Normal" category by Table 4.1.8.5.
The Site Class is "C" for "Very dense soil and soft rock" by Table 1.1.8.4.A:
Sa (0.2) = 0.55, spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 s, as defined in Sentence 4.1.8.4.
(1).
According to Table 4.1.8.4.B.,Fa = 1.0:
Sp = Cp Ar Ax / Rp = 1 * 1 * (1 + 2 * 0.5) / 3 = 0.6667
Cp = 1, Ar = 1 and Rp = 3 according to Table 4.1.8.17.
The maximum value of Sp is 4.0 and minimum value of Sp is 0.7, therefore:
Sp = 0.7
aH= 0.3 * Fa Sa (0.2)IE Sp = 0.3 * 1.0 * 0.55 * 1.0 * 0.7 = 0.1155
Optimization Wizard
Piping Input menu: Model > Optimization Wizard
Wizards toolbar: Optimization Wizard
Assists with expansion loop design.

This wizard allows you to specify the element into which the loop should be incorporated, the
loop type, the item to be optimized - nodal stress or restraint load, and the target value to
which the item should be optimized. The optimization routines run the analysis several times
to arrive at an acceptable loop size such that the code stress or restraint load on the target
element is at the specified limit. Besides offering the opportunity to specify various loop
configurations and a selection of height to width ratios, the wizard also provides an option to
allow CAESAR II to select the most economical (based on length of pipe and number of
bends) of those possible.
The Optimization Wizard automatically chooses the most economical loop solution
based on your target input. If there is an issue with the target input or loop sizing, the wizard
prompts you and attempts to insert the most ideal loop possible. However, you can always
revise your target input or loop sizing and re-run the wizard.
To use the optimization wizard, the job must be run at least once so that there is an issue,
such as an overstress, to resolve. These results must be current. The process is illustrated by
the example LOOP-WIZARD.C2, as displayed below.
Reviewing the results of the LOOP-WIZARD job shows that it is suffering an expansion
overstress of 46,741 psi. The allowable value at node 20 is 41,288 psi. This is due to the
expansion of the long run 60-140. A loop should be installed somewhere along that run. The
questions are where, and how big should it be?
Before you start the Loop Optimizer, examine the area of the plant surrounding the piping
system. To do this, import the CADWorx (or AutoCAD) plant model, using the CADWorx Model
command. In this case, import the ...\EXAMPLES\LOOP-WIZARD-PLANT\OVERALL.DWG
model. This model shows that there is a convenient area to place a loop beside element 60-
70.
Select element 60-70 and then click Model > Optimization Wizard start the Loop
Optimization Wizard. The Loop Design Wizard dialog box displays.
Using the Loop Optimization Wizard:
1. Loop 60-70 is already indicated as the element upon which the loop is installed. You can
change this value by selecting a different value from the list, or by selecting other
elements in the model.
2. Click Stress as the optimization type. Optionally, you can optimize restraint load
components as well.
3. Select EXP from the Load Case list. This fills in the element list showing stresses on the
left side of the dialog box.
4. Type 36,000 in the Stress box to define a target maximum stress. This value refines the
element list, so that it displays only those elements with stress levels higher than the
target.
5. Select the Max Stress box to limit the maximum stress in the system to the target value.
6. Select the Loop Type from the available icons. For this example, select the first loop
type.
7. Select <none> from the Height to Width Ratio list to allow the loop height to vary to any
size while keeping the width constant. In this case, the terminal run of pipe is set to one
bend radius with the loop width fixed to the remaining length of element 60-70.
At this point, there are two alternatives to indicating where the loop should be placed.
8. Click Draw Cube to generate a transparent cube anchored on the selected element. You
can adjust the size and location of this cube by using the mouse. Use the corner points
(Pt1 or Pt2) to adjust the major direction of the loop and the available space. Use the
triangle to adjust the minor axis of the loop and the available space. Drag the cube over
the decking adjacent to element 60-70 to build a cube with a Major dimension of 17ft 11
inches in the –X direction.
9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed
of how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.
10. Click Undo to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.
When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.
11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports
an error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element
that is not long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The
best characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe.
When you select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The
default value of 100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent
length of straight pipe. Adjust this value as necessary.
Loop Optimization Wizard Overview
The Loop Optimization Wizard automates the sizing of expansion loops in a piping system.
Optimization Type
Specifies the type of output value to optimize or reduce. You can use the Loop Design Wizard
to improve Stress levels or Restraint load components for any piping loop in a model.
Load Case (for Design)
Specifies the load case for which to reduce an output value. Adding a loop may well solve a
problem in a displacement-driven load case (Operating or Expansion) but not in a force-driven
load case (Sustained or Occasional).
After you select the Load Case value, the software displays Stress or Restraint Load output
values for review and selection.
Target Stress
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
Max. Stress
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
At Node
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be optimized
(along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill in
these entries.
On Element
For Stress Optimization:
Specifies the element on which the node for which the stress level is to be optimized is
located. Double-click one of the entries in the Element/Node/Stress list to automatically fill in
this entry.
For Restraint Load Optimization:
Specifies the restraint load component which is to be optimized. Double-click one of the Load
Component entries in the Restraint Load list to automatically fill in this entry.
Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load Component
Displays the items which you can double-click to automatically fill in the entries designating
the item (either nodal stress or restraint load component) for which the results should be
optimized.
Create Loop on Element
Specifies the element which is replaced by the loop. You can select the element from the list
or from the model. The Loop Optimization Wizard can only be used to substitute loops in
place of single elements.
Loop Type
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.
Type #1
Places the loop at the From end of the original element in the plane of the Major Direction.
Type #2
Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From end of the original element,
first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor Direction.
Type #3
Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane of the Major Direction.
Type #4
Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of the original element, first in
the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor Direction.
Type #5
Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane of the Major Direction.
Type #6
Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of the original element, first in
the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor Direction.
Type # 7
Builds a loop of the same size as the original element.
Type # 8
Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size as the original element,
first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor Direction.
Type #9
Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most economically efficient solution
based on total pipe length and number of bends.
Bend Cost Factor
Specifies the relative cost of a bend relative to straight pipe. This value is used when CAESAR
II is asked to select the most economic loop design. For example, if a bend (including
hardware, fabrication, and other costs) costs 100 times as much as the same length of
straight pipe, then the appropriate value would be 100.0.
Width to Height Ratio
Specifies the loop height to width ratio that should be maintained when building the loop.
Available options are 2.0, 1.0, 0.5, and none.
Select none if the segments of the selected loop configurations still coincide with the original
element run. For example, segment #4 of Loop Type #1, segment #6 of Loop Type #2,
segments #1 and #5 of Loop Type #3, segments #1 and #7 of Loop Type #4, or segment #1
of Loop Types #5 and #6 have a length equal to exactly the length of a long radius bend.
This entry does not apply when you select Loop Types #7 or #8. In this case, the height to
width ratio is not used. The height varies as necessary and the width is held constant to the
length necessary to make up the original element length. This last option is often preferable in
areas where there is limited room for wide loops.
Draw Cube
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard tries
to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.
Major Direction
Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.
Minor Direction
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.
Major Direction Available Space
Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the major direction.
Minor Direction Available Space
Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the minor direction.
Design (Button)
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.
Line Numbers
Piping Input menu: Model > Line Numbers
Organization Tools toolbar: Line Numbers

Displays options for managing line numbers and displaying pipelines by line number.
Line Numbers Legend
Controls options of the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more
pipe elements. You can set options for line numbers on the Classic Piping Input and the
Static Output Processor.
Create (Create from Selection)
Creates a pipe run from the selected elements. You can select elements from the 3D model or
the Line Numbers dialog box. The line number is given the default name Line Number <x>,
where <x> is a sequential number. This option is only available in Classic Piping Input.
Remove (Remove Line Number)
Deletes the selected pipe run line numbers. Elements in the pipeline move to the next line
number up in the sequence. This option is only available in Classic Piping Input.
You can also right-click select Remove Line Number.
Reset (Reset Settings)
Returns settings for all line numbers and their elements to their default values. Use the drop
down to select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or Reset All.
You can also right-click on a line and select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or Reset All
to only reset the selected line number.
Line Number Views
Line number and element rows display in a tree view. Elements are named by their beginning
and ending node numbers. You can create a view using the following methods:
Select a row to change the visibility to 100%. Clear a row to change the visibility to 0%.
When you select or clear a line number, the software also selects or clears all of line
number's elements. You can then select or clear individual elements.
Select or clear Main to change the selection of all line numbers and elements. You can
then select or clear individual line numbers and elements.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers or multiple elements.
Previous (Previous View)
Saves the current view and returns to the previous view. If no view is saved, all rows are
selected.
This option is not available in the Static Output Processor.
Invert (Invert Selection)
Reverses the line number selection to clear the selection of previously-selected rows and to
select the rows not previously selected.
This option is not available in the Static Output Processor.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to pipe run line numbers or
elements that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all line numbers and
elements in the tree view. You can search for a name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers and elements on or off. Clear a line number to reduce
visibility to 0% for the line number and its elements. Clear an element to reduce visibility to 0%
for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, node numbers do not display when the element
opacity is 0%. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers.
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of line numbers and elements. 100% indicates that the element is
opaque. 0% indicates that the element is invisible. Specify the value of a line number to
change opacity for the line number and its elements. Specify the value of an element to
change opacity for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, the node number opacity matches the element
opacity. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers.
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for a line number and its
elements.
Name
Displays the name of line number and elements. Click on a line number to change its name.
Environment Menu
Performs actions associated with miscellaneous items.
Intersection SIF Scratchpad

Piping Input menu: Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes
Input Tools toolbar: Intersection SIF Scratchpad
Displays the Node Selection dialog box, and then the Review Intersection SIF's dialog box.
You can calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersection configurations under
different codes.
Node Selection Dialog Box
Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter intersection Node Number to be reviewed
Specifies the node number where you want to evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK
Displays the Review Intersection SIF's dialog box.
Review Intersection SIFs Dialog Box
Controls options for reviewing intersection SIFs.
The boxes that display in this dialog box depend upon the piping code you select for
the job.
Node
SIFs.
SIFs.
Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
Non-FRP piping codes
Select one of six types of tees and ten types of joints. These elements correspond to 1 to 6
and 7 to 16 in the table Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO
14692)*.
BS 7159 and UKOOA
Select Moulded or Fabricated. A moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or
Extruded (6) welding tee Type. A fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
IGE/TD/12
Select one of 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of tee type with this code,
see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
ISO 14692 2005
Select one of three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3), and Joint (2). Select 1 -
Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for non-qualified tees.
Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints and
fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for
qualified service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, mpst).
ISO 14692 2017
Select 1 - Tee for a SIF of 1.5 or 2 - Other for a SIF of 1.0.
ASME NC and ND piping codes

These codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5),
or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee types, CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
You must define a tee as the appropriate tee in Type for the proper application of in-
plane and out-of-plane SIFs along the tee's local axis. Otherwise, the software assumes the
tee is a pipe and apples SIFs along the pipe's local axis.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement
tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184 and is 2.5 in the
Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets, and
for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the WRC 329
calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted, Ftg
Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
Te/Tb
in
mm
cm
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
Crotch R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this value
can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If you
attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a
smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the
resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
Weld ID
IGE/TD/12
Weld(d)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for butt welds and tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied
for your code.
Fillet
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. The value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See Appendix D of the B31 piping
codes for further clarification. When no value is defined, the software uses zero.
Header OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the header matching pipe.
Header Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Branch OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Branch Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Header SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the header.
Header SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the header.
Branch SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the branch.
Branch SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the branch.
Flexibility Characteristic
Displays the flexibility characteristic. For more information on how wall thickness is used in
the flexibility characteristic (h) equation, see Wall Thickness of Bend.
Branch Section Modulus
Displays the branch section modulus.
Recalculate
Recalculates and displays SIFs, flexibilities, stiffnesses, and other related results after you
change the input data. If you change the input data, CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data
back to the model.
Other Code-Specific Inputs
The following inputs appear only when you select certain piping codes.
Do/r3
Specifies the Do or r3 values for each component type
in
mm
cm
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
T/Th/Tb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
in
mm
cm
Weldolet
Reference.
Drawn/Extruded Tee
in
mm
cm
Weldoflange
Reference.
Te/Tb
in
mm
cm
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
rp/do
Specifies rp or do based on the component type.
in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
r2/rc
Specifies r2 or rc values based on the component type.

in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
r1/Tc/Lh
Specifies r1, Tc, or Lh based on the component type.
in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldoflange
L1/Lb
Specifies L1 or Lb based on the component type.
in
mm
cm
Fabricated Tee
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference.
Weldoflange
Ferric Material for Note 3673.2b-1.3
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed on
the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select ASME NC
and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Bend SIF Scratchpad

Piping Input menu: Environment > Review SIFs at Bend Nodes
Input Tools toolbar: Bend SIF Scratchpad
Displays the Node Selection dialog box, and then the Review Bend SIF's dialog box. You can
calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for bend configurations under different codes.
Node Selection Dialog Box
Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter bend Node Number to be reviewed
Specifies the node number where you want to evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK
Displays the Review Bend SIF's dialog box.
Review Bend SIFs Dialog Box
Controls options for reviewing bend SIFs.
Node
Displays the node number.
Bend Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override this
value or select a value from the list.
in
mm
cm
Long
Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal diameter.
Short
Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe diameter.
3D
5D
Bend Type
Specifies the bend type.

For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges: 1 - Single Flange and 2 -
Double Flange. A bend should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within
two diameters of the bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize. If there are
no flanges on the bend, then do not specify a value for Type.
For BS 7159 or UKOOA codes with fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe, this entry refers to
the material laminate type. The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and
stress intensification factors.
1 - CSM (Chopped Strand Mat)
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
2 - VM & Woven Roving
3 - CSM & Multi-Filament
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
For ISO 14692 2005, only 3 - CSM & Multi-Filament displays.
For ISO 14692 2017, only 1 - Hand Lay displays. For more information, see Hand Lay.Bend
Angle
Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the
inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
in
mm
cm
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the
matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code For Tn For Mean Radius Calculation

B31.8 Ch Fitting Matching Pipe

VIII
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting

(1967)
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe
BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZ N/A N/A

EN
RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting

NORWEGIA Fitting Fitting
N
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Number of Miter Cuts
Specifies the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. The software checks if the value
creates cuts that are closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be widely spaced,
and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be broken down into “n”
single cut widely spaced miters, where “n” is the total number of cuts in the bend. The number
of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and flexibilities
for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter spacing are
related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan θ )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts

Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
θ = Bend Angle / 2.0
Seam Weld
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl box
for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the minimum
wall thickness of the bend element.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.
Matching Pipe OD
Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe. This is used in the average cross-
sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the mean radius of matching pipe.
Matching Pipe Thk

Specifies the match pipe wall thickness. You should not subtract any corrosion. All SIF
calculations are made ignoring corrosion. This wall thickness is used in the mean radius (r2)
calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus
Specifies the elastic modulus among EC, E1 to E9. This value is used for the pressure
stiffening calculations.
Pressure
Specifies the pressures. Select PMax, P1 to P9, PHydro and none. This value is used for the
pressure stiffening calculations.
Bend In-Plane SIF
Displays the SIF under in-plane bending.
Bend Out-of-Plane SIF
Displays the SIF under out-of-plane bending.
In-Plane Flexibility Factor
Displays the flexibility factor under in-plane bending.
Out-of-Plane Flexibility Factor
Displays the flexibility factor under out-of-plane bending.
Pressure Stress Multiplier
Displays the factor by which to increase pressure stresses for a mitered bend. This option
only displays for the ISO-14692 2005 code.
Flexibility Characteristic
Displays the pipe factor.
Recalculate
Recalculates and displays SIFs, flexibilities, stiffnesses, and other related results after you
change the input data. If you change the input data, CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data
back to the model.
DNV Wall Thickness Calculator

Piping Input menu: Environment > DNV Wall Thickness Calculator
Input Tools toolbar: DNV Wall Thickness Calculator
Piping Input window: Allowable Stresses tab > DNV Wall Thickness Calculator
Displays the DNV Wall Thickness Calculator dialog box. You can calculate DNV 2017 (DNVGL-
ST-F101) output for the selected pipe element and estimate required wall thicknesses based
on burst, collapse, and load interaction criteria at defined depths.
The software displays some properties as read-only and pulls the values from the model. You
define other properties to calculate the output. The software saves properties you define in
the DNV Calculator to the model.
The selected element displays in the dialog box title.
Results
Results display on the right side of the calculator as treq and Utility values and Thickness vs.
Depth graphs. When you change a value, the results update.
Wall Thickness Results Load Interaction Results
Burst Operation LCC, comb. a
Burst System Test LCC, comb. b
Collapse DCC, comb. a
Propagation Buckling DCC, comb. b
Graph Results
Min Depth Displayed
Specifies the minimum value for the Depth axis on the calculated Thickness vs. Depth
graphs.
Max Depth Displayed
Specifies the maximum value for the Depth axis on the calculated Thickness vs. Depth
graphs.
Update
Saves changed values to the model and closes the window.
Cancel
Closes the window without saving changes.
Estimate offshore pipe wall thicknesses
The DNV Wall Thickness Calculator, combined with CAESAR II piping analysis, lets you
estimate the necessary wall thicknesses along an offshore pipeline, based on pipeline depth,
pressure conditions, and DNVGL-ST-F101 standards.
Different locations along the pipeline may use different thicknesses based on
water depth and material cost. At each of these transition points, use the DNV Wall Thickness
Calculator to estimate a new, required thickness.
Set up the model
1. Click Home > Input > Piping Input in the CAESAR II main window and design the
pipeline model in the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
2. Assign DNV 2017 as the Code and assign Allowable Stress information.
3. Click Start Run to run error checking. Correct any errors found by the software.
4. Click Edit Static Load Cases .
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor window displays.
5. Create your needed load cases and wave loads.
Use the LMST stress type for combination load cases.

You can import example load cases for empty, water-filled installation, operation,
and hydrotest conditions. The software includes DNV Recommended Load
Cases.xlsx in the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\<version
number>\System folder. Use Import Excel File in the Static Analysis - Load Case
Editor dialog box.
6. Click Save and Cancel to return to Classic Piping Input.
7. Determine element locations along the pipeline to use for estimating wall thicknesses.
Run the DNV Wall Thickness Calculator
1. Select the first element with DNV parameters, and then click DNV Wall Thickness
Calculator .
a. Define global settings for the pipeline on the Global tab.
b. Review piping input and allowable stress properties on the Geometry tab and the
Material tab.
c. Define pressure cases on the Reference Data tab, burst and buckling details on the
Design tab, and load interaction details on the Load Interaction tab.
d. Review results on the right side of the calculator window. Find the results that
indicate the recommended maximum required wall thickness (treq) to use for the
pipeline element.
The results automatically update as you add and change values.
e. Click Update.-8 0v
The software displays a message asking if you want to transfer the maximum wall
thickness to the piping input.
f. Click Yes to change the selected element wall thickness in the model.
The DNV Wall Thickness Calculator closes.
The software changes the value of Wt/Sch in Classic Piping Input to the maximum
value of treq in the calculator.
Check the value of Depth of Pint in Pipe on the Design tab. It must match the
depth defined by the node coordinates on the Coordinates list in Classic
Piping Input.
The wall thickness is a calculated value that may not match a commercial
pipe size. In that case, round up the thickness to the next commercial pipe
size.
2. Repeat step 1 for each of the remaining elements to estimate, changing wall thickness
as required due to water depth and material cost
Analyze the model with calculator results
1. In Classic Piping Input, click Batch Run to check for errors and analyze the model.
When the analysis completes, the Static Output Processor window displays.
2. Create the following reports:
DNV Thickness Overview for design wall thicknesses.
DNV Components for minimum thickness and utility values.
DNV Details for forces and moments.
3. On the DNV Components report, review the minimum thickness and utility values.
If all utility values are less than 1.0, the thickness values are acceptable, and no
refinement of the model is needed.
If a utility value is 1.0 or greater, you must refine the model and continue with the
procedure below.
If a utility value is 1.0 or greater, re-run the calculator and analysis to refine the model
1. Close Static Output Processor and return to Classic Piping Input.
2. For each element, click DNV Wall Thickness Calculator .
a. Add forces and moments from the DNV Details report to the Load Interaction tab.
b. Observe how the new forces and moments affected the required wall thickness
(treq) calculations. If treq calculation results changed from the previous results,
click Update to re-apply the maximum treq value to Wt/Sch in Classic Piping Input.
Do not change values on the Global tab. Changing global values

invalidates previous results. You must re-run the calculator again on previously
calculated elements.
3. Click Batch Run to check for errors and re-analyze the model with the new wall
thicknesses.
4. Recreate the DNV Components report and check that all utility values are less than 1.0.
Global Tab (DNV Wall Thickness Calculator)
Defines global properties that apply to all elements in the model.
The first time you use the DNV Wall Thickness Calculator, type property values on the Global
tab.
Enable Input
Allows you to edit the properties on the Global tab. After you define global properties for the
first element, the properties display as read-only for subsequent elements. When you change
a value and click Update, the software saves the new value to the model.
Any change to global values invalidates previous results. You must rerun the
calculator on previously calculated elements.
Loads
Defines load reference levels. Reference level refers to the height relative to the mean sea level
(MSL) where you measure pressure.
Operation Reference Level
System (Hydro) Test Reference Level
Water-Filled Installation Reference Level
Minimum Sustained Reference Level
Minimum Sustained Pressure

Minimum Sustained Density
Design
Defines design criteria.
Gamma_inc
Maximum High Tide
Minimum Low Tide
Load Interaction
Specifies the use of minimum sustained pressure.
Operation Reference Level
Specifies the reference level for operational pressure.
ft
mm
System (Hydro) Test Reference Level
Specifies the reference level for system test pressure.
ft
mm
Water-Filled Installation Reference Level
Specifies the reference level for water-filled installation pressure.
ft
mm
Minimum Sustained Reference Level
Specifies the reference level for minimum sustained pressure.
ft
mm
Specifies the minimum sustained pressure remaining in the pipe.
lb/in²
Bar
KPa
MPa
Minimum Sustained Density
Specifies the minimum sustained pressure density.

lb/in3
kg/cm3
kg/dm3
kg/m3
Gamma_inc
Specifies the incidental pressure used to design pressure ratio, ginc. The value of Gamma_inc
must be 1 or greater.
Incidental pressures occur during secondary operations connected with normal operations
and are based on the pipeline control and safety system tolerances.
Maximum High Tide
Specifies the maximum level of high tide.
ft
mm
Minimum Low Tide
Specifies the minimum level of low tide.
ft
mm
Specifies when to use the minimum sustained pressure in buckling calculations.
Collapse
Uses the minimum sustained pressure in collapse calculations for local buckling.
Propagation Buckling
Uses the minimum sustained pressure in propagation buckling calculations.
Specifies the use of minimum sustained pressure in the load-controlled condition (LCC)
calculations or displacement-controlled condition (DCC) calculations.
Geometry Tab (DNV Calculator)
Displays geometric properties of the pipe.
Piping Input
Properties defined in the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Diameter
Wt/Sch
t:Fab (-Mill Tol)
Corrosion
Ovality
Piping Code/Allowable
Properties defined by the piping code.
Alpha:gw
Material Tab (DNV Calculator)
Displays material properties of the pipe.
Temperature Case
Temperature
Material
SMYS
SMTS
SY
UTS
Elastic Modulus
Poisson's Ratio
Alpha:h
Alpha:fab
Supplementary Requirement
Material with Luder Plateau
Temperature Case
Specifies a temperature case. For more information, see Temperatures.
Temperature
Specifies the temperature for the selected Temperature Case. For more information, see
Temperatures.
ºF
ºC
SY
Displays the yield strength value, Sy, for the selected Temperature Case. For more
information, see SY1, SY2, ... SY9.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
UTS
Displays the ultimate tensile strength value, Sut, for the selected Temperature Case. For more
information, see UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9.
lb/in2
KPa
N/mm²
Elastic Modulus
Displays the modulus of elasticity for the selected Temperature Case. For more information,
see Elastic Properties.
lb/in²
N/mm²
KPa
Poisson's Ratio
Displays Poisson's Ratio, u, for the selected Material. For more information, see Elastic
Properties.
Reference Data Tab (DNV Calculator)
Displays pressure, reference level, and density for:
Operation, System (Hydro) Test, and Water-Filled Installation conditions.
Minimum Sustained pressure.
Pressure Case
Specifies the pressure case as P1 to P9, PMax, or PHydro.
Pressure
Displays the pressure for the selected Pressure Case.
Reference Level
Displays the height relative to the mean sea level (MSL) where you measure pressure for the
selected Pressure Case.
Density
Displays the density for the selected Pressure Case.
Design Tab (DNV Calculator)
Defines design criteria for the DNV 2017 piping code.
Depth of Point in Pipe
Burst - Operation
Burst - Test
Collapse
Corroded
Derated
Min Sust Pressure
Gamma_inc
Density of Sea Water
Max High Tide
Min Low Tide
Depth of Point in Pipe
Specifies the depth of a point on the submerged pipe used for calculations.
ft
mm
Density of Sea Water
Displays the density of sea water as defined by the software, 1024.16 kg/cm3.
lb/in3
kg/cm3
kg/dm3
kg/m3
Corroded
Specifies the use of corroded thickness in the calculations. Corroded thickness is the design
thickness of the pipe minus Corrosion.
Derated
Specifies the use temperature-derated yield and tensile strengths in the calculation.
Select Derated to use the values of SY and UTS for the selected Temperature Case shown on
the Material tab.
Clear Derated to use the values of SMYS and SMTS shown on the Material tab.
Load Interaction Tab (DNV Calculator)
Defines load related properties for the selected pipe element.
Local Buckling - Combined Loading Criteria
Specifies loading for local buckling.
Gamma:c
Condition
Load Controlled Condition (LCC)
Specifies loading for the load-controlled condition. The software includes the values in
calculations on the Output tab when you select Load Controlled Condition (LCC).
Axial Force
Bending Moment
LCC - Safety Class
Corroded
Derated
Point Load
Min Sust Pressure
Displacement Controlled Condition (DCC)
Specifies loading for the displacement-controlled condition. The software includes the values
in calculations on the Output tab when you select Displacement Controlled Condition (LCC).
Compressive Strain
DCC - Safety Class
Corroded
Derated
Point Load
Min Sust Pressure
Bending Moment
Specifies the bending moments to use for calculations.
in•lb
Nm
Functional
The bending moment due to the pipe system and its intended use.
Environmental
The bending moment due to loads on the pipe system from the surrounding environment.
Axial Force
Specifies the axial loads to use for calculations.

lb
Functional
The axial force due to the pipe system and its intended use.
Environmental
The axial force due to loads on the pipe system from the surrounding environment.
Compressive Strain
Specifies the longitudinal compressive strain (due to applied displacements and internal over-
pressure) to use for calculations.
in/in
mm/mm
cm/cm
Functional
The compressive strain due to the pipe system and its intended use.
Environmental
The compressive strain due to loads on the pipe system from the surrounding environment.
Point Load
Specifies the inclusion of the point load R in the calculations.

Burst Operation
Displays the calculated values for treq and Utility based on the safety class defined for Burst -
Operation.
treq
The required minimum thickness.
in
mm
cm
Utility
Specifies the utilization base on the wall thickness, defined as the ratio of the amount of wall
thickness used to contain the pressure divided by the actual wall thickness of the pipe
(LSd/RRd). The value must be less than 1.0 for proper utilization.
Burst System Test
Displays the calculated values for treq and Utility based on the safety class defined for Burst -
Test.
treq
in
mm
cm
Utility
Collapse
Displays the calculated values for treq and Utilities based on the safety class defined for
Collapse.
treq
in
mm
cm
Utility
Displays the calculated values for treq and Utility based on the safety class defined for
Propagation Buckling.
treq
in
mm
cm
Utility
LCC, comb. a
Displays the calculated values for treq and Utility based on LCC - Safety Class and the limit
effect factor combination a (system check) for the ultimate limit state (ULS).
treq
in
mm
cm
Utility
LCC, comb. b
Displays the calculated values for treq and Utility based on LCC - Safety Class and the limit
effect factor combination b (local check) for the ultimate limit state (ULS).
treq

in
mm
cm
Utility
DCC, comb. a
Displays the calculated values for treq and Utility based on DCC - Safety Class and the limit
effect factor combination a (system check) for the ultimate limit state (ULS).
treq
in
mm
cm
Utility
DCC, comb. b
Displays the calculated values for treq and Utility based on DCC - Safety Class and the limit
effect factor combination b (local check) for the ultimate limit state (ULS).
treq
in
mm
cm
Utility
B31.8 Buckling Calculator (Para. 833.10)

Piping Input menu: Environment > B31.8 Buckling Calculator
Input Tools toolbar: B31.8 Buckling Calculator
Displays the B31.8 Buckling Calculator dialog box. You can calculate the strain value to
determine buckling and lateral instability values for a pipe element according to B31.8-2018
paragraph 833.10, Bucking and Lateral Instability.
From and To nodes for the element display in the window title.
Input
The following properties are read-only. The software uses values defined in the model.
Diameter
Wt/Sch
Ambient Elastic Modulus
Ambient SY
You must type values for the following properties:
Max Internal Design Pressure (Pi)

Min External Hydrostatic Pressure (Po)
Results
Critical Buckling Strain (Epsilon_cf)
Defines ecfcrit, the maximum longitudinal compressive strain allowed to prevent local buckling
due to force-controlled loading.
Error Message
Describes errors in the calculations.
Calculate
Calculates strain and stress results based on the defined properties.
Save & Exit
Saves all property values and results, and then closes the calculator.
Exit
Closes the calculator without saving defined properties or results.
Special Execution Parameters

Piping Input menu: Environment > Special Execution Parameters
Input Tools toolbar: Special execution options
Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box. The software globally sets the
parameters for the model.
Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion Joints
Indicates whether forces are printed on rigid elements and expansion joints. Forces and
moments are not normally printed for these elements because the forces that act on these
elements can usually be read directly from the forces that act on the adjacent pipe elements.
Select this option to cause forces and moments to be calculated and printed for all rigid
elements and expansion joints in the system.
Print Alphas and Pipe Properties
Indicates whether the software prints alphas and pipe properties. CAESAR II prints the
thermal expansion coefficients along with the pipe, insulation, fluid, and refractory weights in
the error checker. This report can be very useful during error checking to help identify possible
problems in the temperature or weight input specifications. Rigid elements and expansion
joints are treated the same as straight pipe. Rigid weights and insulation cladding factors are
not reflected in this table.
Activate Bourdon Effects
Specifies the Bourdon effects option to use. Choose the option from the drop list to activate
the Bourdon pressure effect. The Bourdon pressure effect causes straight pipes to elongate,
or displace along their axes, and causes curved pipes or bends to elongate along the line that
connects the bends near and far nodes. If the Bourdon effect is not activated, there are no
global displacements due to pressure.
New Job Bourdon Pressure in the Configuration Editor sets the use of Bourdon effects
for new jobs, but has no effect on an existing job. Activate Bourdon Effects sets the
Bourdon effects for existing jobs.
The Bourdon effect is always considered for FRP pipe, regardless of the setting of the
Activate Bourdon Effects option.
By default, CAESAR II does not include the Bourdon effect in the analysis of steel piping
systems. That is, there are no displacements of the system due to pressure.
As an option, you can include pressure displacement effects. These effects can be
appreciable in long runs of pipe or in high pressure, large diameter bends adjacent to sensitive
equipment.
Bourdon effects are almost always important in fiberglass reinforced plastic piping systems.
For this reason, the Bourdon (Translational) is automatically turned on for all FRP pipe runs
and bends.
Two Bourdon options are available:

Use the Translation only option when the elbows in the system are forged or welded
fittings and can reasonably be assumed to have a circular cross section.
Use the Translational & Rotational option when the bends in the system are fabricated
by the hot or cold bending of straight pipe. In these cases, the slight residual ovalization
of the bend cross-section, after bending, causes the bend to try to straighten out when
pressurized. Fixed end moments are associated with this opening. These fixed end
moments do not exist when the original shape of the bend cross-section is circular.
Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts
Specifies how branch error and coordinate prompts display. You are prompted for two pieces
of information:
The loop closure tolerance.
The global coordinates of the first point of the piping system and each following piece
of the piping system that is not connected to the first.
This data is needed the first time CAESAR II prepares a global geometry calculation. This
calculation is made on three different occasions:
Before preprocessor plots are generated.
Before global coordinate reports are built.
Before error checking is performed.
Alternatively, you can select Edit > Global and specify the global coordinates to avoid any
prompting.
There are several major uses for this flag:
Set the loop closure tolerance.
Define the elevation of the piping system for wind/wave load calculations.
Give the proper east-west or north-south coordinates for dimension checks.
Move parts of the system around in the plotted output for visual checking.
Whenever you create a physical loop in the piping system, there are at least two different sets
of dimensions between the same points. If the two dimensions are not within a certain
tolerance of each other, a fatal error occurs. You can set this tolerance interactively or in the
configuration file. Select Both for the Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts option to cause
CAESAR II to interactively prompt for this tolerance.
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature
Specifies the temperature differential which exists between the top of the pipe and the bottom
of the pipe. This differential is used to compute an elemental load. It is added to each
temperature case for horizontal pipes.
ºF
ºC
This entry is computed from the equation:
dT = Ttop - Tbottom
For example, consider a horizontal pipe where the temperature on the top is 20 degrees hotter
than the temperature on the bottom. The proper value to type in this box is 20, not -20.
Liberal Stress Allowable
Indicates use of a liberal stress allowable. Conservative formulation of the allowable

expansion stress range for many codes in CAESAR II is calculated from:
f (1.25Sc + .25Sh)
When you select this option, the difference between Sh and Sl, provided Sh > Sl, is added to the
term inside the parenthesis. That is:
SA(Liberal) = f[1.25Sc + .25Sh + (Sh - Sl)]
The liberal expression is only used when there is at least one sustained stress case in the load
set. If there is more than one sustained stress case in a single problem, then the largest of Sl,
considering all sustained cases for any single element end, is chosen to subtract from Sh.
Because the sustained stress varies from one pipe to another, the allowable expansion stress
also varies.
By default, CAESAR II uses the New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable setting in the
Configuration Editor in its computation of the expansion stress allowable. New models are
created using this configuration setting.
Uniform Load in Gs
Specifies whether to use a magnifier of gravitational loading for the uniform load. Uniform
load in G's is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
When you select this option, in G’s is the default foreach uniform load vector on the Uniform
Loads tab of the Piping Input auxiliary panel. You can override this option by selecting the in
F/L option. For more information, see Uniform Loads.
Uniform load can be defined either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier
of gravitational loading.
Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed by the
CAESAR II recommended load case logic. You must form your own combination cases
at the output processor level that represent the algebraic sum of the stresses due to
sustained and occasional loads. For more information, see Occasional Load Factor.
Uniform load can be defined either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a
magnifier of gravitational loading.
Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements in
the system is 70°F/21°C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero expansion
strain state, then type the actual value in this box.
ºF
ºC
The ambient temperature is used in conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the
interpolated expansion coefficient to calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length
experienced by the element when going from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information,
see New Job Ambient Temperature. The software uses this configuration file value to set the
ambient temperature when you create a new model.
FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x 1,000,000)
Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient. The coefficient is used in conjunction with the
temperatures on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for each plastic pipe element to calculate
the thermal strain (linear thermal expansion) for the element.
in/in/ºF x 1.0E6
mm/mm/ºC x 1.0E6
cm/cm/ºC x 1.0E6
The default thermal expansion coefficient for fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe is 12.0E-6
in./in./deg.F (21.6E-6 mm./mm./deg.C). If you have a more suitable value for this composite,
type that value without the implied exponent of 10-6 (E-6). For example, if the value is 8.5E-6,
then type 8.5.
This method does not provide for any variation in the thermal expansion coefficient as a
function of temperature. This may not be accurate if parts of the system are at different non-
ambient temperatures. In this case, you can always calculate the thermal strain at
temperature in units of length-per-length (such as in/in or mm/mm) and then type this value
into the Temperature box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
FRP Ratio of Shear Modulus/Emod Axial
Specifies the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity in the axial direction of
the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. For example, if the material modulus-of-elasticity (axial)
is 3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, type 0.25 as the ratio of these two.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
FRP Laminate Type
Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass
reinforced plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.
Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that the Z axis is vertical. Traditionally CAESAR II has used a coordinate system
where the Y-axis coincides with the vertical axis. In one alternative coordinate system, the Z-
axis represents the vertical axis (with the X axis chosen arbitrarily, and the Y-axis being
defined according to the right-hand rule. CAESAR II now gives you the ability to model using
either coordinate system. You can also switch between the systems in most cases.
You can specify that CAESAR II start with the Z axis vertical. For more information, see New
Job Z-Axis Vertical.
A new piping model determines its axis orientation based on the setting in the
Configure/Setup module. An existing piping model uses the same axis orientation under
which it was last saved. You can change the axis orientation from Y-Axis to Z-Axis vertical by
clicking the check box on the Environment-Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis
orientation. That is, Y-values become Z-values or the reverse. There is no change in the model;
only the representation changes.
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system into
the other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need
not match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (such as wind and wave loads), the Static
Output Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is dictated
by the orientation of the model input file.
Set North Direction
Specifies the plant north direction mapping. Select -X, +X, -Z, or +Z. The default value is -Z.
Set North Direction is useful when you do not use the default CAESAR II mapping.
DNV Mill Tolerance Measure
Specifies the display of mill tolerance for DNV 2017 (DNVGL-ST-F101). Select Percent or
Thickness.
All other codes always display mill tolerance as a percentage.
Bandwidth Optimizer Options
Orders the set of piping system equations for both static and dynamic analyses. The default
settings combine ordering efficiency and speed for most piping systems (systems having
greater than 100 nodes or that are highly interconnected).
Optimizer Method
Select Both, Collins, or Cuthill-McKee. The default value is Both.
Next Node Selection

Select Decreasing or Increasing. The default value is Decreasing.
Final Ordering
Select Not reversed or Reversed. The default value is Reversed.
Collins Ordering
Select # of coefficients or Band. The default value is Band.
Degree Determination
Select Band or Connections. The default value is Connections.
User Control
Select Allow user re-looping or None. The default value is None.
If you set User Control to Allow User Re-looping, the software allows you to
interactively try as many different combinations of switch settings as needed. When you find
the most efficient ordering, you can continue to the analysis. This interactive prompting for
optimization parameters is done in the analysis level processing.
Include Piping Input Files

Piping Input menu: Environment > Include Piping Input Files
Import Model toolbar: Include piping files
Includes other piping models in the current piping job. Piping models added may have a node
offset applied and can optionally be rotated about the vertical axis before being added.
Include Piping Files Dialog
File Name
Defines a file to include in the current job. You can type the file name if it is in the same folder
as the current piping model file or click Browse to find a file located in any folder.
The software maintains the file location relative to the current job folder. This is
important to remember if you archive or move the current job file.
Read Now?
Specifies whether the file is read immediately. Type Y or N.
The software reads the file and embeds the file as part of the current job. You can edit the file
as part of the current job.
The software reads the file and references it to the current job only for plotting and processing
during error checking. The included file may not be edited as part of the current job.
RotY
Specifies the angle about the vertical axis to rotate the model before including it in the current
job.
You can also Rotate the model or individual elements from the List or the graphic
view.
Inc
Specifies the increment to add to all nodes in the model before including it in the current job.
Add
Adds the file in the File Name field to the list of files to include.
Replace
Replaces the selected file on the list with the file in the File Name field. Use Replace to change
Read Now?, RotY, and Inc values for a file already on the list.
Delete
Deletes the selected file from the list.
Browse
Displays a standard Windows Open dialog, where you can select a piping model file to include
in the current piping model.
OK
Closes the dialog and process files on the list. When Read Now? is Y, the file is included in the
model and removed from the Include Piping Files dialog list. When Read Now? is N, the file
remains on the list and awaits plotting and error checking of the current job.
Cancel
Closes the dialog and cancels all additions and changes made to the list.
Include Structural Input Files

Piping Input menu: Environment > Include Structural Input Files
Import Model toolbar: Include structural files
Includes an existing structural model into the current piping job. The structural model must
have been built and successfully error checked in the Structural Steel Modeler. You can
include the names of up to 20 different structural models. The software plots and analyzes
included structural models with the piping model.
Piping systems are usually tied to structural steel models by using restraints with connecting
nodes. There must not be node number conflicts between structural and piping models. After
you define a restraint with a connecting node between the pipe and structure, CAESAR II
knows where to place the structure in the resulting preprocessor plot. If no connection
between the pipe and the structure is given, the structure is plotted starting from the origin of
the piping system. In this case, the resulting plot may not meet your expectations.
Include Structural Files Dialog
File Name
Defines a file to include in the current job. You can type the file name if it is in the same folder
as the current piping model file or click Browse to find a file located in any folder.
The software maintains the file location relative to the current job folder. This is
important to remember if you archive or move the current job file.
Add
Adds the file in the File Name field to the list of files to include.
Replace
Replaces the selected file on the list with the file in the File Name field.
Delete
Deletes the selected file from the list.
Browse
Displays a standard Windows Open dialog, where you can select a structural model file to
include in the current piping job.
OK
Closes the dialog and process files on the list. The files remain on the list. You can remove the
structural files from the current job by removing them from the list.
Cancel
Closes the dialog and cancels all additions and changes made to the list.
Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

Piping Input menu: Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF)
Import Model toolbar: APCF
Displays the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box and imports piping component files
(.pcf) into the CAESAR II piping environment. A .pcf is a flat text file containing detailed
information about the piping system components. The information is extracted from a CAD
system.
The .pcf format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. You
can obtain details on the format and its capabilities from Alias.
APCF contains all functionality of the Import PCF external interface with a more
customizable interface that allows you to:
Create a new model or add elements to an existing model.
Control element sequencing.
Define and control node numbering.
Incrementally build and verify the model by creating as many .pcf files as needed.
Selectively update an existing CAESAR II model.
Use the block operations modeling tools to assist modeling changes. For more
information, see Block Operations Toolbar.
A CAESAR II model constructed from .pcf files uses the units of the current model and
automatically attaches/intersects the piping generated from the .pcf to the existing piping, if
appropriate.
Selecting Files
After selecting files using Choose Files, you can select all .pcf files to convert at the same
time or select them in smaller groupings to convert incrementally. The software only
processes selected files. Drag files to arrange them in the needed order.
Conversion Options
Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.
Condense options
Miscellaneous options
CAESAR II element properties
Options apply to all files selected when you click Begin Processing. If you select groups of
files to convert incrementally, you can set different conversion options for each group.
Supports, restraints, and boundary conditions (such as equipment connections) transfer from
the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. You can change the thermal displacements.
For information on mapping parameters used during the conversion, see PCF Mapping.
Node Numbering and Element Sequencing
Define the Start Node as 0 when you want numbering for a file to start with the next available
number defined by the value of Increment.
You can also use a Start Node other than 0 or change the value of the node number
Increment for specific files. In the following example, the selected files represent vent
branches with starting nodes defined for each branch.
Before (first group processed):

After (vent branches in second group processed):
Define the default start node and increment values in the Configuration Editor dialog
box. For more information, see Configuration Editor.
Rounding of Converted Values
After you perform multiple conversions, some values, such as delta coordinates,
temperatures, and pressures, may contain values calculated to many decimal places.
The software automatically rounds these entries to the nearest integer when you close the
Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box.
Do not close the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box until all .pcf files have
been imported. The software determines connectivity between piping based upon sharing
global coordinates. If element delta coordinates are rounded, then nodal global coordinates
may change enough to fall outside of the connection tolerances.
PCF Mapping
Opens the PCF Mapping dialog box, where you define .pcf mapping for the software. With this
utility, you can:
Change the mapping of PCF keywords to CAESAR II attributes.
Change the keyword names.
Add new keywords.
Create new attributes, such as cladding thickness, cladding density, and additional
temperatures and pressures.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping before beginning the
import process.
Save
Saves the mapping to the PCF_MAP.XML file in the System folder.
Open System Folder
Opens the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\11.00\System folder. From here, you

can open other .pcf mapping files in a text editor to manually change mapping.
PCF Unit Mapping
PCF Material Mapping
PCF Restraint Mapping
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping
Reset Mappings
Changes the mapping template. Select Stress ISO or Super PCF. Stress ISO is the default
value.
Full Text Search
Searches the CAESAR II Attribute and PCF Keyword columns.
Stress ISO Mapping
Defines custom attributes in the component-attribute<n> format supported by Intergraph

Smart 3D.
CAESAR II Attribute PCF Keyword
Pressure 1 (design pressure) COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1
Temperature 1 (maximum temperature) COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2
Material COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3
Wall Thickness (reducing thickness in the case of COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4

reducing components)
Insulation Thickness COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5
Insulation Density COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6
Corrosion Allowance COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7
Fluid Density COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9
Hydro Test Pressure COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10

Line Number PIPELINE-REFERENCE
Super PCF Mapping
CAESAR II Attribute PCF Keyword
Pressure 1 DESIGN-PRESSURE
Pressure 2 ALT-DESIGN-PRESSURE
Pressure 3 OPERATING-PRESSURE
Temperature 1 DESIGN-TEMPERATURE
Temperature 2 ALT-DESIGN-TEMPERATURE
Temperature 3 OPERATING-TEMPERATURE
Insulation Thickness INSULATION-THICKNESS
Fluid Density SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
Hydro Test Pressure TEST-PRESSURE
Line Number PIPELINE-REFERENCE
Units
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg.
If the unit label chosen (such as barg) is not one of the labels recognized by the software, as
defined through Utilities > Tools > Create/Review Units on the main window ribbon, then you
must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in the System folder. For more
information, see Create/Review Units and PCF Unit Mapping.
For Material Number, the selected material is applied to a piping element as the
default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not specified or
recognized.
PCF Unit Mapping
The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit - Displays the internal unit used by the software
PCF Unit - Displays the user-supplied unit label
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF - Displays the conversion factor used to convert the
user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
must be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file, as defined by Utilities > Tools >
Create/Review Units on the main window ribbon.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for
the attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the
configuration options (except that temperature from C° to F° will also add the 32 °).
To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File
Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.
PCF Material Mapping
The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II

material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software
searches the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match"
tries to do an intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so
forth) for the material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard CAESAR
II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the Material > Edit… menu must be
mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File
This file is in the CAESAR II System folder.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. Modify any of the materials definitions.
3. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping
The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
CAESAR II uses the SUPPORT mapping component to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. If the software is unable to match a SUPPORT with a <SUPPORT_NAME>
keyword in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file, only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute is interpreted
by the software. The SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST,
WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
Support configurations can vary from project-to-project. In order to fine-tune the configuration
CAESAR II uses with an imported model for a given SUPPORT component, you need to map
an attribute to the <SUPPORT_NAME> keyword in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
The following example displays a typical SUPPORT component. The attribute definition
(VG100) for the NAME attribute is highlighted and should be used to define CAESAR II
support mapping.
Remember that, as your support configuration changes, you can customize this mapping file
to ensure proper import into the software.
To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File
Locate the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the attribute customization options or restraint definitions.
Defining PCF Keywords
In the Keyword Mapping Section, define an attribute from your PCF file to associate with the
following CAESAR II keywords:
<SUPPORT_NAME>
<SUPPORT_TAG>
<SUPPORT_GUID>
The CAESAR II keywords located within "<>" are used in the PCF import process. The
<SUPPORT_NAME> keyword is used by CAESAR II to map the supports. The <SUPPORT_TAG>
and <SUPPORT_GUID> keywords are support properties that are imported into CAESAR II.
Defining Support Mapping
In the Support Mapping Section, define the support mapping.
In the following example file, VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
+Vertical support (weight support)
Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).
The syntax for each support type is:
<Support Name> <N>
<Restraint Function> <MU=> <GAP=>

When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.
<Support Name>
CAESAR II attempts to match the <Support Name> with the attribute definition from your PCF
mapping file. Any attribute definition in the PCF file that contains the <Support Name> is
considered a match (it does not have to be an exact match). For example, if the <Support
Name> is VG1, an attribute definition such as VG100 would be considered a match.
For optimal results, list the <Support Names> in the order from longest name to
shortest name. Otherwise, if you have both VG1 and VG100 as <Support Names>, the
software reads VG1 as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N>
Specifies the number of CAESAR II restraints to be placed in the corresponding Restraint

auxiliary panel in the Piping Input. CAESAR II allows up to six restraints on any element.
<Restraint Function>
Specifies the purpose/type of restraint (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and so forth.), Global Axes (VERT, NS,
EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (a, b, c, and so forth):
ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR
Creates a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint, Variable Hanger, or Constant Hanger,
respectively. The variable and constant attributes create to-be-designed hangers, which may
end up as either variable or constant hangers.
VERT, EW, NS
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the compass points of the global axes
(Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the Z-up setting). See the
figure below. Create one-way restraints by prefixing the attribute with "+" or "-".
A, B, C
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the local axes of the support/pipe
installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to the "direction"
attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A and B axes. As with
the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with + or -. See the figure
below.
<MU=>
Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint. (This
keyword is not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR.)
<GAP=>
Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (This
keyword is not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR.)
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the END-

CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger
This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II. Note
that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads and allow upward movement.
They are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base,
most stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two
supports is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first
definition (VERT). If the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or
horizontally), use the second definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support
direction. This assumes that the installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the
direction from the main steel towards the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction
coefficient is included as well.
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the
restraint may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the
direction of the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it
represents the direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible

that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as
lateral to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A
corresponds to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint
along the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to
the direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along
the support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping
The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE
or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress Intensification Factor settings
of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS - PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is used within the
general component group.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE - Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as shown
in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS - (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the
applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Ii=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component. This is a
multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)
Io=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component. This is
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (SKEY 01HG). In this case, these are
typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The PCF menu
command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not found in
this file, you should add it.
To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File
Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.

This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the
PCF menu command.
1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.
Choose Files
Selects .pcf files to convert. The files then display in the top pane of the dialog box.
Begin Processing
Processes the selected .pcf files using the selected conversion options.
If you select multiple groups of files to convert, you can set different conversion options for
each group.
Save Warnings
Saves status messages to a file other than the default file of CAESAR II file name>.LOG.rtf.
During the conversion process, the status messages display in the message area in the lower
right hand pan
Import a piping model from a PCF using APCF
1. Click APCF on the Import Model toolbar or click Environment > Advanced PCF Import
(APCF) on the Piping Input menu.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
2. Click Choose Files.
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select one or more PCFs and click Open.
The selected file(s) display in the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box.
Multiple files typically represent different sections of a model or individual pipe
runs.
To remove a PCF, select the file and press Delete.
4. Type the Start Node and Increment value for each of the files.
5. For each file, change any of the conversion options in the lower left-hand pane as
needed.
Condense Rigids
Condense Tees
Condense Elbows
Use Pipe Materials Only
Combine PCF Files
Set North Direction
Diameter Limit
Length for Nodal Increment
Material Number
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness
6. If you opened more than one file and only want to import part of the model, select the
files to import.
You can import the other files after reviewing the first import.
7. To initiate the import, click Begin Processing.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the lower right-hand pane.
After processing completes, the imported model displays in the Classic Piping Input dialog
box and the graphic view.
The software saves status messages to a log file with the name <CAESAR II file
name>.LOG.rtf. The log file is saved in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
8. View your new CAESAR II input model in the Classic Piping Input graphic view. If needed,
resize the view to see the model.
For example, the software imports the below model from the sample file 1001-P-Input.pcf:
Click Undo on the Input Tools toolbar to remove the imported elements.
9. If you have additional PCFs to import, select the files, change any conversion options as
needed, clear the selection of the previously imported files, and click Begin Processing.
10. Save the model.
11. Close the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box after importing all files.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the
renumbering of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node
to zero.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to
(change of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so
forth).
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Tees
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements
but instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the
three elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather,
it is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.

Use Pipe Materials Only
Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF COMPONENT-
ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding
piping material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based
the available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material
substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for
the Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be
applied but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.
Combine PCF Files
Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Set North Direction
Specifies the plant north direction mapping so that the Intergraph Smart 3D® PCF model
north direction aligns with the CAESAR II global axis. Select -X, +X, -Z, or +Z. The default value
is -Z.
You can import a model via PCF, and then set the north direction to map from a model N-S, E-
W system used in isometrics to the XYZ coordinate system used in CAESAR II. The mapping
updates the orientation as the model rotates and exports the mapping to the CAESAR II
Access format.
Software such as SmartPlant® Interop Publisher (SPIOP) and CAESAR II ISOGEN can import
the Access data and properly orient the model.
Set North Direction is useful when you do not use the default CAESAR II mapping.
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
The default value is 2 inches in English units.
Length for Nodal Increment
Increases node increments for pipe lengths greater than the specified value. This option
allows you to set the nodal increment for imported PCF files based on pipe length, which
means you can specify a larger buffer of node numbers for longer pipe lengths. This feature is
helpful when creating intermediate nodes and elements to place supports.
in
mm
cm
Type a value to activate this option. The software divides the length of each piping element by
the value entered in Length for Nodal Increment (The answer is rounded to the next whole
number). The software multiplies that quotient by the value in the Increment field for the
specified PCF file. The result is the node increment for that element.
For example, if you do not enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment the software numbers
all the nodes according to the value in the Increment column.
If you enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment, the software performs the procedure listed
above to determine the nodal increment for each element. In the following example, if you
enter 15 in Length for Nodal Increment and a piping element is 7.875 feet (94.5 inches), the
software divides 94.5 by 15 and gets 6.3. Because the software rounds the quotient to the
next whole number, 6.3 is rounded to 7. So, if the value in the Increment column is 10, the
software multiplies 10 by 7, which results in a nodal increment of 70, as shown below.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).

Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness
Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe
cannot be determined from the PCF.
CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration
Editor.
Show Informational Messages

Piping Input menu: Environment > Show Informational Messages
Displays informational messages upon the conversion of nominal to actual diameters,

schedule to wall thickness, and specific gravity to density. Click Environment > Show
Informational Messages.
Clear the check box to suppress these messages.
Reset View on Refresh

Piping Input menu: Environment > Reset View on Refresh
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset View
Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When this option is
turned on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.
Global Menu
Performs actions associated with commands you can perform on a group of elements, such
as the block operations (Rotate, Invert, and so forth).
Rotate
Piping Input menu: Global > Rotate
Block Operations toolbar: Rotate
List right-click menu: Block Operations > Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle
about the X, Y, or Z axis. For more information, see Performing Block Operations.
Unskew
Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup
Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,

force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The
default is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees
Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Add Bends
Specifies that the software includes bends in the block rotation.
Duplicate
Piping Input menu: Global >Duplicate
Block Operations toolbar: Duplicate

List right-click menu: Block Operations > Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog . You can make identical copies of the block. You can also
make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes. Mirror
imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not
mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.
Setup
Restraints, displacements, forces/moments, uniform loads, nozzles, flanges, and element

characteristics can be individually included or excluded from the duplication.
After the type of duplication is determined, you must decide the following:
Where in the Elements List to put the duplicated group of elements, either at the end of the
current block, the end of the input file, or after a specific element in the model.
What node increments to add to the nodes in the block so that they define unique pipe
elements. Be sure this increment is large enough to avoid any duplication of node numbers.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations.
Delete
Piping Input menu: Global > Delete
Block Operations toolbar: Delete
List right-click menu: Block Operations > Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.
Nodes
Piping Input menu: Global > Nodes
Block Operations toolbar: Renumber
Rearranges the node numbers in the block.
You can use this command to clean up part or all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put
the entire model in one block and do a full renumber of all nodes.
To renumber the node numbers in a block
Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly careful
when renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with
CNodes.
1. Select the block of nodes you want to renumber from the 3D Graphics pane or in the
Elements dialog box.
2. Click Renumber in the Block Operations toolbar.
The Block Renumber dialog box displays.
3. Select whether you want the software to increment or renumber the block nodes.
Select Increment to change all node numbers in the block. The change (+ or -) is
specified as the Node Increment. For example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25
and 670 in a block, and you select Increment and specify a Node Increment of
100, the software changes the node numbering in the block to 110, 130, 700, 125
and 770, respectively.
Select Renumber to enable the Start Node box and renumber the selected block of
nodes from the Start Node number by the Node Increment that you specify. For
example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25, and 670 in a block, and you select
Renumber and specify a Start Node of 100 and a Node Increment of 10, the
software changes the node block numbering to 100, 110, 120, 130, and 140,
respectively.
Be aware that the Start Node and Node Increment values may introduce node
numbers used elsewhere in the model.
4. Select Renumber Matching Nodes Outside to renumber the same nodes outside of the
selected block.
CAESAR II renumbers the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected
block, and the model remains connected in the same way as it was before the renumber.
The boundary nodes include the From and To nodes of the elements connected to the
selected block, plus the nodes of the auxiliary data block that are connected to the
selected block.
The software renumbers every node in the selected block on the model.
If you clear Renumber Matching Nodes Outside, the software does not apply the
increment or renumber action to restraints, displacements and branch
connections in the selected block of nodes.
CAESAR II does not typically renumber a CNode in a block, because the CNode is
connected to a node outside the block. The software does not renumber CNodes if
they do not connect to a node in the block and on the piping system.
To avoid any confusion when renumbering nodes, start the renumbering at a node
greater than the largest node in the model. If all nodes renumber successfully (that is, there
are not any dangling CNodes), then you can specify a Node Increment with a negative
increment to shift the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.
Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However, CAESAR II can
only perform the renumber operation for the first block, with respect to the element list. In this
case, CAESAR II displays a message box with information about the block that is to be
renumbered. You can then continue to renumber the second block and so on until all blocks
are renumbered.
Invert
Piping Input menu: Global > Invert
Block Operations toolbar: Invert
Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements

dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
Why use the Invert command?
The Invert command can be very helpful when you have imported a new piping input model
from an external source, such as a Piping Component File (PCF), and you want to re-assign
node numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a tee, invert it to run
from the tee to the termination.
To invert a block of elements
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) you want to invert, either from the Elements dialog
box or from the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers dialog box.
If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the
3D Graphics panel.
If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in
the Elements dialog box.
2. Click the Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The delta dimensions (DX, DY, DZ) of the elements are reversed. In most cases, the node
sequence (From and To nodes) remains the same, but the order and direction of the
elements are reversed.
Notice that only the node numbers are changed in the 3D Graphics pane.
3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new delta dimension assignments.
For example:
Change Sequence
Piping Input menu: Global > Change Sequence
Block Operations toolbar: Change Sequence
Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry.
Why use the Change Sequence command?
Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during the input
process. The order in the list is important because when you specify an input value for an
element in the list, that value propagates to all the elements in the list following it UNTIL the
value is explicitly changed.
When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input design
software such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one sequence.
However, that sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may want all the high-
pressure elements to be listed together. This reduces the number of unique input fields to
verify and can help you to logically organize the model. You can re-organize elements in a way
so that those with similar carry-forward properties are placed consecutively.
To change the sequence of elements
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) whose sequence you want to change, either from
the Elements dialog box, from the 3D Graphics pane, or from Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Click Change Sequence in the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternately, you can right-click in the Elements dialog box, and then click Block
Operations > Change Sequence.
The Change Sequence dialog box displays.
3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.
To move the selected block after a given element, click Follow.
To move the selected block before a given element, click Precede.
The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.
4. From the Elements dialog box, position the cursor in the line where you want the
selected block to be placed. Alternatively, you can select elements in the 3D Graphics
pane and then click on the element where you want to move them.
The selected block of elements displays in the new order.
The 3D graphics model does not change. This command only affects the
Elements dialog box display contents. Remember that this command provides you with
the capability of organizing "like" types of elements together.
To re-store the order of the Elements dialog box to the original list, use
the Undo button.
Options Menu
Performs actions associated with the display of the model.
Range
Piping Input menu: Options > Range
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Range
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Range
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Range
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+U
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need to
locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use
of the Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that
are visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the
predefined displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model
may not highlight correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Range Dialog Box
Range Dialog Box
Controls options for manipulating ranges.
Show only
Specifies the items to show.
From
Specifies the node number for the start of the range.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the range.
At These Elements
All elements that exist in the model are displayed. This list indicates which elements are
included in the range. Clear the check box for elements that you do not want to include.
Add
Adds an item to the At These Elements list.
Reverse Selection
Clears all check boxes that were selected in the At These Elements list and selects all check
boxes that were cleared.
Select All
Selects all check boxes in the At These Elements list.
Clear All
Clears all check boxes in the At These Elements list.

Restraints
Piping Input menu: Options > Restraints
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Restraints
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Restraints
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Supports
Shortcut keys: CTRL+ALT+R
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the restraints and
whether the software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Restraints is turned on the software displays:
A directional arrow for a restraint.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for rotational
restraints, such as RX, RY, or RZ.
To graphically display restraint gaps, use the Restraint legend. For more
information, see Legends Toolbar and Using Legends to Check Your Model.
Anchors
Piping Input menu: Options > Anchors
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Anchors
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Anchors
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Anchors
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+A
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your
model, as well as whether the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Displacements
Piping Input menu: Options > Displacements
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Displacements
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Displacements
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Displacement
Shortcut key: CTRL+SHIFT+D
Turns the display of displacements on or off. This option also controls the display of
displacements on CNode restraints.
When Displacements is turned on, the software displays:
A directional arrow for the resultant linear displacement vector.

A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for the resultant
rotational displacement vector.
A pair of shorter directional arrows for Fixed linear displacement. (Disp. Value = 0)
A pair of shorter directional arrows with curved arrows for Fixed rotational
displacement.
A directional arrow with a sphere at the top for non-fixed displacement which indicates
hidden fixed vectors.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) with a sphere at the
top for the resultant rotational non-fixed displacement which indicates hidden fixed
vectors.
On the toolbar, you can also specify:
The arrow size - Largest, Larger, Medium, Smaller, or Smallest.
Whether to hide or show fixed displacements - Show Fixed.
The vector to display - Vector1, Vector2, and so on.
Hover the cursor over displacement arrows to see the displacement values for the displayed
vector:
Where a restraint has a CNode with displacement, the displacements are displayed with
values displayed with the Node number:
You can change the default arrow color in the Graphics Settings of the Configuration
Editor or by using Plot Properties . For more information, see Displacements and Display
Options Toolbar .
Hangers
Piping Input menu: Options > Hangers
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Hangers
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Hangers
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Hangers
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+H

Turns the display of hangers and cans on or off.
This is a graphical representation of the number of hangers at the location, not of the
hanger installation.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the hangers and
whether the software displays hangers with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Hangers is turned on, the software displays:
A single hanger at the location of the hanger.
A single can at the location of the can.
Multiple hangers or cans at a single location as separate symbols.

Nozzle Flexibility
Piping Input menu: Options > Nozzle Flexibility
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzles
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Nozzles
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzles
Displays the nozzles for which you want to specify stiffnesses.
Flange Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Flange Check
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Flanges
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Flange Check

Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Flanges
Displays the flange nodes that the software evaluates.
Nozzle Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Nozzle Check
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzle Limits
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Nozzle Check
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzle Limits
Displays the nozzles in which you want to set a check.
Forces
Piping Input menu: Options > Forces
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Forces
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Forces
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Forces/Moments
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+F
Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
When Forces are turned on, the software displays:
A directional arrow for a force.

A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for a moment.
You can also specify:
The arrow size - Largest, Larger, Medium, Smaller, or Smallest.
The vector to display - Vector1, Vector2, and so on.
You can change the default arrow colors in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Forces/Moments 1 and Forces/Moments 2.
Uniform Loads
Piping Input menu: Options > Uniform Loads
Piping Input Legends toolbar: Uniform Loads
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Uniform Loads
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Forces/Moments
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout
the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
Piping Input menu: Options > Wind/Wave
Legends toolbar: Wind/Wave
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Wind/Wave
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to see
the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Axis
Piping Input menu: Options > Axis
Plot Tools toolbar: Axis
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Axis
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Axis
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+P
Turns the display of the coordinate system on or off. You can select the following options (in
Classic Piping Input and Static Output Processor):
Axis Planes
Displays planes with the coordinate system axes.

Axis
Displays the coordinate system axes.
Off
Turns off axis display.
The software sets the default value from the value of Axis Mode in the Configuration
Editor.
North Arrow
Displays a north arrow with the coordinate system. The North arrow indicates the North
orientation of the plant.
The software sets the default value from the value of North Direction in the
Node Numbers
Piping Input menu: Options > Node Numbers
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Node Numbers
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Node Numbers
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Node Numbers
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+N
Turns the display of node numbers on or off.

When node numbers are turned on, the software always displays the number in front of the
pipe:
You can also click and select Node Display Options to control the node number display:
Filters
Show All
Displays all node numbers or names.
Anchors
Displays anchor node numbers or names.
Hangers
Displays hanger node numbers or names.
Restraints
Displays restraint node numbers or names.
Format
Show Tags
Displays support tags, hanger tags, and element names.
Number Only
Displays node numbers if they are assigned. Node names do not display.
Name Only
Displays node names if they are assigned. Node numbers do not display.
The following formats display node name and node number:
Number (Name)
Name (Number)
Number - Name
Name - Number
Filter and Format Combinations
You must select a format in combination with the Show All, Anchors, Hangers, or Restraints
filters.
You can customize node number, node name, and tag display by combining options, such as:
All + Show Tags displays all node numbers, names, and tags.
Anchors + Show Tags displays anchor node numbers, names, and tags.
All + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not display.
Hangers + Names Only displays hanger node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
All + Show Tags + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
In cases where a node contains multiple values, a tag overrides a node name, and a
node name overrides a node number.
Length
Piping Input menu: Options > Length
Plot Tools toolbar: Lengths
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Length

Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Lengths
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+L
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Tees
Piping Input menu: Options > Tees
Plot Tools toolbar: Tees
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Tees
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Tees
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+T
Displays where you have specified tees or SIFs on the model.
Expansion Joints & Rigids

Piping Input menu: Options > Expansion Joints
Plot Tools toolbar: Expansion Joints & Rigids
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Expansion Joints
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: Expansion Joints
Emphasizes the display of elements such as restraints, anchors, displacements, and

expansion joints by changing pipe element display to lines.
Diameters
Piping Input menu: Options > Diameters
Legends toolbar: Diameters
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Diameters
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Diameters
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+D
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been
made. Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs and update diameter settings.
Wall Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Wall Thicknesses
Legends toolbar: Wall Thicknesses
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Wall Thicknesses

Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Wall Thicknesses
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+W
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Corrosion
Piping Input menu: Options > Corrosion
Legends toolbar: Corrosion
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Corrosion
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
A color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes
Piping Input menu: Options > Piping Codes
Legends toolbar: Piping Codes
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Piping Codes
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Materials
Piping Input menu: Options > Material
Legends toolbar: Materials
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Material
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Materials
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+M
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can
Pipe Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Pipe Density
Legends toolbar: Pipe Density
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Pipe Density
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the
pipe density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Fluid Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Fluid Density
Legends toolbar: Fluid Density
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Fluid Density
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the
fluid density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
-Mill Tolerance (%)

Piping Input menu: Options > -Mill Tolerance (%)
Legends toolbar: -Mill Tolerance (%)
Updates the model to show each mill tolerance percentage in a different color. Use this option
to see the mill tolerance variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the mill tolerances defined in the model. You can change the
The Mill Tolerance legend does not display the positive mill tolerance used with the
IGE/TD/12 code.
Refractory Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Thickness
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the
Refractory Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Density
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
Insulation Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Thickness
Legends toolbar: Insulation
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Insulation Thickness
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Insulation
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+I
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Density
Legends toolbar: Insulation Density
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Insulation Density
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
Cladding Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Thickness
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the
Cladding Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Density
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Piping Input menu: Options > Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use
this option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You
can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Temperatures
Piping Input menu: Options > Temperatures > T1 ...T9
Piping Input Legends toolbar: Show Temps > T1 ...T9
Static Output Processor menu: Plot Options > Temperatures > T1 ...T9
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Show Temps > T1 ...T9
Shortcut keys:
CTRL+1 - Show Temperature 1

Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined. You can define up to nine
temperature parameters.
Pressures
Piping Input menu: Options > Pressures
Piping Input Legends toolbar: Show Pressures
Static Output Processor menu: PlotOptions > Pressures
Static Output Processor Legends toolbar: Show Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.
Toolbars
Piping Input menu: View > Toolbars > <toolbar name>
All toolbars: Right-click > <toolbar name>
Displays or hides the toolbars. Select a toolbar to toggle the toolbar on and off.
Customize Toolbars
You can drag a toolbar to change the location. You can dock a toolbar on any side of the
window, or the toolbar can float above the window.
You can customize command locations by pressing ALT-SHIFT and dragging a command
button to a new position.
To further customize toolbars, commands, key assignments, and menus, right-click a toolbar,
and then select Customize to open the Customize dialog box.
Customize Dialog Box
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box,
contains the following functions.
New - Starts a new piping job. The software

opens the New Job Name Specification
dialog box.
You can also click File > New on the

main window ribbon.
Open - Opens a different piping input job. You

are prompted for the file to open.
Save - Saves the selected piping input job.

You are prompted for the file name.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its

current location and places a copy on the
Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data
and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste - Places a copy of the Clipboard

contents in the specified location
Print - Prints the selected piping input job.
Standard Operators Toolbar
The Standard Operators toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog or
the 3D model, contains the following functions.
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator.
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the

view.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification

of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while
holding the mouse button, stretch a box
diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element

in the view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate

the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the
left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and
move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to
update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the
User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see
Configuring 3D Graphics. During rotation, the
model may in centerline mode, or some of the
geometry details may disappear or become
distorted. This is to improve the display
speed. The actual conversion depends on the
size and complexity of the model. After the
rotation is complete, the model returns to its
original state.
Orbit Vertical- Rotates the model on the

vertical axis only.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to

a hand. Move the cursor while holding down
the left mouse button. You can also pan the
view while another command is active by
holding the center mouse button (or wheel)
down while moving the mouse. This provides
the panning effects of riding the elevator
up/down or stepping to either side.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the

magnification of the model. Move the cursor
up or down holding the left mouse button.
Release the mouse button to stop the zoom.
Alternatively, press + and - to zoom in and
out. You can change the zoom level of the
model while in another command by rotating
the mouse wheel.
Walkthrough - Explores the model with a
setup similar to a virtual reality application.
This command produces the effect of walking
towards the model. For more information, see
Walking Through the Model.
Select Element - Select a single element in

the model. Hover over an element in the
model to display information about that
element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or
remove elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in

the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection
by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by
pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded

3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model

as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information
items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire

frame. Restraints and other element
Silhouette - Displays the model as a
silhouette, or a two-line plot. Restraints and
other element information items display.
Translucent Objects - Displays the model as

translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other
element information items display. You can
select Translucent Objects with any of the
other display options (Shaded View, Hidden
Line Wire Frame, Wire Frame, Silhouette,
Center Line View). Select a different type of
operator to deactivate Translucent Objects.
Center Line View - Displays model data in

single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other
element information items display. Display
the volume or double line plot by clicking the
corresponding button. Press V to switch
among the views in the following order:
Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line
Mode / Center Line View.
Standard Views Toolbar
The Standard Views toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Front - Displays the model from the front.

Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back.

Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top.
Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom.

Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left.

Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right.

Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model

isometrically from the southeast.
Alternatively, press F10.
Display Options Toolbar
The Display Options toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Plot Properties - Opens the Plot Settings

dialog box where you can adjust properties
for the current model.
You can also open the Plot Settings

dialog box by right-clicking in the graphic view
and selecting Properties > Display Options
.
Perspective - Displays the model in

perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in
orthographic mode.
Markups Toolbar
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box,
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model.

Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the

model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model.

Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the

model. The annotation may be especially
useful in the output processor. The
annotation text box is a single line.
Annotation is printed and saved to the
bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description

to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend
the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with
the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is
printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation
is not saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot
be changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. The software removes these graphics from view with any action such as
zoom, rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Home >
Setup > Configure on the main window ribbon. For more information, see Configuring 3D
Graphics.
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator. (For example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Cutting Planes Toolbar
The Cutting Planes toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane

for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In
many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of
this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more
details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the

handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or
the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the
cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the

three axes.
Plot Tools Toolbar
The Plot Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
Restraints - Turns the display of restraints on

or off in the current model. For more
information, see Restraints.
Anchors - Turns the display of anchors on or

off in the current model. For more
information, see Anchors.
Hangers - Turns the display of hangers on or

information, see Hangers.
Displacements - Turns the display of

displacements on or off in the current model.
For more information, see Displacements.
Forces - Turns the display of forces and

moments on or off in the current model. For
more information, see Forces.
Nozzles - Turns the display of nozzle
flexibility on or off in the current model. For
more information, see Nozzle Flexibility.
Flanges - Turns the display of flanges on or

information, see Flange Check.
Nozzle Limits - Turns nozzle checking on or

off in the current model. You can also specify
the size the nozzle limit that displays on the
model by clicking the arrow on the icon and
choosing a size. For more information, see
Nozzle Check.
Expansion Joints & Rigids - Turns the display

of expansion joints or rigid elements on or off
in the current model.
Tees - Turns the display of Tees on or off in

the current model.
Compass - Turns the display of the

orientation compass on or off in the current
model. The compass indicates the X, Y and Z
axis direction of the model.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node

numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You
can display node numbers for a specific
element such as only restraints or only
anchors by selecting the down arrow from the
Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools
toolbar in piping input. Select Names Only
from the options to display only the node
names on the model, and not the node
numbers.
Lengths - Turns the display of element

lengths on or off on the model. Alternatively,
press L.
Range - Displays only the elements that

contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a
group of related elements in a large model.
This command displays the Range dialog
box. Alternatively, press U. For more
information, see Range.
Find Node - Displays a specific element in the

view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To
nodes for which you want to search. For more
information, see Find Node.
Legends Toolbar
The Legends toolbar lets you quickly view legends for areas of the model input. Review the
model specifications for the legend function and make any changes, if necessary. You can
access the toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D model.
Check your model with legends
Materials - Opens the Materials legend, where

you can make changes to the color display
settings for materials on the model.
Piping Codes - Opens the Piping Codes
legend, where you can view and make
changes to the color display settings for
piping codes on the model.
Insulation - Opens the Insulation legend,

where you can view and make changes to the
color display settings for insulation on the
model.
Diameter - Opens the Pipe Diameters legend,

where you can view pipe diameter
dimensions and make changes to the color
display settings for pipes on the model.
Wall Thickness - Opens the Wall Thickness

legend, where you can view wall thickness
dimensions and make changes to the color
display settings for wall thicknesses on the
model.
-Mill Tolerance (%) - Opens the -Mill

Tolerance (%) legend where you can view mill
tolerance percentages and make changes to
the color display settings for the mill
tolerance on the model.
Forces - Opens the Forces/Moments legend,
where you can view the forces and moments
applied to each node and make changes to
the color display settings for forces and
moments on the model. Click the arrow
buttons at the top of the legend to scroll
through the various forces and moments.
Uniform Loads - Opens the Uniform Loads

legend, where you can view the uniform loads
applied to each node and make changes to
the color display settings for uniform loads
on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the
top of the legend to scroll through the various
uniform loads.
Wind/Wave - Opens the Wind/Wave Loads

legend, where you can view the wind or wave
loads applied to each node and make
changes to the color display settings for
loads on the model. Click the arrow buttons
at the top of the legend to scroll through the
various wind or wave loads.
Show Temps - Opens the Temperatures

legend, where you can view the temperatures
of model elements and make changes to the
color display settings for temperatures.
Show Pressures - Opens the Pressures

legend, where you can view the pressures on
model elements and make changes to the
color display settings for pressures.
Corrosion - Opens the Corrosion legend,
where you can view the elements that have
corrosion specified and make changes to the
color display settings for showing corrosion.
Pipe Density - Opens the Pipe Density legend,

where you can view the elements with pipe
density specified and make changes to the
color display settings for showing pipe
density.
Fluid Density - Opens the Fluid Density

legend, where you can view the elements with
fluid density specified and make changes to
the color display settings for showing fluid
density.
Insulation Density - Opens the Insulation

Density legend, where you can view the
elements with insulation density specified
and make changes to the color display
settings for showing insulation density.
Restraint - Opens the Restraint legend, where

you can view and edit restraint gaps and
make changes to the color display settings
for showing restraint gaps.
Check your model with legends
Legends allow you to easily review model specifications for a specific legend function and
make changes to your model, if necessary.
Examples are for the Restraint legend.
Perform the following tasks on a legend using the procedures below.
Open and close a legend
To open a legend or close an open legend, click the appropriate icon in the Legends Toolbar.
Edit a legend value
1. Double-click the cell containing the value you wish to edit.
A new Edit row displays containing the value.
2. Select the cell containing the value in the Edit row and edit the field to contain the new
value.
3. Press Enter.
The software saves the new value and the Edit row closes. The software also updates
values associated with the legend color.
Change the legend color
1. Select the row for the value for whose color you wish to change.
2. Select ...
The Colors dialog box displays.
3. Use the Standard tab to select a predefined color. Select the Custom tab to define a
color using the RGB color model.
4. Click OK.
The software saves the color. The software also updates graphics associated with the
legend color.
Edit Mode Toolbar
The Edit Mode toolbar lets you move selected elements on the model. You can access this
toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
following functions.
Move Geometry - Moves selected elements

to a new location in the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Moves selected

elements along the x-axis on the model. This
is the default value.
Move Geometry {Y-Axis) - Moves selected

elements along the y -axis on the model.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Moves selected
elements along the z-axis on the model.
For more information, see Moving Elements.
CAESAR II Tools Toolbar
The CAESAR II Tools toolbar contains common functions to the CAESAR II software. You can
access this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar
CAESAR II Configuration - Contains

instructions specifying how CAESAR II
performs an analysis. Each time that you
open the software, it searches for this
configuration file in the current data directory
and uses it to perform the analysis. For more
information, see Configuration Editor.
Start/Run (Error Checker) - Sends the model

through interactive error checking. This is the
first step of analysis. When the error check is
complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box
displays the results. For more information,
see Error Checking.
Batch Run - Error checks the model in a non-

interactive way. This process halts only for
fatal errors. It uses the existing or default
static load cases and performs the static
analysis.
Edit Static Load Cases - Displays the Static

Analysis dialog box. For more information on
static analysis, see Static Analysis.
View Static Results - Provides an interactive

review of static analysis results for the open
job. The Static Output Processor window
automatically displays upon completion of a
static analysis. For more information, see
Static Output Processor.
Dynamic Analysis - Performs dynamic

analysis on a piping model. For more
information, see Dynamic Analysis.
Navigation Tools Toolbar
The Navigation Tools toolbar contains functions that help you move about the Classic Piping
Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the following functions.
First Element - Skips to the first element.
Previous Element - Skips to the previous

element.
Next Element - Skips to the next element.
Last Element - Skips to the last element.
Continue - Moves the dialog box to the next

element in the model. The software adds a
new element if there is no next element.
Duplicate Element - Duplicates the last
element in a model so that you can quickly
continue building the model. Select the last
element, and then click Duplicate Element.
For more information on duplicating groups
of elements in a model, see Block Operations
Duplicate.
If you select an element that is not at

the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next
element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
Undo - Reverses or cancels any modeling

steps. This can also be accomplished by
pressing Ctrl-Z. You can undo an unlimited
number of steps. Undo is limited only by the
amount of available memory.
Redo - Repeats the last step done You can

redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is
limited by the amount of available memory.
List Operations Toolbar
The List Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
List Input - Displays the model in a

spreadsheet view at the bottom of the Classic
Piping Input dialog box. From this view, you
can quickly review and enter input data.
Additionally, you can rotate the 3D model
along the various axes and duplicate input
values from the List Input view. For more
information, see List.
Input Tools Toolbar
The Input Toolbars toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
Archive - Assigns a password to the job to

prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or
to type the password to unlock the file.
Archived input files cannot be altered or
saved without this password; however, they
can be opened and reviewed. For more
information, see Archive.
Insert - Inserts an element. For more

information, see Insert Element.
Delete - Deletes all selected elements.
You must select the current element to delete

the current element. You can also select and
delete other elements without deleting the
current element. For more information, see
Delete Element.
Break - Divides an element into two or more

individual elements. For more information,
see Break.
Global Coordinates - Specifies the absolute

(global) coordinates for the start node of
each disconnected pipe system segment. For
more information, see View/Set Coordinates.
Close Loop - Closes a loop by filling in the

delta coordinates between two nodes in the
model.
Increment Node - Specifies the increment

between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal
increment set in Configure/Setup when
generating the From and To nodes for new
elements. You can override this behavior by
typing a different value in this dialog box. For
more information, see Auto Node Number
Increment.
Distance - Finds the distance between two

specified nodes or between any two points
you select on the model. For more
information, see Distance.
Valve Flange Database - Provides access to

the CADWorx valve and flange databases.
This command displays the Valve and Flange
Database: <database name> dialog box. For
more information, see Valve Flange Database.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Creates expansion

joints and displays the Expansion Joint
Database <data file> and Expansion Joint
Modeler dialog boxes. For more information,
see Expansion Joint.
Title - Displays the title page of the current
job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored
with the problem, and may be used for
detailing run histories, discussing
assumptions, and so on. These lines may be
printed with the output report through the
input echo.
Hanger Design Criteria - Specifies global

spring hanger design criteria for the model.
For more information, see Hanger Design
Control Data.
Intersection SIF Scratchpad - Displays the

Review Intersection SIF's dialog box. You can
calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs)
for intersection configurations under different
codes. For more information, see Intersection
SIF Scratchpad.
Bend SIF Scratchpad - Displays the Review

Bend SIF's dialog box. You can calculate
stress intensification factors (SIFs) for bend
configurations under different codes. For
more information, see Bend SIF Scratchpad.
DNV Wall Thickness Calculator - Displays the

DNV Wall Thickness Calculator dialog box.
You can calculate DNV 2017 output for the
selected pipe element using the scratchpad.
For more information, see DNV Wall
Thickness Calculator.
B31.8 Buckling Calculator - Displays the
B31.8 Buckling Calculator dialog box. You
can calculate B31.8-2018 buckling strain and
stress values. For more information, see
B31.8 Buckling Calculator.
Special Execution Options - Displays the

Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
The software globally sets the parameters for
the model. For more information, see Special
Execution Parameters.
Block Operations Toolbar
The Block Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D model, contains the following functions. For more information, see Performing
Block Operations.
Rotate - Rotates elements defined in the

block. For more information, see Rotate.
Duplicate - Duplicates elements in a block.

For more information, see Duplicate.
Delete - Deletes the selected block of

elements.
Renumber - Rearranges the node numbers in

the block. For more information, see Nodes.
Invert - Assigns new From Node and To Node

values to the selected block of elements. The
Invert command reverses the order of the
elements in the selected group as well as the
node numbering while preserving the
geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of

elements) may be selected in either the
Elements dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or
the Line Numbers dialog box.
For more information, see Invert.
Change Sequence - Changes or rearranges

the sequence (order) of elements while
preserving the geometry. For more
information, see Change Sequence.
Aux Tools Toolbar
The Aux Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains auxiliary data functions most often used in piping input. Use this toolbar
to quickly access the Auxiliary Data dialog box found in the piping input. This toolbar includes
the following functions.
Bend - Puts a bend at the To node of every

element that you have selected on the model.
Select an element(s) on the model and click
Bend to view the Bends tab on the Auxiliary
Data dialog box of the current piping input
job. Click the down arrow to change the icon
function to delete all bends or toggle between
the select and delete functions.
Rigids - Replaces the element(s) that you

selected with a rigid. Select an element(s) on
the model and click Rigids to view the Rigids
tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the
current piping input job. Click the down arrow
to change the icon function to delete all rigid
elements or toggle between the select and
delete functions.
Expansion Joint - Replaces the currently

selected element with an expansion joint.
Select an element(s) on the model and click
Expansion Joint to view the Expansion Joints
tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the
current piping input job. Click the down arrow
to change the icon function to delete all
expansion joints or toggle between the select
and delete functions.
Reducer - Select an element(s) on the model

and click Reducer to view the Reducers tab
on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current
piping input job. Click the down arrow to
change the icon function to delete all
reducers or toggle between the select and
delete functions (Toggle).
SIFs/Tees - Inserts a SIF or Tee at the end of

the selected elements on the model.
Restraints - Adds a new restraint or deletes

an existing restraint to the selected element
on the model. For more information, see
Restraints.
Hangers - Adds a hanger to each of the

selected elements on the model. Click the
down arrow to change the icon function to
delete all hangers or toggle between the
select and delete functions.
Nozzles - Adds a nozzle to each of the

selected elements on the model.
Displacements - Adds a displacement at

each of the selected elements on the model.
Forces/Moments - Adds a forces and

moments at each of the selected elements on
the model.
Wind/Wave - Adds wind or wave details to

Uniform Loads - Adds a uniform load to each

of the selected elements on the model.
Allowables - Adds an allowable stress at

Node Names - Adds a node name to each of

the selected elements on the model.
Offsets - Adds an offset to each of the

selected elements on the model.
Flange - Adds a flange to either end or both

ends of the selected elements on the model.
Click the down arrow to change the icon
function to delete all flanges or toggle
between the select and delete functions.
Edit Tools Toolbar
The Edit Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used editing windows in
piping input. This toolbar includes the following functions.
Node Number Edit Window- Displays the Edit

Node Numbers dialog box. For more
information, see Node Numbers.
Mini-Delta Box - Displays the Edit Deltas

dialog box. For more information, see Deltas.
Mini-Pipe Size Box - Displays the Edit Pipe

Sizes dialog box. For more information, see
Pipe Sizes.
Mini-Temps and Pressures Box - Displays the

Edit Operating Conditions dialog box. For
more information, see Temperatures.
Mini-Material Box - Displays the Edit

Materials dialog box. For more information,
see Materials.
Mini-Elastic Properties Box - Displays the

Edit Elastic Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Elastic Properties.
Mini-Densities Box - Displays the Edit
Densities dialog box. For more information,
see Densities.
Mini-Aux Screens Box - Displays the

Auxiliary Data dialog box. For more
information, see Auxiliary Element Data.
Reference CAD Models Toolbar
The Reference CAD Models toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box or the 3D Model, contains icons that let you import CAD-based models into the
CADWorx Model - Opens a CADWorx model

for use with this model. If you have already
opened a CADWorx model, click the down
arrow on the icon to select Load CWx Model.
For more information, see Open CADWorx
Model.
S3D/SPR Model - Opens the Load an

S3D/SPR Model dialog box. If you have
already opened a S3D or SPR model, click the
down arrow on the icon to select other
options, including the Show/Hide S3D/SPR
Model, Dim S3D/SPR Model, S3D/SPR
Visibility Options. These options only display
when you have a S3D/SPR model already
open. For more information, see S3D/SPR
Model View and S3D/SPR Visibility Options.
Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used wizards in piping input.
This toolbar includes the following functions.
Static Seismic Wizard - Opens the Seismic

Wizard, which selects a Seismic code and its
associated data. For more information, see
Seismic Wizard.
Optimization Wizard - Opens the

Optimization Wizard, which assists with
expansion loop design. For more information,
see Optimization Wizard.
Import Model Toolbar
The Import Model toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains functions that let you access various import dialog boxes used in
Include Piping Files - Opens the Include

Piping Files dialog box, which lets you include
other piping models into the current piping
model. For more information, see Include
Piping Input Files.
Include Structural Files - Opens the Include

Structural Files dialog box, which lets you
include structural models into the current job.
For more information, see Including Structural
Input Files.
APCF - Opens the Advanced PCF Import
(APCF) dialog box, which provides an
interactive, customizable way to import
Piping Component Files (PCFs) into the
CAESAR II piping environment. For more
information, see Advanced PCF Import
(APCF).
Organization Tools Toolbar
The Organization Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains functions let you organize or move the elements on a model.
This toolbar includes the following functions.
Move Geometry - Selects or moves nodes or

node groups on the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Restricts mouse

movement on the model to the X axis.
Move Geometry (Y-Axis) - Restricts mouse

movement on the model to the Y axis.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Restricts mouse

movement on the model to the Z axis.
Customize Dialog Box
All toolbars: > Add or Remove Buttons > Customize
All toolbars: Right-click > Customize
Controls options for customizing the CAESAR II interface.

Profiles Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Profiles Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Allows the creation of custom toolbar configurations in the Piping Input window. A profile
consists of the toolbars displayed, the commands displayed on each toolbar, and the toolbar
positions.
You can create multiple profiles and switch between profiles as needed.
Profiles
Displays a list of the available toolbar configurations.
Functional - Groups the toolbars by function around the Piping Input window. Functional is the
default selection.
Classic - Displays toolbars in the locations used by previous versions of the software.
Set
Sets the selected profile as the active profile in the Piping Input window.
You can also double-click a profile in the Profiles list to set it.
New
Creates, names, and saves a new profile.
Save
Saves the selected profile. Click Save after making your needed changes on the Toolbars tab
and Commands tab.
Rename
Allows you to rename the selected profile.
Delete
Deletes the selected profile.
Import
Imports a .c2ppi profile file.
The software automatically saves the profile to the System Toolbars folder after
import.
Export
Exports the selected profile as a .c2ppi file.
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Controls options for customizing toolbars.
Toolbars
Displays the toolbars. Select the checkbox to display a toolbar. Clear the checkbox to hide the
toolbar. For a description of the available toolbars, see Toolbars.
New
Displays the New Toolbar dialog box, where you create a new custom toolbar and specify the
name for the toolbar.
Rename
Displays the Rename Toolbar dialog box, where you change the name for an existing custom
toolbar.
Delete
Deletes the selected toolbar. You can only delete custom toolbars.
Reset
Returns the toolbars to their original configuration.

You can also drag a toolbar directly in the Piping Input window to change the
location. You can dock a toolbar on any side of the window, or the toolbar can float above the
window.
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Controls options for adding commands to toolbars.
Categories
Controls the category of commands available to drag.
Commands
Lists the commands in the selected category. Select a command and drag it to a toolbar.
You can also customize command locations directly on a toolbar in the Piping Input
window by pressing ALT-SHIFT and dragging a command button to a new position.
Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Controls options for assigning keyboard shortcuts to commands.
Category
Specifies the category of commands to modify.
Commands
Lists the commands in the category.
Key assignments
Lists the keyboard shortcuts assigned to the selected command.
Press new shortcut key
Displays the shortcut key.
Description
Displays a description of the selected command.

Assign
Adds the shortcut key from the Press new shortcut key field to the Key assignments list for
the command.
Remove
Deletes the selected entry from the Key assignments list.
Reset All
Returns all keyboard shortcuts to their default settings.
Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Controls options for customizing menus.
Show Menu
Specifies the active menu.
Reset
Returns the selected menu to the default settings.
Select context menu
Specifies the active context menu.
Reset
Returns the selected context menu to the default settings.
Reset
Piping Input menu: View > Reset
Piping Input Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset Plot
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Reset
Static Output Processor Reset Tools toolbar: Restore/Reset

Resets the view to the default settings. If a list has focus, resets the list to the default size.
Front View
Piping Input menu: View > Front View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Front
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Front View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Front
Shortcut Key: ALT+Z
Displays the model from the front.
Back View
Piping Input menu: View > Back View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Back
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Back View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Back
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+Z
Displays the model from the back.
Top View
Piping Input menu: View > Top View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Top
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Top View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Top
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+Y
Displays the model from the top.

Bottom View
Piping Input menu: View > Bottom View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Bottom
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Bottom View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Bottom
Shortcut key: ALT+Y
Displays the model from the bottom.
Left-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Left-side View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Left
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Left-side View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Left
Shortcut key: ALT+X
Displays the model from the left side.
Right-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Right-side View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Right
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Right-side View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Right
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+X
Displays the model from the right side.

Southeast ISO View
Piping Input menu: View > Southeast ISO View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Southeast Isometric View
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Southeast ISO View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Southeast Isometric View
Shortcut key: F10
Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.
Southwest ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Southwest ISO View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Southwest Isometric View
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Southwest ISO View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Southwest Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.
Northeast ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Northeast ISO View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Northeast Isometric View
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Northeast ISO View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Northeast Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.
Northwest ISO View

Piping Input menu: View > Northwest ISO View
Piping Input Standard Views toolbar: Northwest Isometric View
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > Northwest ISO View
Static Output Processor Standard Views toolbar: Northwest Isometric View
Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.
4 View
Piping Input menu: View > 4 View
Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: 4 View
Static Output Processor menu: PlotView > 4 View
Static Output Processor Plot Tools toolbar: 4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view
to remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add
views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Review Error Report

Piping Input menu: View > Review Error Report
Displays the Errors and Warnings dialog box. This option is only available if you have run the
File > Error Check command. For more information, see Error Check.
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box
Review Static Results

Piping Input menu: View > Review Static Results
Standard Views toolbar: Review Static Results
Displays the results of the static load analysis. This option is only available if you have run the
Edit > Edit Static Load Cases command. For more information, see Edit Static Load Cases.
Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.
Reset Toolbar Layout

Piping Input menu: Tools > Reset Toolbar Layout
Sets toolbars to the default layout.
Mini-windows
Piping Input menu: Tools > Mini-windows
Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to
provide specific types of data.
Node Numbers - Displays the Edit Node

Numbers dialog box.
Edit Deltas - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog

box.
Pipe Sizes - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes

dialog box.
Temps & Pressures - Displays the Edit

Operating Conditions dialog box.
Materials - Displays the Edit Materials dialog
box.
Elastic Properties - Displays the Edit Elastic

Properties dialog box.
Densities - Displays the Edit Densities dialog

box.
Auxiliary Data - Displays the Auxiliary Data

dialog box.
Classic Input - Displays the Classic Piping

Input dialog box.
Import/Export Displacements from File

Piping Input menu: Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File
Imports or exports nodal displacements from a file.
The software allows you to import and export displacements to and from a flat .disp text file.
This feature is very useful in situations where you need to define several displacements in a
CAESAR II model. You can import the displacements into a model with a few mouse clicks
instead of manually typing all the displacements in the Classic Piping Input. A displacements
file in the specified format must exist.
This feature works on the From and To nodes, CNodes, and Bend middle nodes in either the
fixed ASCII file format (.disp), or the comma separated value (.csv) format. For information on
editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules. You can easily generate and maintain a
displacement file in .csv format using Microsoft Excel™.
Import/Export Displacements Dialog Box
Controls parameters for importing and exporting nodal displacements.
Export Displacements To a File
Specifies the file name for the export. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button to
browse to the file.
Export
Exports the nodal displacements to the specified file.
Import Displacements From a File
Specifies the file name for the import. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button to
browse to the file.
Import
Imports the specified nodal displacement file.
Displacement File Formats
A displacement file is a flat text file in versions 5.10 and 5.20, which can be created and edited
by any text editor such as Notepad.
In CAESAR II Version 12, a displacement file can be in either fixed format .disp or comma
separated value format .csv.
For both formats, use * to indicate a comment line in the displacement file. You can type
anything on the line following the *.
Displacement files can have as many comment lines as necessary.
The comment line is not counted in line numbering in the file format descriptions.
Fixed Format
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of
inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1,
RX1, RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.
e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values
must be 12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should
be 697 (1+58x12) characters long.
f. The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its

location in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58
correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.
g. A value must occupy a 12-character field. When a value has fewer than 12
characters, you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12-
characters in length. If there is no displacement value, a 12 character blank field
must be reserved for it.
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.
Comma Separated Value Format
A comma separated value format displacement file has the .csv extension and follows this
format:
1. The first line has only the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of
inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line could have 58 values: Nodes X, Y, Z and the 54 displacements for the
node (6 degrees-of-freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number, which is required.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of the node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1,
RX1, RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9. They are optional. You can specify
all 54 values, or not a single value, or any number of values in between.
e. Values are separated by commas. The length of a displacement data line is not
fixed.
f. Because each value is followed by a comma, a comma counter is used to

determine the placement of the value in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at
positions 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in
the model, respectively.
g. A value can be any number of characters in length. When there is no displacement

value, you can use a zero length or blank field. For example, if a comma is followed
by a comma, or if a comma is followed by blank spaces and then a comma, it
means that its corresponding location in a CAESAR II model has no displacement
value.
Generally, the csv format is recommended for a displacement file because it is relatively easy
to generate and maintain in Microsoft Excel™. The fixed format of a displacement file is more
difficult to maintain.
A displacement file from version 5.10 or 5.20 cannot be used directly in CAESAR II
Version 12 because the formats are different.
Warning Messages
There are three kinds of warning messages:
1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not
exist in the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement
file exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots
in the model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible
for you to input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
does not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.
Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending
node in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.
Summary Report
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations.
The reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a
CAESAR II Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
6. The number of displacement nodes that do not have displacements.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model.
8. The number of displacement nodes that are replacing values in the model.
9. The number of displacement nodes that are new in the model.
Similar in operation to the warning messages, the summary report can help you identify
potential problems in a displacement file. However, you should remember the following
points:
1. Because every displacement data line in a displacement file has a node number, the
total number of nodes processed is equal to the total number of displacement data lines
in the file.
2. Each displacement data line should have a unique node number. However, if the same
node number appears in many data lines, it would be counted many times. In this case,
the displacement values in the last data line are used in the model, overwriting the
previous values.
3. If no node number appears in a displacement data line, CAESAR II indicates the

corresponding data line number and stops the import process.
4. If there is a node in a displacement file that is not in the model, or cannot find a slot in
the model, or does not have a displacement, the displacement file or the model should
be checked carefully to understand the reasons behind it.
5. If a displacement node exists both in the model and the displacement file, the
displacement values from the file are used to overwrite the ones in the model, and this
node is counted as a replacement node.
6. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import should be equal to
the number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import, plus the number
of new displacement nodes.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model should
be equal to the number of replacement nodes, plus the number of new displacement
nodes.
Exporting Displacements to a File
1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.

2. Type the path and name of a displacement file in the Export Displacements To a File
box, or click ... to browse to the file.
3. Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
4. Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog.
If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job, an export operation creates a

displacement template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.
Importing Displacements from a File
1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of the displacement file in the Import Displacements From a
File box, or click ... to browse to the file.
The Open dialog box displays.
Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:
Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).
You can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking
Displacement Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type list.
3. Select the displacement file.
4. Click Open.
5. Click Import.
During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement node, a
warning message displays. A summary report is generated after all displacement data is
processed.
For more details about warning messages and the summary report, see Imposed Loads.
6. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, click Done.
The first two figures show displacement files Notepad for disp and csv formats. The third
and fourth figures show displacement files in Microsoft Excel.
For a detailed description of both file formats, see Displacement File Formats.
Examples
Notepad (*.disp) format

Notepad (*.csv) format
Excel (*.csv) format

Excel Example (*.csv) format Displacement File Template
If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a

displacement template file.
3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping
Input dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays
according to the configuration defaults. These defaults include:
A rendered view - restraints shown

XYZ compass - isometric view
Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other
relevant items are added.
The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available
option to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in
the form of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete, the status message
changes to Ready.
When you hover the cursor over a button, the name of the button and a short description of
the functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot utility.
You can access commands by clicking buttons, by selecting menu items, or by using hot keys.
Center Line View - Displays model data in
single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other
element information items display. Display
the volume or double line plot by clicking the
corresponding button. Press V to switch
among the views in the following order:
Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line
Mode / Center Line View.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded

3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Silhouette - Displays the model as a

silhouette. Restraints and other element
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model

as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information
items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire

frame. Restraints and other element
Translucent - Displays the model as

translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other
element information items display.
Front - Displays the model from the front.
Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back.

Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top.

Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom.

Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left.

Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right.

Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model

isometrically from the southeast.
Alternatively, press F10.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node

numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N.
Click the down arrow to display node
numbers for a specific element, such as for
only restraints or only anchors. Select Names
Only to display only the node names on the
model, and not the node numbers.
Length - Turns the display of element lengths
on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Select Element - Select a single element in

the model. Hover over an element in the
model to display information about that
element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or
remove elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in

the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection
by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by
pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Perspective - Displays the model in

perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in

orthographic mode.
You can turn off the display of node numbers (for restraints, hangers, and anchors)
for a clearer view. The size of boundary condition symbols (such as restraints, anchors, and
hangers) is relative to the pipe size outer diameter. You can change the size of these symbols
clicking the black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting a size from the list.
You can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, and so
on by clicking Change Display Options . For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics.
Reset - Returns the model returns to its

default state as defined by the configuration.
Any elements hidden by the Range command
are restored.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the

magnification of the model. Move the cursor
up or down holding the left mouse button.
Release the mouse button to stop the zoom.
Alternatively, press + and - to zoom in and
out. You can change the zoom level of the
model while in another command by rotating
the mouse wheel.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification

of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while
holding the mouse button, stretch a box
diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element

in the view.
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the

view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate

the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the
left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and
move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to
update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the
User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box. For more information, see
Configuring 3D Graphics. During rotation, the
model may in centerline mode, or some of the
geometry details may disappear or become
distorted. This is to improve the display
speed. The actual conversion depends on the
size and complexity of the model. After the
rotation is complete, the model returns to its
original state.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to

a hand. Move the cursor while holding down
the left mouse button. You can also pan the
view while another command is active by
holding the center mouse button (or wheel)
down while moving the mouse.
Walk Through - Explores the model with a

setup similar to a virtual reality application.
This command produces the effect of walking
towards the model. For more information, see
Walking Through the Model.
Load CADWorx Model - Displays the model in

CADWorx.
Building Models Quickly

CAESAR II has several features that help you build models more quickly from the 3D model.
Select one or groups of elements and right-click the model to access context menus so
you can quickly perform some of your most common tasks. See Performing Single-
Element Operations and Performing Block Operations for more information.
Limit the items you display on the model to simplify the functions you need to use. See
Limiting the Display for more information.
Use legends to update properties across the current model. See Updating Properties
from the 3D Model for more information.
Performing Single-Element Operations

Access the most frequently used commands through a right-click Element context menu, all
without ever leaving your 3D model. These commands include:
Insert, break, or delete elements
Insert, delete, and edit restraints
Look up valve and flange data from the Valve and Flange Database
Insert or delete rigid elements (such as valves and flanges)
To quickly access single element commands from the 3D model
1. Select any element on the model and right-click the element to see the commands
available from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click menu. You must also
right-click directly on the element selected to access the Element context menu.
2. Select the element command that you want to perform.
The software completes the action and moves the cursor to the next logical box on the
piping input.
Performing Block Operations

Perform block (global) operations to elements in the model using one of the following
methods:
To access Block Operations commands from the 3D model
1. Access the Block Operations commands from one of the following options:
a. Click the Block Operations toolbar, or
b. Select more than one element on the model and right-click to see the block
operations available from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click element context
menu.
2. Select one of the following options:
Rotate
Duplicate
Delete
Renumber
Invert
Change Sequence
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping
input.
To access Block Operations commands from the Elements dialog box
1. Right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu.
2. Click Block Operation.
3. Select one of the sub-menu items to perform the indicated operation.
Rotate
Delete
Duplicate
Nodes
Invert
Change Sequence
Status
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping
input.
To define a block of elements in the 3D model
1. Click Select Element on the Standard Operators toolbar and select a single element on
the 3D model.
The selected element highlights.
To select more than one element, press the Shift key while clicking the
additional elements.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
Alternatively, you can click Select Group on the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a box
around the items you want to select.
The highlighted elements define the set that any Block Operations command affects. A block
can contain any number of elements, from a single element to every element in the model.
To define a block of elements from the Elements dialog box
1. Move the cursor to the first element in the group (block) to be operated on and click the
row number for that item on the far left of the dialog box.
The software highlights the row for the element highlights in the Element dialog box and in
the 3D Graphics pane.
2. Move the cursor to the last element in the group (block) to be operated on, press Shift
and click the corresponding row number.
3. Alternatively, you can Select Group in the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a box
around the items you want to select.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations affect. A block may
contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
To define a block of elements by selecting by Line Number
1. Display the Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Select the element or block of elements for which you want to perform a block
operation.
The corresponding element(s) highlight in the 3D Graphics pane.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations change. A block may
contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
Limiting the Display

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This
may be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view.
This command displays a dialog box that
allows you to specify the From and To nodes
for which you want to search. For more
information, see Find Node.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane

for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In
many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of
this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more
details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the

handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or
the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the
cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the

three axes.
Range - Displays only the elements that

contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a
group of related elements in a large model.
This command displays the Range dialog
box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range.
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers

pane which allows graphical editing of line
numbers. You can do the following from this
pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of

elements that have been selected on the 3D
graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and

unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one

line number to another existing line number,
simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements
between existing Line Numbers in the Line
Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number

name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the
3D pane and are selected to perform Block
operations.
For more information, see Line Numbers.
Updating Properties from the 3D Model

You can update many of the piping input properties globally from within the Legends dialog
box in the 3D model.
To update a piping input property from the 3D model
1. Select the property you want to update using the Legends toolbar in 3D model.
You can also update many of these properties by right-clicking, selecting Highlights
from the context menu, and then specifying the property that you want to edit.
The Legend dialog box opens with the selected property displayed.
2. Double-click on the property value in the left column to open the Edit box.
3. Type a new value in the Edit box and press ENTER or click anywhere in the dialog box.
The software updates all elements that have the same property value, represented in the
Legend dialog box, on the 3D model, and in the List dialog box.
Currently, the software does not include global update functionality for the following
piping input properties:
Materials
Piping Codes
Forces
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave Data
Displacements
Pipe Density
Configuring 3D Graphics
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions.
When you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Home > Setup > Configure on the main window ribbon.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor dialog box displays.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.
These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the
graphics according to these settings.
If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an
XML data file (jobname.XML) in the current data folder. After starting another input session,
CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes
the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics
operator.
Option Description
Colors Select any color item in the list, then click to display a
Windows color selection tool. Select the new color. Click
Reset All to return all settings to CAESAR II defaults, as
defined in configuration.
Fonts Selecting any font item in the list, then click to display
the standard Windows font selection tool. Set the
options to meet your requirements and click OK.
Changing the Model Display

You can specify the way the model displays when you open a file. The session can start with a
preset command active (such as Zoom), or start with the last command still active. Similarly,
the graphics can start in a preset view (such as isometric) or in the last rotated zoomed
position.
Option Description
Show Bounding Box Determines if rotations using the mouse include an

outline box surrounding the model.
Hide Overlapped Text Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.
Restore Previous Operator Determines whether the software remembers your last
command (operator) between sessions or always
defaults to a specified command.
Restore Previous View Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the
last displayed view of the model, or defaults to a
specified view.
Default Projection Mode Determines the initial projection style of the model.
Visibility Alters the degree of transparency when translucent pipe

is activated. Increasing this value makes it easier to see
through the pipe elements.
The Visibility option is only effective when

viewing the model in rendered mode.
Markers Displays a symbol denoting the element’s end points.
Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure.
You can make changes to some piping input properties from the Legends dialog box. The
software updates all elements that have the same property value in the model. For more
information, see Updating Properties from the 3D Model.
Command Description
Diameters Updates the model to show each diameter in a

different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to
verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the
diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs and
update diameter settings.
Wall Thickness Updates the model to show each wall thickness

in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system
or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the
thicknesses defined in the model. You can
Insulation Thickness Updates the model to show each insulation

thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes
have been made. Alternatively, press I. A color
key displays the thicknesses defined in the
model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
You can change the display to cladding
thickness or refractory thickness by selecting
that option from the list.
Cladding Thickness Updates the model to show each cladding

see the cladding thickness variations
have been made. A color key displays the
You can change the display to insulation

thickness or refractory thickness by selecting
Refractory Thickness Updates the model to show each refractory

see the refractory thickness variations
have been made. A color key displays the

thickness or cladding thickness by selecting
Material Updates the model to show each material in a

different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to
verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the
materials defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes Updates the model to show each piping code in
a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made.
Corrosion Updates the model to show each corrosion

allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the corrosion
allowances defined in the model. You can
Pipe Density Updates the model to show each pipe density in

a different color. Use this option to see the pipe
density variations throughout the system or to
verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the pipe densities defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.
Fluid Density Updates the model to show each fluid density in

a different color. Use this option to see the fluid
density variations throughout the system or to
verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the fluid densities defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.
Insulation Density Updates the model to show each insulation

density in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation density variations throughout
the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation
densities defined in the model. You can change
You can change the display to cladding density,

insulation or cladding unit weight, or refractory
density by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Density Updates the model to show each cladding

see the cladding density variations throughout
made. A color key displays the cladding

density, insulation or cladding unit weight, or
refractory density by selecting that option from
the list.
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or

cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation or
cladding unit weights defined in the model. You
can change the assigned colors to meet your
needs.

density, cladding density, or refractory density
by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density Updates the model to show each refractory

see the refractory density variations throughout
made. A color key displays the refractory

density, insulation or cladding unit weight, or
insulation density by selecting that option from
the list.
The Legend dialog box can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use
any of orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the
model highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the
upper left corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away
from the view.
Manipulating the Toolbar

You can rearrange or remove buttons on toolbars. There are two methods to make these
adjustments.
Right-click the toolbar, and click Customize.
Remove or reposition the button using drag and drop.
To remove buttons from the toolbar, click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar
and then click Add or Remove Buttons. Turn on the check box to add buttons to the toolbar.
Clear the check box to remove buttons. To rearrange buttons, press ALT and then drag the
button to a different location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click
Reset .
For more information, see Toolbars.

Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and Wind/Wave
Loads
You can display applied or predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind and wave
loads in a table. You can scroll the display windows vertically and/or horizontally to view all
node points where data has been defined. To move through the defined displacement or force
vectors 1 through 9, click Next >> and Previous <<. The color key assists you in locating the
node points on the model when the model geometry is complex.
The displacements window shows user-specified values as well as free or fixed degrees of
freedom (DOF). In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the
displacement load vectors. If a DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load
vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.
Forces - Turns the display of forces and

moments on and off.
Uniform Loads - Updates the model to show

each uniform load in a different color. Use
this option to see the uniform load variations
throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key
displays the uniform loads defined in the
model. You can change the assigned colors
to meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a

table. Use the scroll bars to view all the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move
through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The

Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was
first defined. Because the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or
disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave - Updates the model to show
each wind or wave load in a different color.
Use this option to see the variations
throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the
model.
The wind and wave load parameters display

in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all the
data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move
through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in

red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the
relevant data.
The legend window can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use
any of orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the
model highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the
upper left corner of the page. This is true even if the actual legend window has been
dragged away from the view.
You can display predefined displacements by pressing F3. You can display
forces/moment vectors by pressing F5.
Select Element displays element data. When this command is active, hovering the
cursor over a pipe element displays the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe
size data. Clicking an element highlights the element and updates the information on
the dialog box. Click in the empty space of the graphics view to remove highlighting. The
dialog box still contains the information from the last element that you selected.
Saving an Image for Later Presentation

You can add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II stress reports. Click File >
Save as Graphics Image to save the graphics view as a static image. The software transfers
model geometry, colors, highlighting, restraints, and other options to the graphic. The default
graphic file name is the job name with a .tif extension. The image format can also be
changed.
You can use the Markups Toolbar to add additional lines or annotations to the image.
Walking Through the Model

CAESAR II lets you explore the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality
game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model. After you are close to or inside the
model, you can look left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down.
Walk Through is useful in providing a real-time interactive view of the model.
Click Walk Through to display the cursor as a pair of feet.
Walking Around
You can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving
the mouse toward the top of the window. Move back by doing the opposite.
You can also pan the view by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving
the mouse. This provides the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to
either side.
Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation.

Clicking the various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added
benefit of providing the ability to move in a perfectly straight line.
In addition, Walk Through also provides you with the added functionality of determining the
walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you
first click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking,
effect walk through's operation:
Shift - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
Ctrl - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
Alt - Enables you to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key,
automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward.
To exit from this command, click any other command.
Moving Elements
The Move Geometry commands, located in the Edit Mode toolbar, let you select and move
nodes or elements along a specified axis.
To move a restraint along a corresponding pipe centerline, select Move Geometry and specify
the direction of the axis for the line. Or, if your model includes an expansion loop, select Move
Geometry to change the length or depth of the loop in the direction of the specified axis.
When you select Move Geometry , the software keeps the command active until you
click another operator, most commonly a command on the Standard Operators Toolbar, such
as Select Element .
To move elements on the 3D model
1. Click Move Geometry to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points.
On bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis, press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode
toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number,
the movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple
directions at once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.
S3D/SPR Model View

CAESAR II provides functionality to load Smart 3D (S3D) or SmartPlant Review (SPR)
reference models either partially or in full. You can then rotate and/or filter the loaded
S3D/SPR graphic models to adjust the visibility or isolate specific component classes. This
functionality allows you to interpret the design environment surrounding the piping system
and use this knowledge to readily identify optimal support point and expansion loop locations,
judge available clearances, and so forth. Generally, this functionality provides a more
seamless means of communication across all disciplines involved in the design process
when Smart 3D is used as the overall design platform.
Click S3D/SPR Model in the Reference CAD Models toolbar in the Classic Piping Input
and select one of the following drop-down menu options:
Load S3D/SPR Model
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model
Dim S3D/SPR Model
S3D/SPR Visibility Options
Load an S3D/SPR Model

To Load a Full Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model from a VUE or HSF file
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .
The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
Alternatively, you can type the path name in the field.
3. Select Full Load.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original
angle of the model when you loaded it.
5. Click Load File to display the graphic file in the CAESAR II 3D Graphics pane.
You can return to the dialog box and select another angle from the Model
Rotation. The software displays the rotation immediately on the 3D graphics pane so
that you can review the rotation before you click Load File.
To Load a Partial Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model using the Bounding Box
The bounding box functionality allows you to specify which portion of the graphic model to
import into your CAESAR II model.
You can either define the bounding box to the boundaries of the existing CAESAR II model or
select part of the existing CAESAR II model using the Select Group option on the Standard
Operators toolbar. Then, click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box, and adjust as
needed.
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .
The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
3. Select Partial Load.
Select Re-Import if you need to refresh or change your visibility settings.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original
angle of the model when you loaded it.
5. Select the Use Model Bounding-Box option.

Alternatively, select elements in the area of interest by drawing a selection
window around them using the Selection Group option in the Standard Operators
toolbar. Then, select Bounding Box from Selection in the Bounding Box Coordinates.
6. Click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can then resize or pan the cube in all six dimensions (up, down, left, right, front,
back) until you have enclosed all the parts of the graphic model you want to load into a
CAESAR II model.
As shown in the figure above, the bounding box has six markers:
Anchor Marker - Indicates the starting point of the bounding box (shown in red).
You cannot resize the model using this marker.
The three faces to which the anchor marker is connected are fixed (cannot be
moved via any of the markers). You can move the whole bounding box by panning
it.
Top Face Marker - Moves the top face (for example, the face that is perpendicular
to top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).
Base Markers - Allows you to re-size the bounding box by selecting any one of
three markers and dragging the mouse.
Base Marker 1 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3.
Base Marker 2 - Moves these two faces simultaneously.
Base Marker 3 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 1.
Centroid Marker - Sits at the center of the bounding box volume and moves the
whole bounding box from one position to another.
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes,
depending on how you manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics
markers. The Starting Point boxes are view-only boxes that are for informational
purposes only.
7. Click Load File.
The software loads all components that are inside the bounding box into your model. A
component that originates within the bounding box and extends beyond the boundaries of
the bounding box displays in its entirety. A component that lies completely outside of the
bounding box is totally excluded from the view.
Load S3D/SPR Model Dialog Box

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar of piping input, click S3D/SPR Model . The Load
S3D/SPR Model dialog box displays.
You can load a partial or a full VUE or HSF model. From the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box,
you can specify to rotate the model upon import into CAESAR II, if needed. You can also
specify a bounding box area, which indicates a section of the model that you want to load into
CAESAR II.
Select a File
Select a Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review VUE or a HOOPS Stream File (HSF) file from your
hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your graphics file.
Full Load
Select to load the entire S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE file or HSF.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Partial Load
Select if you want to load a specified portion of the S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE
file or HSF. This option allows you to use the bounding box to specify the section of the
graphic model to load into your CAESAR II model.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Re-Import
Select to re-import the VUE file or HSF.
Model Orientation
Specifies the north direction of the Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model. CAESAR II uses
this value in combination with the Set North Direction option in Special Execution Parameters
and Advanced PCF Import to properly orient the imported model. Select -X, +X, -Y, +Y, -Z, or
+Z.
Use Model Bounding Box
Select to use the boundaries of your existing CAESAR II model for the graphic model you are
loading.
Bounding Box from Selection
Select to define a bounding box for a selected part of the graphic model in which you are
loading.
Starting Point X
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.
Starting Point Y
Starting Point Z
Bounding Volume - Width
Specifies the width of the bounding box volume.
Bounding Volume - Height
Specifies the height of the bounding box volume.
Bounding Volume - Depth
Specifies the depth of the bounding box volume.
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select Show 3D Model
from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
Dim S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select Dim 3D Model from
the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.

S3D/SPR Visibility Options
In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select S3D/SPR Visibility
Options from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D/SPR model to display. You can then modify the
graphics to display/hide types of components from the S3D/SPR graphic model.
S3D/SPR Visibility Options Dialog Box

Allows you to hide details of the S3D/SPR graphic model that are not needed or could be
distracting while you are working with the model in CAESAR II. For example, if you import a
Smart 3D model using the CAESAR II APCF or PCF import functions and want to reference the
S3D/SPR graphic model for context, the piping elements in the CAESAR II model and the
S3D/SPR graphic reference model can overlap and cause confusion. You can turn off the
display of piping elements from the S3D/SPR Visibility Options, which enables you to compare
the changes more easily.
To edit S3D/SPR visibility options for a loaded VUE file or HSF model
1. Select S3D/SPR Visibility Options from the S3D/SPR Model drop-down list in the
piping input.
The S3D/SPR Visibility Options dialog box displays.

2. Select a Visibility percentage from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of
components in a S3D or SPR model.
The Visibility percentage indicates the percentage of light allowed to pass through the
object. For example, a low percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly
invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check boxes to display the elements for a given category or
select the top check box to display all the categories.
The graphic on the loaded model display based on the specified visibility values.
4. Click the Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D/SPR model graphic.
5. Click the refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D/SPR model graphic and display
the revised visibility settings.
Copyright
Copyright© Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.

Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAESAR II Users Guide

1. Quick access toolbar

3. Ribbon groups and commands on each tab

4. News channel, containing release, event, and training information

Main window ribbon: Home > New

Starts a new piping or structural job.

New Job Name Specification Dialog Box

Main window ribbon: File > Open

1. Click File > Open.

2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.

The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.

5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.

Default Data Folder

Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access > Examples

Opens the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\software version\Examples folder.

Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access > System

Opens the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\[software version]\System folder. From

Default Data Folder

Main window ribbon: File > Folder Access > Backup

Opens the C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\[software version]\Backup folder.

Main window ribbon: Help > Search Help

Main window ribbon: Help > Quick Reference Guide

Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Configuration Editor

Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Configuration Editor

Main window ribbon: File > About > Configuration Editor

Piping Input menu: Environment > CAESAR II Configuration

CAESAR II Tools toolbar: CAESAR II Configuration

Check for Updates

Main window ribbon: Help > Check for Updates

Verifies whether the most current version of the software is installed.

Main window ribbon: Help > Contact Us

Main window ribbon: File > About > Contact Us

Main window ribbon: Help > Smart Support

Main window ribbon: File > About > Support

Closes the software.

Main window ribbon: Home > New

Main window ribbon: File > New

Starts a new piping or structural job.

New Job Name Specification Dialog Box

Main window ribbon: File > Open

1. Click File > Open.

2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.

The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.

5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.

Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Piping Input

Underground Pipe Modeler

Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Structural Input

Main window ribbon: Home > Analysis > Static Analysis

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Static Analysis

In the Classic Piping Input window:

Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Static Load Cases

CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Edit Static Load Cases

Main window ribbon: Home > Analysis > Dynamic Analysis

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Dynamic Analysis

In the Classic Piping Input window:

CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Dynamic Analysis

Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Static

Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Static

In the Classic Piping Input window:

CAESAR II Tools toolbar: View Static Results

Generate Stress Isometrics

Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Configuration Editor

Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Configuration Editor

Main window ribbon: File > About > Configuration Editor